Patent Publication Number: US-2023147296-A1

Title: Systems and Methods for Providing Network Connectivity and Remote Monitoring, Optimization, and Control of Pool/Spa Equipment

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     The present application is a continuation of, and claims priority to, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/905,661 filed on Jun. 18, 2020, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/862,982 filed on Jun. 18, 2019 and is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/957,482 filed on Apr. 19, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/886,576 filed on Feb. 1, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/886,171 filed on Feb. 1, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/413,199 filed on Jan. 23, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/286,272 filed on Jan. 22, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/310,510 filed on Mar. 18, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/381,903 filed on Aug. 31, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/412,504 filed on Oct. 25, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/414,545 filed on Oct. 28, 2016. The present application is also a continuation-in-part of, and claims priority to, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/957,482 filed on Apr. 19, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/886,576 filed on Feb. 1, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/886,171 filed on Feb. 1, 2018, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/413,199 filed on Jan. 23, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/286,272 filed on Jan. 22, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/310,510 filed on Mar. 18, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/381,903 filed on Aug. 31, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/412,504 filed on Oct. 25, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/414,545 filed on Oct. 28, 2016. The present application is also a continuation-in-part of, and claims priority to, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/413,199 filed on Jan. 23, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/286,272 filed on Jan. 22, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/310,510 filed on Mar. 18, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/381,903 filed on Aug. 31, 2016, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/412,504 filed on Oct. 25, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/414,545 filed on Oct. 28, 2016. The entire disclosures of the aforementioned applications are all expressly incorporated by reference herein. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     Field of the Invention 
     The present disclosure relates to systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization and control of pool/spa equipment. 
     Related Art 
     Swimming pool equipment is conventionally controlled by an electronic pool controller at an equipment pad. Power is supplied from the controller and electrical subpanel to the pool equipment through an electrical conduit (e.g., hardwire). Alternatively, swimming pool equipment can be controlled by electrical circuit breakers in a subpanel at an equipment pad. Power is supplied from the subpanel to the pool equipment through an electrical conduit (e.g., hardwire). Without an electronic pool controller, any time-based control is typically an electro-mechanical clock wired in series between the subpanel and the pool equipment, thereby breaking one or both legs of the power supply to the pool equipment. To monitor or maintain conditions of pool equipment, the pool, pool water, or the pool environment, sensors or other data collection means typically reside at the equipment pad or the pool. 
     Remote control of the pool and related equipment typically requires hard-wired communication between the pool controller (at the pad) and pool equipment, as well as wired or wireless communication between the pool controller and user interface. More recent remote control systems feature communication between the controller at the pad and a cloud server (e.g., via a home router), as well as communication between the user interface and the cloud server by cell or WiFi router. 
     Adding control features to an existing pool and equipment pad is typically costly because of the required electrical competence necessary to install new conduits to provide power from the subpanel to the controller, and from the controller to the pool equipment. Further, pool monitoring and maintenance can be confusing and time consuming for pool owners, which often leads to the employment of pool servicers. The lack of connectivity and subsequent lack of understanding of the status and condition of the pool and pool equipment requires costly and sometimes unnecessary visits by pool professionals. 
     In the pool and spa field, heating systems are commonly used to control water temperature. Such systems generally have one or more inlet pipes for receiving water to be heated, and one or more outlet pipes for delivering heated water from the heating system back to the pool/spa. While heating systems are commonly installed and used in pool and spa environments, there are a variety of problems that can arise in connection with the installation and operation of such devices. 
     For example, in some instances, the piping to and from the heating system can be incorrectly installed (e.g., in a reverse fashion). This causes the water flowing from the pump to incorrectly enter the heating system&#39;s “outlet.” As a result, a variety of problems can occur, such as the inlet water temperature sensor reading the temperature of the water after being heated, and incorrectly concluding that the water has reached the desired temperature. This leads to the heating system repeatedly experiencing a short cycle. Backward water flow also renders other safety sensors and pressure-activated bypass loops ineffective. Further, such an improper installation scenario can be difficult to diagnose in the field. 
     It is also important to ensure that proper flow rates are maintained by pool and spa heating systems during operation. Heating systems commonly use pressure switches to measure water pressure and detect if the filter pump is running. This is a way of protecting the heating system from damage due to heating when the water flow is too low. However, pressure switches do not measure water flow rate directly, and can incorrectly indicate water flow. This can lead to damaged or destroyed heating systems. 
     Still further, pool and spa heating systems that utilize heat pumps can also be susceptible to a variety of malfunctions. As the outdoor air flows across the heat exchanger, heat is transferred from the air into the refrigerant flowing inside the heat exchanger. This results in the air being cooled as it passes through the heat exchanger. As the air is cooled below its dew point, water separates from the air, and moisture accumulates on the heat exchanger. This water typically drains off of the heat exchanger without harm to the heat exchanger. However, if the heat exchanger surface temperature is below the freezing point of water, the moisture can freeze. This is a common issue with heat pumps of all types, not just pool heating systems. 
     Another potential malfunction of heat exchangers relates to frost conditions. Typically, heat pumps are equipped with a control system that detects the frosting conditions in the heat exchanger and automatically executes a defrost cycle. Defrost cycles typically involve either deactivating the heat pump and allowing the heat exchanger to thaw out due to ambient air temperatures, or engaging a refrigerant reversing valve to heat the heat exchanger surface to thaw out the heat exchanger. A temperature sensor is usually attached to a refrigerant tube near the heat exchanger. The temperature sensor is used to measure the refrigerant temperature and identify if a defrost cycle is necessary. The duration of the defrost cycle might be a fixed time period, can continue until the measured refrigerant temperature is above a preset threshold, or a combination of both. 
     The aforementioned approach presents a problem because refrigerant temperatures can drop and cause frosting due to malfunctions of the pool heater. Some of these malfunctions include a low refrigerant pressure, a low air flow across the heat exchanger, and a reduced heat transfer caused by buildup of dirt or other debris on the heat exchanger. These malfunctions can cause the low temperature condition, and be incorrectly treated as a “normal” amount of frost that can be remedied by executing a defrost cycle. In addition, refrigerant reversing valves in pool heating systems can be used to allow the user to either heat or cool the swimming pool, and they can be actuated in response to an automatically-executed defrosting routine. These reversing valves are actuated by a solenoid, and can sometimes be stuck in one position or the other. 
     Accordingly, what is needed is a system and method to provide pool owners and pool servicers with enhanced control of, and connectivity between, pool equipment devices, which detects and diagnoses improper installation and malfunction conditions in the equipment devices, and which reduces hardware and/or installation costs. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     The present disclosure relates to systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment. “Internet-of-Things” functionality is provided for pool and spa equipment in a flexible and cost-effective manner, in various embodiments. For example, in one embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control of pool and spa equipment is provided by a network communication and local control subsystem installed in pool/spa equipment. In another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control of pool and spa equipment is provided by a pool/spa system controller interconnected with pool/spa equipment operating in conjunction with local and/or remote pool/spa control logic. In another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of a pool “hub” interconnected with pool/spa equipment operating in conjunction with remote pool/spa control logic. In yet another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of a pool “translator” interconnected with pool/spa equipment operating in conjunction with local and/or remote pool/spa control logic. In still another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of a plurality of pool connectivity modules that communicate with pool/spa equipment, operating in conjunction with remote pool/spa control logic. In a further embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of wireless communications provided directly in the pool/spa equipment and operating in conjunction with remote pool/spa control logic. In yet another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of a reduced-size “hub” interconnected with pool/spa equipment operating in conjunction with remote pool/spa control logic. In still another embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of pool and spa equipment is provided by way of pool/spa chlorination system and controller that is interconnected with pool/spa equipment operating in conjunction with remote pool/spa control logic. Also disclosed are various control processes (“pool logic”) which can be embodied as software code installed in any of the various embodiments of the present disclosure. 
     Communication between devices, the controller, the router, the cloud, and/or the user interfaces can use a number of technologies, where each technology could provide an advantage in cost or reliability for each communication segment. Data for managing the pool and pool equipment (e.g., relating to wind, time, temperature, humidity to manage heating, water features, skimmer operation, approaching storms, sunrise, sunset, etc.) could be gathered from the cloud, in addition to or instead of data gathered through sensors and datacom cables at the pool or pad. Sensors dedicated to specific pool equipment (e.g., pressure sensors, flow sensors or temp sensors in the heater used to manage pump speed, control valve positions, etc.) could share data with the controller to manage other pool equipment (e.g., to optimize performance), rather than requiring dedicated sensors for each device. Smart switches could be installed between an existing conduit and the subpanel or device by a user (e.g., pool owner or pool professional), because installation of a new hard conduit is unnecessary (reducing the need for an electrician), or smart switches could be integrated into pool or spa equipment. For example, a heater with an integrated smart switch could act as a hub for connectivity to the home router. 
     In still further embodiments, the system of the present disclosure provides a modular relay, a wiring hub, and/or a control module that can be conveniently installed near pool/spa equipment, and which provides Internet-enabled remote control and connectivity of pool/spa components without requiring installation of complete (e.g., pad-mounted) pool/spa system controller. Conveniently, the modular relay, wiring hub, and/or control module allow owners of existing pool/spa equipment who do not currently own a pool/spa control system to enjoy the benefits of such a control system without requiring the installation, equipment, and expense associated with conventional pool/spa control systems. 
     In still further embodiments, the system of the present disclosure provides advanced heating and cooling functionality and enhanced diagnostics for pool/spa equipment via a plurality of sensors that can be conveniently installed near or within pool/spa equipment, and which provides Internet-enabled remote control and connectivity of pool/spa components. 
     In other embodiments of the present disclosure, systems and methods are provided for detecting and diagnosing improper installation and malfunction conditions in pool and spa heating systems. In one embodiment, the system includes a first temperature sensor which measures a first temperature of water entering the heating system and a second temperature sensor which measures a second temperature of water exiting the heating system. The system further includes a control subsystem in communication with the first and second sensors, capable of determining whether the first temperature is greater than the second temperature. When the first temperature is greater than the second temperature, the control subsystem generates a diagnostic report that indicates that the heating system has been improperly installed. 
     In another embodiment, the systems and methods of the present disclosure detect low water flow rates through a heating system based on measurements of inlet and outlet water temperatures. The system includes a first temperature sensor which measures a first temperature of water entering the heating system and a second temperature sensor measuring a second temperature of water exiting the heating system. The system also includes a control subsystem in communication with the first and seconds temperature sensors, capable of determining a temperature rise by measuring a difference between the first temperature and the second temperature. The control subsystem further determines a maximum allowed temperature rise value for the heating system and whether the temperature rise is greater than the maximum allowed temperature rise. When the temperature rise is greater than the maximum allowed temperature rise, the system generates a diagnostic report indicating that the heating system has a low water flow rate. 
     In still another embodiment, the systems and methods of the present disclosure can detect and diagnose a stuck reversing valve in a refrigeration system of pool and spa heating systems. The system includes a first temperature sensor measuring an ambient air temperature and a second temperature sensor measuring a refrigerant temperature. The system further includes a control subsystem in communication with the heating system. The control subsystem is capable of determining when the refrigerant temperature is less than a refrigerant threshold and whether the ambient temperature is less than or greater than an ambient threshold. When the ambient temperature is greater than the ambient threshold, the control subsystem transmits a diagnostic report and deactivates the heating system. When the ambient temperature is less than the ambient threshold, the control subsystem executes a defrost cycle. 
     In yet another embodiment, the systems and methods of the present disclosure can detect and correct a stuck reversing valve in a refrigeration system of a heating system. The system includes a first temperature sensor measuring a first temperature of water entering a heater and a second temperature sensor measuring a second temperature of water exiting the heater. The system further includes a control subsystem in communication with the heating system. The control subsystem is capable of determining whether the heating system is in a heating mode or a cooling mode and determining when a reversing value is stuck. The reversing valve is stuck in the heating mode when the second water temperature is lower than the first water temperature and the reversing valve is stuck in the cooling mode when the second water temperature is greater than the first water temperature. The control subsystem is further capable of cycling the reversing valve to unstick and enable the reversing valve to function properly. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       The foregoing features of the disclosure will be apparent from the following Detailed Description of the Invention, taken in connection with the accompanying drawings, in which: 
         FIG.  1    is a diagram illustrating the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  2    is a block diagram illustrating components of the subsystems of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  3    is a diagram illustrating various types of control logic in accordance with the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  4    is a diagram illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIGS.  1 - 2   ; 
         FIG.  5    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  6    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  5   ; 
         FIG.  7    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  8    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  7   ; 
         FIG.  9    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  10    is a flowchart showing processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  9   ; 
         FIG.  11    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  12    is a diagram illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  11   ; 
         FIG.  13    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  14    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  13   ; 
         FIG.  15    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIGS.  16 A- 16 B  are diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  17    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  18    is a diagram illustrating the pump control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  19 A- 19 AU  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the pump control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  20    is a diagram illustrating chemistry automation control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  21 A- 21 I  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the chemistry automation control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  22    is a diagram illustrating the heater control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  23 A- 23 J  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the heater control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  24    is a diagram illustrating the lighting control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  25 A- 25 AB  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the lighting control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  26    is a diagram illustrating the pool cleaner control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  27 A- 27 O  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  28    is a diagram illustrating the valve actuator control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  29 A- 29 I  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  30    is a diagram illustrating water feature control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  31 A- 31 F  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIG.  32    is a diagram illustrating pool control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  33 A- 33 AH  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic of  FIG.  3   ; 
         FIGS.  34 A- 34 J  are diagrams illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  35    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIGS.  36 - 40    are diagrams illustrating further embodiments of the system of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  41    is a flowchart illustrating an installation method in accordance with the present disclosure; 
         FIGS.  42 A- 42 I  are diagrams illustrating the installation method of  FIG.  41   ; 
         FIG.  43    is a diagram illustrating a recommendation system for recommending upgrades in pool/spa equipment; 
         FIG.  44    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  43    for recommending upgrades in pool/spa equipment; 
         FIGS.  45 - 48    are user interface screens for generated by the recommendation system of  FIG.  43   . 
         FIG.  49    is a diagram illustrating a monitoring and control system in accordance with the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  50    is a diagram illustrating the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  51    is a block diagram illustrating control logic of the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  52    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  53    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIGS.  54 A and  54 B  are graphical illustrations of heater cycles of the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  55    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  56    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  57    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIGS.  58 - 68    are user interface screens generated by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  69    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  70    is a diagram illustrating a sensor hub of the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIGS.  71 - 72    are user interface screens generated by the system of  FIG.  49   ; 
         FIG.  73    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIGS.  74 A-D  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  73   ; 
         FIG.  75    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  76    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  75   ; 
         FIG.  77    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  78    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  77   ; 
         FIG.  79    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  80    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  79   ; 
         FIG.  81    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIGS.  82 - 83    are user interface screens generated by the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  81   ; 
         FIG.  84    is a block diagram illustrating a component schematic capable of being implemented in an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  85    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  86    is a diagram illustrating an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  87    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by the embodiment of the system of  FIG.  86    for detecting an improperly installed heating system based on measurements of inlet and outlet water temperature; 
         FIG.  88    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by the embodiment of the system of  FIG.  86    for detecting a low water flow rate through a heating system based on measurements of inlet and outlet water temperature; 
         FIG.  89    is an illustration showing an embodiment of the heating/cooling system of  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  90    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by the embodiment of the system of  FIG.  89    for identifying frost conditions in a heating system; and 
         FIG.  91    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by the embodiment of the system of  FIG.  89    for detecting and correcting a stuck reversing valve in a refrigeration system of a heating system. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 
     The present disclosure relates to systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization and control of pool/spa equipment, as discussed in detail below in connection with  FIGS.  1 - 91   . 
       FIG.  1    is a diagram illustrating the system  10  of the present disclosure. The system  10  includes, but is not limited to, a plurality of network communication and local control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  which could be installed in or connected to a plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h , so as to provide network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . The subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could communicate with each other over a network  16 , which could include, but is not limited to, the Internet. Importantly, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  provide “Internet—of-Things” functionality for the plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . It is noted that subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could further include a “big data” subsystem, subsystems for receiving input from manufacturers/factories, subsystems for receiving external data/input (e.g., data from the Internet), and subsystems for receiving input from customers. As will be discussed in greater detail below, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could include control logic for allowing each of the devices  14   a - 14   h  to interact with each other (e.g., to exchange data and commands for controlling each other), as well as to be remotely controlled by another system such as a remote server, a “cloud” based control system, a remote computer system, a smart device (e.g., smart phone, smart speaker, smart chip embedded in the body), etc., and combinations thereof as will be discussed in greater detail below. 
     As can be seen, the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h  could include various types of pool and spa equipment, such as a pump  14   a , a heating/cooling system  14   b , a sanitization system  14   c , a water feature or miscellaneous subsystem  14   d , a valve actuator  14   e , a pool/spa control system  14   f , a pool cleaner  14   g , and/or a lighting system  14   h . It is noted that, as described herein, the heating/cooling system  14   b  may also describe, or be described as, a heating system, heater, cooling system, cooler, or any combination thereof. Additionally, as can be seen in  FIG.  1   , the subsystems  12   a —  12   h  could also communicate with one or more servers  18 , and/or with one or more smart devices  20  (e.g., phone, tablet, computer systems, etc.), via the network  16 . Still further, an on-site control processor  19  could be in communication with the various systems shown in  FIG.  1   . The on-site control processor  19  could be a pool/spa control system installed at the location of a pool or spa, a reduced-functionality pool/spa control system, or another type of control system. Examples of such systems will be described in detail below. 
       FIG.  2    is a block diagram illustrating components of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  in greater detail. As can be seen, a variety of subsystem components could be provided for providing network connectivity for pool and spa equipment via a multitude of wired and wireless means. As noted above, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could be installed in pool/spa equipment (e.g., within the physical housings of the equipment  14   a - 14   h ), or connected thereto, to provide network connectivity to each device. Advantageously, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  can be provided as “after-market” components that provide network connectivity and remote monitoring and control for pool/spa equipment that does not ordinarily include such connectivity. Importantly, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  allow for a wide variety of wired and wireless connections to the pool/spa equipment. For example, a smart telephone could directly connect with pool or spa equipment via a Bluetooth, WiFi, RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.), or satellite connection, via the subsystems  12   a - 12   h . Moreover, a home computer could connect to pool/spa equipment using a home WiFi network, via the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  or by way of a wired Ethernet connection to the pool/spa equipment. Still further, a remote server or “cloud” platform could connect to the pool/spa equipment via the subsystems  12   a - 12   h , to allow for remote and/or web-based control. 
     A processor  22  provides local processing capability for each of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h . The processor  22  is in communication with a random access memory  24 , and one or more non-volatile memories  28 . The non-volatile memory  28  could store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool or spa equipment in which the subsystem is installed. A TCP/IP stack  26  is provided for allowing each of the subsystems to obtain an Internet protocol address, and to provide Internet connectivity for each of the subsystems. The processor  22  could communicate with a wired communication subsystem  36 , a wireless communication subsystem  34 , a sensor interface subsystem  38 , and an actuator interface subsystem  40  via a bus  32 . The wired communication subsystem  36  could include an Ethernet transceiver  42 , and a serial transceiver  44 . The serial transceiver could support one or more suitable serial communication protocols, such as RS-485, RS-232, USB, etc. The wireless communication subsystem  34  could include a WiFi transceiver  46 , a Bluetooth (or Bluetooth LE) transceiver  48 , a cellular data transceiver  50 , a satellite transceiver  52 , and infrared transceiver  54 , and a radiofrequency/RF mesh transceiver  56 . The cellular data transceiver  50  could support one or more cellular data communications protocols, such as 4G, LTE, 5G, etc. The radiofrequency/RF mesh transceiver  56  could support one or more RF mesh network protocols, such as ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc. The sensor interface subsystem  38  could include analog connection interfaces, digital connection interfaces, and one or more analog-to-digital converters  58 . The actuator interface subsystem  40  could include analog connection interfaces, digital connection interfaces, and one or more digital-to-analog converters  60 . The sensor interface subsystem allows the network communication and local control subsystem to obtain information from a wide variety of sensors associated with pool/spa equipment, as well as other types of sensors. The actuator interface subsystem  40  allows the network communication and local control subsystem to control one or more pieces of pool/spa equipment connected to the subsystem. The wired and wireless communication subsystems  34 ,  36  allow the network communication and local control subsystem to connect via various wired and wireless communication means to the Internet. This allows a piece of pool or spa equipment to transmit operational and status information to one or more remote devices, as well as to be remotely controlled by such devices. 
       FIG.  3    is a diagram illustrating various types of control logic in accordance with the present disclosure, for controlling various types of pool and spa equipment. The control logic, indicated generally as pool control logic  70 , could be embodied as programmed instructions (software code) stored on a non-transitory computer-readable medium, and could include water feature control logic  72 , valve actuator control logic  74 , cleaner control logic  76 , lighting control logic  78 , heater control logic  80 , chemistry automation control logic  82 , and pump control logic  84 . Such logic could be installed locally (e.g., in one or more of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h ), on a remote server or computer system (e.g., in the server  18  or the smart phone/computer system  20 ), in the “cloud,” or in any combination of such systems. The functions provided by the logic  70 - 84  is described in greater detail below. As will be discussed in greater detail below the various logic operations disclosed herein (including the operational instruction disclosed herein) could be trigged by (e.g., receive and a signal from) various sensors and/or inputs to the system, as needed. Such inputs could be periodically monitored by the pool control logic  70  of the system  10 . 
       FIG.  4    is a diagram illustrating processing steps, indicated generally at  90 , carried out by the system of  FIGS.  1 - 2   . It is noted that the term “IoT devices” (shown in the drawings) refers to pool/spa equipment having Internet-of-Things functionality provided in accordance with the present disclosure, such as the equipment  14   a - 14   h  of  FIG.  1   . Beginning in step  92 , the system monitors IoT devices for incoming operational data. In step  94 , a decision is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If a negative determination has been made, control returns to step  92 . Otherwise, step  96  occurs, wherein the system receives incoming operational data. In step  98 , the system processes instructions, operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. Then, in step  100 , the system optimizes operational set points. In step  102 , the system transmits setpoints to one or more devices (one or more of the pool/spa equipment  14   a - 14   h ) for use thereby. 
     In step  104 , the system also monitors for incoming instructions. A determination is made in step  105  as to whether an incoming instruction has been received. If a negative determination has been made, control returns to step  104 . Otherwise, in step  106 , the system receives one or more incoming instructions. Then, control proceeds to step  98 , discussed above. Additionally, in step  107 , the system also monitors for updated external data (e.g., web data). In step  108 , a decision has been made as to whether updated external data is available. If a negative determination has been made, control returns to step  107 . Otherwise, step  109  occurs, wherein the system receives the updated external data. Then, control proceeds to step  98 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  5    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  110 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control of pool and spa components is provided by way of a central pool/spa system controller  114   f . The pool/spa system controller  114   f  could be the OMNILOGIC pool/spa system controller manufactured and sold by Hayward Industries Inc. The pool/spa system controller  114   f  could communicate with one or more valve actuators  114   e , a single speed pump  113 , a variable speed pump  114   a , pool/spa lighting systems  114   h , a pool/spa heating or cooling system  114   b , and/or a pool/spa chlorination system  114   c , such as a salt chlorinator. Additionally, the pool/spa control system  114   f  could receive input from one or more external sensors  126  and could provide “personality” by way of remotely provisioned logic for the devices. The pool/spa control system  114   f  communicates with a remote server, such as the server  118 , via a WiFi router  122  and the Internet. The server  118  could communicate with one or more remote control systems  120 , such as a smart device (e.g., smart phone, smart speaker, smart TV, embedded device), a computer system, a tablet computer, etc. The control system  114   f  could also receive external web data  131  via the Internet and WiFi router  122  (e.g., time &amp; date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecasts, wind, UV, sunlight) for use by pool control logic  170 , described hereinbelow. Additionally, the WiFi router  122  could communicate with a home management system  125  in a peer-to-peer arrangement, if desired. The server  118  could also access big data  127  and perform analytics  129  in connection with various types of information relating to the pool/spa equipment, usage thereof, and status information relating thereto. Further, the server  118  communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  124  via a suitable cloud application programming interface (API). The third-party smart devices  124  could also remotely communicate with and control the pool/spa equipment shown in  FIG.  5   . Additionally, the pool/spa control system  114   f  could include pool logic  170  stored therein for allowing central control and monitoring of pool/spa equipment at the pool/spa site. The pool logic  170  could include any of the various pool control logic described herein. Additionally, such logic  170  could also be stored in the server  118 , or at another location. 
       FIG.  6    is a flowchart, indicated generally at  130 , illustrating processing steps carried out by the system of  FIG.  5   . In step  132 , the pool/spa system controller  114   f  of  FIG.  5    monitors connected devices for incoming operational data. Then, in step  134 , a decision is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  132 . Otherwise, step  136  occurs, wherein the pool/spa system controller receives incoming operational data. Then, in step  138 , the pool/spa system controller  114   f  processes instructions, operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. Then, in step  140 , the pool/spa system controller  114   f  optimizes operational set points. In step  142 , the pool/spa system controller transmits set points to the connected devices, such as the pool/spa equipment  113 ,  114   a ,  114   h ,  114   b , and  114   c  shown in  FIG.  5   . In step  144 , the pool/spa system controller  114   f  could also transmit such setpoint information to other devices, such as the smart devices  124  illustrated in  FIG.  5   . 
     In step  150 , the pool/spa system controller monitors for incoming instructions. In step  152 , a determination is made as to whether an incoming instruction has been received. If not, control returns to step  150 . Otherwise, step  150  occurs, wherein the pool/spa system controller  114   f  receives incoming instructions. Then, processing proceeds to step  138 , discussed above. In step  156 , the pool/spa system controller  114   f  monitors for updated external data (e.g., web-supplied data, such as weather information and other information from remote data sources). In step  158 , the system determines whether updated external data is available. If not, control returns to step  156 . Otherwise step  160  occurs, wherein the pool/spa system controller receives the updated external data. Then, control proceeds to step  138 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  7    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, wherein remote connectivity is provided by way of a pool “hub” component  230 . The pool hub component  230  includes a subset of the functional features of the pool/spa system controller  114   f  of  FIG.  5   , such as basic on/off control relays, the ability to select a pump speed, the ability to select heater temperature, the ability to control pool light colors and shows, the ability to set equipment schedules, and the ability to interlock one pool/spa component with another pool/spa component. The pool hub communicates with and controls a number of pool/spa components, such as a single speed pump  213 , a variable speed pump  214   a , pool/spa lighting systems  214   h , a pool/spa heating system  214   b , and a pool/spa chlorination system  214   c . Additionally, the pool hub  230  can control a valve actuator  214   e  and can receive various sensor inputs  226  and  228 , such as temperature sensors, wind speed sensors, runtime sensors, current/voltage usage sensors, flow sensors, heater pressure sensors, water temperature sensors, chlorine sensors, pH/ORP sensors, etc. Such sensors could be positioned internally within the hub, external thereto, or a combination thereof. Additionally, the pool hub  230  could be powered by electrical current supplied by a breaker panel  217  or by photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems. Breaker panel  217  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. The pool hub  230  could communicate with a remote server  218  via a WiFi router  222  and a network connection such as the Internet. The server to  218  could include pool logic  270  which can be used to remotely monitor and control operation of the devices to  213 ,  214   a ,  214   h ,  214   b , and  214   c . The pool logic  270  could include any of the pool logic discussed herein. Additionally, the server  218  could communicate with one or more remote control devices  220 , such as a smart cellular telephone, a remote computer, a tablet computer, etc. The server  218  could also receive external web data  231  via the Internet (e.g., time &amp; date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecasts, wind, UV, sunlight) for use by pool logic  270 . Further, the server  218  could communicate with one or more third-party devices  224  via an appropriate cloud API. Further, the server  218  could process big data  232  and perform analytics  234  on various pool/spa data. Still further, the server  218  could communicate with a home management system  225 , if desired. 
       FIG.  8    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps, indicated generally at  240 , carried out by the system of  FIG.  7   . In step  242 , the pool hub  230  monitors connected devices for incoming operational data. In step  244 , a determination is made as to whether an incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  242 . Otherwise, step  246  occurs, wherein the pool hub  230  receives incoming operational data. Then, in step  248 , the pool  230  transmits incoming instructions and operational data to the server  218 . Then, in step  250 , the server  218  receives the incoming instructions and operational data from the pool hub  230 . In step  252 , the server  218  processes the incoming instructions, operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. In step  254 , the server  218  optimizes operational set points. Then, in step  256 , the server  218  transmits operational setpoints to the pool hub  230 . In step  258 , the pool hub  230  receives the operational set points. Then, in step  260 , the pool hub  230  transmits the operational setpoints to the connected devices. In step  262 , the pool hub  230  optionally transmits the operational setpoints to one or more smart devices, such as the third-party smart devices  224  of  FIG.  7   . 
     In step  263 , the pool hub  230  monitors smart devices for incoming operational data. In step  265 , a decision is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  263 . Otherwise, step  246  occurs, where in the incoming operational data is received at the pool hub  230 . Then, control passes to step  248 , discussed above. 
     In step  264 , the pool hub  230  monitors for incoming instructions. Then, in step  266 , a determination is made as to whether an incoming instruction has been received. If a negative determination has been made, control returns to step  264 . Otherwise, step  268  occurs, wherein the pool hub  230  receives the incoming instructions. Then, control passes to step  248 , discussed above. 
     In step  272 , the server  218  monitors for updated external data, such as web-supplied data including weather data and other data. In step  274 , a determination is made as to whether updated external data is available. If not, control returns to step  272 . Otherwise, step  276  occurs, wherein the updated external data is received at the server  218 . Then, control passes to step  252 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  9    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  310 . In this embodiment, a pool command “translator” module  330  is provided, which includes a complete set of pool logic  370 . The pool logic  370  could include any of the pool logic discussed herein. The translator  330  could communicate with one or more external relays  329 . Additionally, the translator  330  could communicate with a plurality of pool/spa components, including valve actuators  314   e , a single speed pump  313 , a variable speed pump  314   a , pool/spa lighting systems  314   h , a pool/spa heating system  314   b , and a pool/spa chlorination system  314   c . The translator  330  could receive electrical power from a breaker panel  317  or from photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems. Breaker panel  317  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. Additionally, the translator  330  could receive information from various sensors such as external sensors  326  and internal sensors  328 . Such sensors could include, but are not limited to, temperature sensors, wind speed sensors, runtime sensors, current/voltage usage sensors, flow sensors, heat pressure sensors, water temperature sensors, chlorine sensors, PH/ORP sensors, etc. The translator  330  could also receive external web data  331  via the Internet and WiFi router  322  (e.g., time &amp; date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecasts, wind, UV, sunlight) for use by pool logic  370 . 
     The translator  330  could communicate with the remote server  318  via a WiFi router  322  and a network connection such as the Internet. The server  318  could communicate with the remote control system  320 , such as a smart cellular telephone, a remote computer, a tablet computer, etc. Additionally, the server  318  could process big data  332  and perform analytics  334  on pool/spa data, using a suitable API. Further, the server  318  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  324 , using a suitable cloud API. Still further, the server  318  could communicate with a home management system  325 , if desired. 
       FIG.  10    is a flowchart showing processing steps, indicated generally at  340 , carried out by the system of  FIG.  9   . In step  342 , the translator  330  monitors connected devices for incoming operational data. In step  334 , a decision is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  342 . Otherwise, step  346  occurs, wherein the translator  330  receives the incoming operational data. Then, step  360  occurs, wherein the translator processes instructions, operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. In step  362 , the translator optimizes operational set points. Then, in step  364 , the translator transmits the setpoints to the connect devices (e.g., to the components  313 ,  314   a ,  314   e ,  314   h ,  314   b , and  314   c ). Optionally, in step  366 , the translator could transmit the setpoints to one or more smart devices, such as the third-party smart devices  324 . 
     In step  348 , the translator  330  monitors smart devices for incoming operational data. In step  350 , a decision is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  348 . Otherwise, step  352  occurs, wherein the translator  330  receives incoming operational data. Then, control passes to step  360 , discussed above. 
     In step  354 , the translator  330  monitors for incoming instructions. In step  356 , a decision is made as to whether incoming instructions have been received. If not, control returns to step  354 . Otherwise, step  358  occurs, wherein the translator  330  receives incoming instructions. Then, control passes to step  360 , discussed above. 
     In step  368 , the translator  330  monitors for updated external data, such as web data. Such data could include, but is not limited to, remote weather data, etc. In step  372 , a decision is made as to whether updated external data is available. If not, control returns to step  368 . Otherwise, step  374  occurs, wherein the translator  330  receives the updated external data. Then, control passes to step  360 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  11    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system, indicated generally at  410 . In this embodiment, remote connectivity is provided by way of a plurality of connectivity modules  430   a - 430   e . Each of these modules could include a combination of high and/or low voltage relays for connection to various pool and spa equipment, such as valve actuators  414   e , a single speed pump  413 , a variable speed pump  414   a , pool/spa lighting systems  414   h , pool/spa heating system  414   b , and/or pool/spa chlorination system  414 C. Connectivity could be provided to the pool/spa equipment additionally using WiFi, Bluetooth, or RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.) connectivity. The connectivity modules could provide WiFi for every unit, could adapt for usage with legacy devices, could provide “personality” by way of remotely provisioned logic for the devices, could remember limp mode schedules during a WiFi outage, and could also include start/stop buttons and an LS bus gate way, if desired. The modules could be powered by a breaker panel  427  or by photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems. Breaker panel  427  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. Additionally, each of the modules could communicate with a remote server  418  by a WiFi router  422  and a network connection, such as the Internet. The pool/spa control logic  470  could be provided in the server  418  for remotely controlling and monitoring the pool/spa equipment. The pool logic  470  could include any of the pool logic discussed herein. The server  418  could also receive external web data  431  via the Internet (e.g., time &amp; date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecasts, wind, UV, sunlight) for use by pool logic  470 . Additionally, the server  418  could communicate with one or more remote control devices  420 , such as a smart phone, a remote computer, a tablet computer, etc. The server  418  could access big data  432  and perform analytics  434  on pool/spa data, if desired. Additionally, the server  418  could also communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  424 , via a suitable cloud API. Still further, the server  418  could communicate with a home management system  425 , if desired. 
       FIG.  12    is a diagram illustrating processing steps, indicated generally at  440 , carried out by the system of  FIG.  11   . In step  442 , the pool connectivity modules  430   a - 430   e  monitor smart devices for incoming operational data. In step  444 , a determination is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  442 . Otherwise, step  446  occurs, wherein the pool connectivity modules each receive the incoming operational data. Then, and step  448 , the pool conductivity modules  430   a - 430   e  transmit operational data to the server  418 . In step  450 , the operational data is received at the server  418 . In step  452 , the server  418  processes the incoming instructions, operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. Then, in step  454 , the server  418  optimizes operational support. In step  456 , the server  418  transmits the operational set points to the connected devices (e.g., to the devices  413 ,  414   a ,  414   e ,  414   h ,  414   b , and  414   c ). In step  458 , the server transmits operational set points for the smart devices to the pool connectivity modules  430   a - 430   e . In step  460 , the pool conductivity modules  430   a - 430   e  receive the operational setpoints for the smart devices. Then, in step  462 , the modules transmit the operational set points to the smart devices. 
     In step  464 , the server for 18 monitors connected devices for incoming operational data. In step  466 , a determination is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  464 . Otherwise, step  450  occurs, wherein the server  418  receives the operational data. Control then passes to step  452 , discussed above. 
     In step  468 , the server  418  monitors for incoming instructions. In step  470 , a determination is made as to whether the incoming instructions have been received. If not, control returns to step  468 . Otherwise, step  472  occurs, wherein the server  418  receives the incoming instructions. Then, control passes to step  452 , discussed above. 
     In step  474 , the server  418  monitors for updated external data, such as web data including, but not limited to, remote weather information, etc. Then, in step  476 , a determination is made as to whether updated external data is available. If not, control passes to step  474 . Otherwise, step  478  occurs, wherein the updated external data is received at the server  418 . Then, control passes to step  452 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  13    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  510 . In this embodiment, wireless connectivity is provided directly within pool/spa equipment, allowing such equipment to communicate directly to the Internet. As shown, pool spa equipment, such as a single speed pump  513 , a variable speed pump  5148 , pool/spa lighting system  514   h , heater  514   b , and/or chlorinator  514   c , in addition to valve actuators  514   e , each have built-in wireless communications subsystems, such as WiFi, Bluetooth, radiofrequency/RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.), and or cellular wireless communication subsystems. Each of these devices can communicate directly with the Internet via a WiFi router  522 . Additionally, external sensors  526  could also communicate with the WiFi router  522 , and could also include built-in wireless communications such as WiFi, Bluetooth, radiofrequency/RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.), and cellular communications. The sensors  526  could include, but are not limited to, heater pressure sensors, water temperature sensors, chlorine sensors, pH/aware pressure sensors, etc. It is noted that each of the pool/spa components could include the ability to remember schedules during a WiFi outage (limp mode) as provisioned by remote pool logic. Additionally, each of these devices could include start/stop buttons, if desired, for stand-alone operation. A breaker panel  527  could provide electrical power to each of the pool/spa components. Breaker panel  527  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the pool/spa components. 
     Each of the pool/spa components discussed above, including the sensors  526 , could communicate with a remote server  518 . The server  518  could include pool logic  570  for remotely controlling and/or monitoring the pool/spa equipment. The pool logic  570  could be any of the pool logic discussed herein. The server  518  could receive external web data  531  via the Internet (e.g., time &amp; date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecasts, wind, UV, sunlight) for use by pool logic  570 . The server  518  could also communicate with one or more remote control devices  520 , such as smart telephones, remote computer systems, tablet computers, etc. The server  518  could also access big data  532  and perform analytics  534  on pool/spa data, if desired. Additionally, the server  518  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  524 , via a suitable cloud API. Still further, the server  518  could communicate with a home management system  525 , if desired. 
       FIG.  14    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps, indicated generally at  540 , carried out by the system of  FIG.  13   . In step  542 , the server  518  monitors connected devices for incoming operational data. Then, in step  544 , a determination is made as to whether incoming operational data has been received. If not, control returns to step  542 . Otherwise, step  546  occurs, wherein the server  518  receives incoming operational data. Then, in step  548 , the server  518  processes the instructions, the operational data, and external data, discussed hereinbelow. In step  550 , the server  518  optimizes operational set points. Then, in step  552 , the server transmits the setpoints to the connected pool/spa devices, such as those devices shown in  FIG.  13   . 
     In step  554 , the server  518  monitors for incoming instructions. Then, in step  556 , a determination is made as to whether incoming instructions have been received. If not, control returns to step  554 . Otherwise, step  558  occurs, wherein the server  518  receives incoming instructions. Then, step  548 , discussed above, is invoked. 
     In step  560 , the server  518  monitors for updated external data, such as web data including, but not limited to remote weather data, etc. In step  562 , a decision is made as to whether updated external data is available. If not, control returns to step  560 . Otherwise, step  564  occurs, wherein the server  518  receives the updated external data. Then, control passes to step  548 , discussed above. 
       FIG.  15    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  610 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control is provided by way of a reduced-size hub  646  which can be easily wall-mounted. The hub  646  provides wired and wireless connections for various pool and spa equipment, such as a variable speed pump  614   a , a single-speed pump  613 , a smart heater  614   b , a legacy heater  615 , a chlorination system  617 , any other type of chlorinator  614   c , a booster pump  619 , and a third-party pump  621 . Various relays  648 ,  650 ,  652 , and  654  could also be provided for controlling the pumps, if desired. Also, the hub  646  could communicate with and control a smart valve actuator  614   e , and/or lighting system  614   h . Optional control relays  656  and power supplies  658  could also be in communication with the hub  646 . 
     As can be seen, the hub  646  could provide a WiFi hotspot for allowing a homeowner&#39;s cellular telephone, tablet computer, or personal computer  644  to communicate with the hub  646 , and to control the pool/spa equipment shown in  FIG.  15   . A breaker panel  627  provides electrical power to the various devices shown in  FIG.  15   . Breaker panel  627  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the various devices shown in  FIG.  15   . A wall-mounted light controller  640  could communicate by Bluetooth and/or RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.) to the hub  646  for remotely controlling the lights  614   h . Additionally, a third-party Bluetooth and/or RF mesh-enabled switch  642  could also communicate with the hub  646 . The hub  646  could also communicate with the homeowner&#39;s WiFi router  622  for providing an Internet connection to the pool/spa components. A remote pool/spa server  618  could communicate with the router  622  via the Internet, to provide remote monitoring and control of the pool/spa equipment, if desired. Additionally, the server  618  could communicate with one or more remote computer systems  620  such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a remote computer system, etc., if desired. The pool/spa control logic discussed herein could be installed in the server  618 , in the remote computer  620 , and/or in the smart phone  644  (e.g., by way of a pool control “app”), if desired. Further, the server  618  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  624  by a suitable cloud API, and the server  618  could access big data  632  and perform analytics  634  on pool/spa data, if desired. The server  618  could also communicate with a home management system  638 , if desired. 
       FIG.  16 A  is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  710 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control is provided by way of a WiFi-enabled pool/spa chlorination system and controller  717 . The controller  717  provides connections for various pool and spa equipment, such as a variable speed pump  714   a , a single-speed pump  713 , a smart heater  714   b , a legacy heater  715 , a chlorination system  717   c , a booster pump  719 , and a third-party pump  721 . Various relays  749 ,  750 , and  754  could also be provided for controlling the pumps, if desired. Also, the controller  717  could communicate with and control a smart valve actuator  714   e , and/or lighting system  714   h . Optional control relays  756  and power supplies  758  could also be in communication with the controller  717 . 
     A breaker panel  727  provides electrical power to the various devices shown in  FIG.  16 A . Breaker panel  727  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the various devices shown in  FIG.  16 A . The controller  717  could also communicate with the homeowner&#39;s WiFi router  722  for providing an Internet connection to the pool/spa components. A remote pool/spa server  718  could communicate with the router  722  via the Internet, to provide remote monitoring and control of the pool/spa equipment, if desired. Additionally, the server  718  could communicate with one or more remote computer systems  720  such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a remote computer system, etc., if desired. The pool/spa control logic discussed herein could be installed in the server  718 , in the remote computer  720 , or elsewhere, if desired. Further, the server  718  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  724  by a suitable cloud API, and the server  718  could access big data  732  and perform analytics  734  on pool/spa data, if desired. Still further, the server  718  could communicate with a home management system  738  if desired. 
       FIG.  16 B  is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  4510 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control is provided by way of a WiFi-enabled pool/spa variable speed pumping system and controller (also referred to herein in connection with  FIG.  16 B  as “variable speed pumping system,” “pumping system,” or “controller”), indicated generally at  4514   a . As referred to herein, a variable speed pumping system can include a variable speed pump, a possessor/controller, memory, communications interface(s), and an input device, so that the variable speed pumping system can communicate with and/or control additional installed pool/spa equipment. 
     Accordingly, pump control logic  84 , as described hereinbelow, could be installed/reside in variable speed pumping system  4514   a . For example, any of the various processes in the embodiments described herein in connection with  FIGS.  19 A- 19 AU  could be incorporated into pump control logic  84  and installed in variable speed pumping system  4514   a , either alone or in any combination. Further, any additional processes disclosed herein in connection with pool control logic  70  (e.g., water feature control logic  72 , valve actuator control logic  74 , cleaner control logic  76 , lighting control logic  78 , heater control logic  80 , chemistry automation control logic  82 ) could also be incorporated into pump control logic  84  and installed in variable speed pumping system  4514   a , either alone or in any combination. 
     The controller  4514   a  provides connections for various pool and spa equipment, such as a pool/spa chlorination system  4517 , a single-speed pump  4513 , a smart heater  4514   b , a legacy heater  4515 , a chlorination system  4514   c , a booster pump  4519 , and a third-party pump  4521 . Various relays  4549 ,  4550 , and  4554  could also be provided for controlling the pumps, if desired. Variable speed pumping system and controller  4514   a  could include on-board or modularly upgradeable pool control components (e.g., communication modules, relays, temperature sensors, pressure sensors, flow sensors, etc.). For example, the variable speed pumping system  4514   a  could control existing heaters (or heat pumps) using on-board or modularly upgradeable relays and temperature sensors. Pump control logic  84 , discussed in greater detail hereinbelow, could also utilize multiple sensors for parallel plumbing circuits (e.g., branch plumbing). Also, the controller  4514   a  could communicate with and control a smart valve actuator  4514   e , and/or lighting system  4514   h . Optional control relays  4556  and power supplies  4558  could also be in communication with the controller  4514   a . Accordingly, variable speed pumping system and controller  4514   a  could use the modularly upgradeable smart relays to control a variety of existing installed pool/spa equipment including single speed pumps, pressure cleaner booster pumps, LED and incandescent pool lights, and landscape lights. The modularly upgradeable control components can be used by pump control logic  84  to provide pump or system performance reporting and diagnostic functions (present and historical) including, but not limited to, phase current, torque, speed, horsepower, run time, and ramp rate. Pump control logic  84  could provide the system performance and diagnostic information to the cloud, or to a smart to a smart device via a Bluetooth or any of the other communication protocols disclosed herein. 
     A breaker panel  4527  provides electrical power to the various devices shown in  FIG.  16 B . Breaker panel  4527  could include one or more smart circuit breakers (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein, and/or conventional circuit breakers. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the various devices shown in  FIG.  16 B . The controller  4514   a  could also communicate with the homeowner&#39;s WiFi router  4522  for providing an Internet connection to the pool/spa components. A remote pool/spa server  4518  could communicate with the router  4522  via the Internet, to provide remote monitoring and control of the pool/spa equipment, if desired. Additionally, the server  4518  could communicate with one or more remote computer systems  4520  such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a remote computer system, etc., if desired. The pool/spa control logic discussed herein could be installed in the variable speed pumping system and controller  4514   a , in the server  4518 , in the remote computer  4520 , or elsewhere, if desired. Further, the server  4518  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  4524  by a suitable cloud API, and the server  4518  could access big data  4532  and perform analytics  4534  on pool/spa data, if desired. Still further, the server  4518  could communicate with a home management system  4538  if desired. It is also further complicated that any of the functions described herein could also be performed by the variable speed pumping system and controller  4514   a.    
     As illustrated in  FIG.  16 B , the pumping system and controller  4514   a  can be provided with a human machine interface or user interface device, indicated generally at  4560 . The user interface could include physical keys, a digital display, and/or a touchscreen  4562 , as shown in  FIG.  16 B , any other suitable input technologies, or any combination thereof. It is also contemplated that any of the pool/spa equipment described herein could be provided with a similar user interface device. Providing a user interface device  4562  on pumping system and controller  4514   a  enables the delivery of existing or enhanced features of local pool/spa equipment control and control of remote devices (e.g., beyond the pool area) to the pool owner via the pool pump, while also reducing costs to the pool owner (e.g., reducing hardware costs, installation expenses, etc.). Because every pool/spa must include at least one pump, providing control of and communication with additional equipment, connectivity, and monitoring (e.g., status and condition of pool and equipment) functionality of the pool environment via the pool pump can further reduce pool owner cost and significantly improve usability. By leveraging information obtained at the equipment pad, from remote/external devices, and/or via a connection to the internet, operation of the pumping system  4514   a  and other devices can be further optimized. 
       FIG.  17    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  810 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control is provided by way of a reduced-size hub  860  which can be easily wall-mounted. The hub  860  provides wired and wireless connections for various pool and spa equipment, such as a variable speed pump  814   a , a single-speed pump  813 , a smart heater  814   b , a legacy heater  815 , a chlorination system  817   c , and other equipment (e.g., lighting equipment). 
     As can be seen, the hub  860  could provide a WiFi hotspot for allowing a homeowner&#39;s cellular telephone, tablet computer, or personal computer  844  to communicate with the hub  846 , and to control the pool/spa equipment shown in  FIG.  17   . A breaker panel  827  provides electrical power to the various devices shown in  FIG.  17   . Breaker panel  827  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the various devices shown in  FIG.  17   . A wall-mounted light controller  840  could communicate by Bluetooth and/or RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.) to the hub  860  for remotely controlling lights. Additionally, a third-party Bluetooth and/or RF mesh-enabled switch  842  could also communicate with the hub  860 . The hub  860  could also communicate with the homeowner&#39;s WiFi router  822  for providing an Internet connection to the pool/spa components. A remote pool/spa server  818  could communicate with the router  822  via the Internet, to provide remote monitoring and control of the pool/spa equipment, if desired. Additionally, the server  818  could communicate with one or more remote computer systems  820  such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a remote computer system, etc., if desired. In this embodiment, the server  818  is a cloud-based, virtual server, and the pool/spa control logic discussed herein is installed in the server  818 . The pool logic could be any of the pool logic discussed herein. Further, the server  818  could communicate with one or more third-party smart devices  824  by a suitable cloud API, and the server  818  could access big data  832  and perform analytics  834  on pool/spa data, if desired. The server  818  could also communicate with a home management system  838 , if desired. 
       FIG.  18    is a diagram  900  illustrating pump control logic  84 . Pump control logic  84  could incorporate and/or be in communication with a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, pump control logic  84  can communicate with, or receive, user input data  902 , pump operational data  904 , pump factory specifications  906 , pump configuration parameters  908 , web data  910 , pool configuration parameters  912 , data from related devices  914 , health monitoring data  916  and/or external sensor data  918 . 
     Pump control logic  84  can control variable speed pumps, designed for residential and commercial pool applications (as well as additional installed pool/spa equipment), providing flow and pressure for water circulation and operation of pool equipment. Variable speed pumps, as described herein, could include a pump wet end, a motor, a variable frequency/speed drive, and a user interface (see  FIG.  16 B ). The variable speed pump is used anytime a pool is in operation, which may be year-round and/or all-day based on a particular application (e.g. residential vs. commercial) or location. The pump control logic  84  can control the variable speed drive to operate in stand-alone mode, relay control mode, or via communication with Hayward automation, described hereinbelow. 
     In stand-alone mode, the pump operates independently of the pool control logic  70 . Stand-alone mode is programmable with respect to functions such as timers and preset speeds. In relay control mode, the pump operates according to inputs received from third party systems and devices using low voltage digital inputs. For example, the digital inputs could be used to select discrete timer speeds set in the pump user interface. When communicating with Hayward automation, the pump is controlled by a variety of Hayward automation systems such as, but not limited to: OmniLogic®, ProLogic®, and OnCommand®. The pump could communicate with Hayward automation systems using RS485 and associated Hayward automation communication protocols, or any other suitable communication protocol disclosed herein. 
     In addition to operating in the modes described previously, the pump can also serve as a pool control system. The user interface could utilize a color LCD touch screen with resistive and/or capacitive touch capability, or any other suitable input technology. The user interface could provide a user with information such as ambient air and pool water temperatures, providing true freeze protection capability, as well as thermostat control of a pool heater or heat pump. The user interface could also be used to communicate with and to control one or more smart relays and smart actuators, allowing the pump to coordinate operation of other pieces of pool equipment. For example, the user interface can be used for interlock control of other installed pool/spa equipment. The pump could also be provided with a communication module (e.g., WiFi, ethernet, Bluetooth, ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.) allowing remote application control of the pump and/or pool pad equipment, and to allow remote data collection of site specific information. 
     Pump control logic  84  can be controlled remotely with a personal computer, smart phone, tablet, or other device via wired or wireless communication, including but not limited to, Bluetooth, WiFi, powerline transmission, etc. Accordingly, the pump can have a full-featured local interface (see  FIG.  16 B ), minimal local user interface, or no local user interface at all. Nevertheless, all aspects of the pump operational data and pump control logic  84  can be available for review and adjustment if necessary. The pump control logic  84  can report multiple pieces of information to a user, the system, or a central server for data collection, storage and analysis. The information can include, but is not limited to, date of installation, warranty registration, warranty possible claims, feedback of problems daily operating conditions, usage statistics, feedback of power supply conditions or quality, detailed profiles of pool pad setups, and information related to other equipment the pump may be controlling. The pump control logic  84  can also automatically register warranties and submit warranty claims should there be an issue with any piece of equipment in the system. 
     User input data  902  could include timers, schedules (e.g., on/off, speed, duration of operation, how much flow should be provided), turnover goals, turbidity/water clarity goals, etc. Pump operational data  904  could include power consumption, current draw, input voltage, flow (rate), flow (yes/no), temperature, water pressure, air cavitation, water detection, debris sensor, etc. Pump factory specifications  906  could include power consumption current draw, input voltage, life expectancy, etc. Pump configuration parameters  908  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zip code, time and date, etc. Web data  910  could include location (based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecast data, ambient temperature, ambient light, humidity, season, elevation, dew point, etc. For example, the pump control logic  84  could shift the pump timers based on weather input. Pool configuration parameters  912  could include pool surface area, pool geometry, pool liner color, pool cover (yes/no), pool volume, etc. Data from related devices  914  could include data relating to at least the following: strainer(s), pool cover(s), filter(s), chlorinator(s), skimmer(s), pool cleaner(s), water features (e.g., laminar, bubbler, sheer fall, deck jet, fountains, scuppers, waterfall, etc.), heater(s) (gas/heat pump), heat (solar), chemical dispenser(s), disinfectant system(s) (ultraviolet ozone), secondary pump(s), tablet/liquid chlorine feeder(s), valves, controller(s), spa(s), water slide(s), etc. For example, the pump control logic  84  could receive input from an external device to identify an operating profile. In another example, the pump control logic  84  could determine the most efficient turn-over rate based on the volume of the body of water. In yet another example the pump control logic could lower the speed of the pump to prevent a water feature from flooding a closed pool cover. Health monitoring data  916  could include line-to-line balance, grounding, bonding, leak current, runtime, operating temperature, power consumption, predictive failure, operating noise, power cycles, airflow sensor, temperature of cooling, efficiency, settings, troubleshooting data, etc. External sensor data  918 , could include water level, water temperature, water flow speed, suction/vacuum pressure, strainer basket load, airflow sensor or temperature of cooling, pool cover detection, turbidity, valve position, etc. Additionally, the pump control logic can receive heater and pump data trends, learning data, time and speeds used per month, time and duration that a pool cover is open, and various characteristics of pump use. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a temperature sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the temperature (e.g., by checking a thermometer, a thermocouple, a weather forecast, the Internet, etc.) and then entering the temperature into the system via a user interface. Using this data, the pump control logic  84  could optimize the operation of the pump by, for example, running based on whether conditions (e.g., windy conditions produce more leaves and thus a need for more skimming), maximizing energy factor (or best efficiency point), communicating errors to the user/dealer/manufacturer, communicating performance to the manufacturer (e.g., usage stats) to calculate system curve to profile pools, providing feedback (e.g., basket is full, bearings going bad, seal starting to leak, etc.), and responding to needs of other equipment (e.g., pump/pump control logic could control actuators or other devices for pool pads with limited equipment (Low voltage control), lighting system, cleaner, high voltage control for booster pump, and hub through direct control or bridge to cloud for pool pad). 
     The pump could include a software application (accessible via user interface  4562  or on a remote device having a similar user interface), described in greater detail hereinbelow, that delivers enhanced features to the user. For example, the application could define a pool owner&#39;s usage and target modes for the user to select from including but not limited to efficiency mode, spa mode, or party mode. Selecting a mode will automatically adjust pump speed or flow accordingly. The application can also allow for seasonal adjustability which will adjust operation of the pump based on the time of year. The application can also monitor the pump and send a signal or message if the pump has been inoperative for a defined period of time. Sending this message can remind a user to resume operation of a pump if he/she manually stopped it. The application can also report the energy consumption of the pump instantly or in monthly or yearly reports. The application can also provide a single push for pre-loaded programs for the pump. The application can also allow for quick access dynamic language translation. The application can also monitor pump usage, and display a number of “favorite” speeds by the user. The amount of speeds shown can be dependent on the user and does not have to show the maximum number of possible preset speeds. The application can also allow for the quick and easy ability to switch to the last selected program or “last known good” program which is the last program that ran without any errors. The application can send notifications of all activities within the system via WiFi, Bluetooth or similar means. The notifications can include but is not limited to a blocked filter, increase in RPM of the pump, or reporting of loss of prime-protects system. The application can include a page for frequently asked questions for service and troubleshooting of all components in the system  10 . The application can further include links to service and troubleshooting videos. 
     The pumping system or application can also certify that installation is correct and reliable. The application can provide a “certification checklist” and wizard that guides the installer to verify the entire pool pad after configuration. Some items on the checklist can include, but is not limited to, checking whether the correct pump is on the correct relay, verify simulated schedule execution, confirm all equipment is working, confirm user preferences, etc. Once the checklist is completed, the pool is “certified” to be configured and tested and is now ready for use. 
       FIGS.  19 A- 19 G  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the pump control logic  84 .  FIG.  19 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with a pump. In step  1000 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  1002 , the pump logic  84  retrieves data pertaining to factory specified power parameters from memory, e.g., parameters relating to power consumption, current draw, and line voltage. In step  1004 , the pump logic  84  receives line power operational data. In step  1006 , the pump logic  84  determines whether the line power operational data is within factory specified operation parameters. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1012 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1008 . In step  1012 , the pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1006 , then the process proceeds to step  1008 . In step  1008 , the pump control logic  84  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1004  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1010  and transmits an error condition signal, and then returns to step  1004  to continue the process from that step. For example, in step  1002 , the line voltage can be measured, including but not limited to, L1-L2, L1-GND, L2-GND, and in step  1010 , pump control logic  84  can report associated issues to the user. In another example, pump control logic  84  can measure the line current in step  1002 , and in step  1010 , pump control logic  84  can report associated issues to the user. In yet another example, pump control logic  84  can measure the ground leakage current in step  1002 , monitor for proper grounding in steps  1006  and  1008 , and report associated issues to the user in step  1010 . The pump control logic  84  can also check and verify proper bonding connection (e.g., checking for electrical continuity between the pump and a known good bonding point using a voltage measurement circuit or other known means) in the aforementioned steps. 
       FIG.  19 B  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with a pump in connection with priming. In step  1020 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  1022 , the pump logic  84  receives operational data from a pump water detection sensor. In step  1024 , the pump logic  84  determines whether water is detected. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1029 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1025 . In step  1029 , the pump control logic  84  clears the priming period timer, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1024 , then the process proceeds to step  1025 . In step  1025 , the pump control logic  84  starts or continues the priming period timer and then proceeds to step  1026  where it determines if there is any time remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1027  where it decrements the priming timer and then continues to step  1022  to continue the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1028  and transmits an error condition signal indicating that prime has failed, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  19 C  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with a pump. In step  1030 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  1032 , the pump logic  84  receives operational data from a debris sensor in a strainer basket. In steps  1034  and  1036 , the pump logic  84  determines whether the strainer basket is full. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1038  where the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user to clean the strainer basket and then returns to step  1032 . If a negative determination is made in step  1036 , then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1039  and transmits an instruction to the pump to activate, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  19 D  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  determining alert conditions of a pump and subsequently notifying a user or pool professional (e.g., service technician, builders, installers, etc.) of the alert condition. The pump control logic  84  proceeds with four parallel routine sequences that respectively begin with steps  1040 ,  1050 ,  1060 , and  1070 . Each routine sequence is discussed sequentially, though it should be understood that the routine loops could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. The sequence beginning with step  1040  monitors the health of the pump (as well as other installed pool equipment, discussed hereinbelow) by monitoring the runtime of the pump and comparing the runtime of the pump with life expectancy data. In step  1040  the pump control logic  84  retrieves factory specified life expectancy data from memory. The factory specified life expectancy data could be provided by the manufacturer as a specified number of hour, days, years, etc. for which the entire pump unit is expected to maintain optimal performance. Alternatively, factory specified life expectancy data could be provided for individual components of the pump unit (e.g., motor bearings, other motor components, etc.) in addition to, or in place of, the entire pump unit, thereby providing users and service providers greater granularity and predictability for maintenance protocols. In step  1042 , the pump control logic  84  determines an alert threshold, e.g., less than 90% of pump life expectancy remaining or runtime value. Alternatively, the alert threshold could be provided by the user, by a pool professional (e.g., service technician, builders, installers, etc.), or by the manufacturer. In step  1044 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data on pump runtime and proceeds to step  1045  where it displays an odometer indicating pump runtime. It is noted that the odometer could also be configured to display the remaining life expectancy of the pump and/or individual components. In step  1046 , the pump control logic  84  determines if the pump runtime is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1044  and continues to receive operational data on pump runtime. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1048  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. The alert could be a visual and/or audio notification that could be displayed on a user&#39;s smart device (e.g., phone, text, or email based). For example, if a user&#39;s smartphone is in communication with pump control logic  84 , the alerts could be delivered via pop-up notification, text, etc. In addition to describing the problem, the alerts could also suggest possible remedies (e.g., “Excessive Motor Heating—Reduce Speed”). 
     The second sequence begins in step  1050  where the pump control logic  84  retrieves factory specified operating temperature data from memory. The process then proceeds to step  1051  and step  1052 . In step  1051 , the pump control logic  84  stores the temperature rise (ambient to equipment) in the histogram counters, and proceeds to step  1053 . The histogram counters can be bands that indicate temperature rise values, e.g., a first counter band can be a temperature rise of 0-10 degrees, a second counter band can be a temperature rise of 10-20 degrees, a third counter band can be a temperature rise of 20-30 degrees, and a fourth counter band can be a temperature rise of greater than 30 degrees. In step  1053 , the pump control logic  84  determines if the temperature rise is too high. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1051  and continues to store the temperature rise in the histogram counters. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1055  where an alert indicating “excessive motor heating” is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. In step  1052 , the pump control logic  84  determines an alert threshold, e.g., a temperature value that is 10% above or below operating temperature. In step  1054 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data on pump operating temperature. In step  1056 , the pump control logic  84  determines if the pump operating temperature exceeds the threshold, or is outside of a threshold range. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1054  and continues to receive operational data on pump operating temperature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1058  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The third sequence begins in step  1060  where the pump control logic  84  retrieves factory specified power consumption data from memory. In step  1062 , the pump control logic  84  determines an alert threshold, e.g., a power value that is 110% of specified power consumption. In step  1064 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data on pump power consumption. In step  1066 , the pump control logic  84  determines if the pump power consumption is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1064  and continues to receive operational data on pump power consumption. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1068  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The fourth sequence begins in step  1070  where the pump control logic  84  retrieves factory warranty data from memory, e.g., a warranty expiration date. In step  1072 , the pump control logic  84  determines an alert threshold, e.g., days left on factory warranty. In step  1074 , the pump control logic  84  receives current date information. In step  1075 , the pump control logic  84  determines if the current date is beyond the threshold date or the number of days remaining is below the threshold date. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1074  and continues to receive current date information. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1076  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. In addition to the foregoing, it is contemplated that the pump control logic  84  could also report additional information to the user, pool professional (e.g., service technician, builders, installers, etc.), or manufacturer including runtime, operating temperatures/profile, power consumption, operating noise, number of power cycles, temperature of cooling air (from a pump cooling fan), and degradation of efficiency. 
       FIG.  19 E  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with a pump. In step  1080 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  1082 , the pump logic  84  retrieves maximum power consumption setpoint data from pool devices from memory, e.g., maximum combined power consumption for all active devices. In step  1084 , the pump logic  84  receives operational data on power consumption from all active devices. In step  1086 , the pump logic  84  determines the combined power consumption for active devices. In step  1088 , the pump logic  84  determines whether the combined power consumption is below a setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1094 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1090 . In step  1094 , the pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1088 , then the process proceeds to step  1090 . In step  1090 , the pump control logic  84  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1084  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  1092  and transmits a power save notification, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  19 F  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with a pump. In step  1100 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  1102 , the pump control logic  84  receives date and time information. In step  1104 , the pump control logic  84  determines the current season, e.g., summer. In step  1106 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves operational setpoint data for the current season from memory, e.g., schedule, pump power, etc. In step  1108 , the pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to operate at seasonal operational setpoints. 
       FIG.  19 G  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with the pump. In step  1110 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves setpoint data on the desired pool turnover rate from the memory (e.g., the desired turnovers in a twenty-four hour period). While the desired pool turnover rate can be specified by the user and stored in the memory, it is noted that the turnover rate setpoint data it could also be retrieved from the web based on the size, geometry, location of the pool, or any combination thereof. In step  1112 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves pool configuration data on the volume of the pool from the memory. The pump control logic  84  then, in step  1114 , receives operational data on flow rate from external sensors. In step  1116 , the pump control logic  84 , using the turnover rate setpoint data, the pool configuration data, and the external sensor data, calculates the minimum flow rate to achieve the desired pool turnover rate. In step  1118 , the pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to operate at a minimum speed to achieve the desired turnover rate, and the process then returns to step  1114 . It is noted that by this process, the pump control logic  84  could continuously adjust the speed of the pump throughout the twenty-four hour period based on repeated minimum flow rate calculations. 
       FIG.  19 H  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84  communicating with the pump. In step  3700 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate the pump. In step  3702 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified power parameters from memory. Some examples of power parameters include, but is not limited to, power consumption, current draw, line voltage, line current, ground leakage current, proper bonding, etc. In step  3704 , the pump control logic  84  received operational data of the pump, including but not limited to, L1-L2, L1-GND, and L2-GND. In step  3706 , the pump control logic  84  compares whether the operational data is within the specified operating parameters of the pump. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3708  where the pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to activate the pump and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3710  where it decides whether retries are remaining. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds back to step  3704  where it receives operational data on the pump. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3712  where an error condition is transmitted and the process proceeds back to step  3704 . The above process can measure all parameters related to electrical power of the pump and can indicate any type of issue to the user. 
       FIG.  19 I  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3714 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor or measure the water level in a pump. In step  3716 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified parameters from memory for the water level in a pump. In step  3718 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational water level data in the pump and in the strainer housing. In step  3720 , the pump control logic  84  decides whether the water level data is within the factory specified operating parameters. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3722 . If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3728 . In step  3722 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the water level has been an issue for a set amount of time. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will proceed to step  3724  where the speed of the pump is increased periodically. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will proceed to step  3726  where it will indicate to the user that there is an air leak in the suction side plumbing. In step  3728 , the pump control logic  84  will transmit a message to the user or system that the water level data is within the factory specified parameters. 
       FIG.  19 J  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3730 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor or measure water flow in the pump. In step  3732 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on the factory specified parameters from memory for the water flow in the pump. In step  3740 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational flow data in the pump. In step  3742 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the flow data is within the range for the factory specified operational parameters. Step  3742  can further be associated with cavitation detection. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to steps  3744 , and if a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3746 . In step  3744 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether retries are remaining. If there are no retries remaining, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3748  to transmit an error condition and if there are retries remaining, the pump control logic  84  proceeds back to step  3740 . In step  3746 , the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user or the system that the flow data is within the factory specified parameters. 
       FIG.  19 K  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3750 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor or measure the water temperature. In step  3752 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on the factory specified parameters from memory for the water temperature. In step  3754 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data of water temperature and set point temperature data. In step  3756 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the water temperature is within the set point and/or factory parameters. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3758  where the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user that the water temperature is within the factory specified or set point parameters and the process would end thereafter. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3760  where the pump control logic  84  performs a function or changes the pump operation to maintain a factory or set point water temperature. In step  3762 , the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user or the system that the pump control logic  84  has performed some function or changed the pump operation to maintain a factory or set point water temperature. 
       FIG.  19 L  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3764 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor or measure the water chemistry. In step  3766 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified parameters from memory for the water chemistry. In step  3768 , the pump control logic  84  receives operation data regarding the water chemistry. In step  3770 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the water chemistry is within factory specified operating parameters. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3772  where the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user that the water chemistry is within the specified operating parameters. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3774  where the pump control logic  84  determines whether the pool chemistry is maintained by a separate device. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3776  where the pump control logic  84  communicates with the other device to determine what the device needs for proper operation. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3778  directly or after step  3776 . In step  3778 , the pump control logic  84  performs a function or changes operation of the pump to maintain the proper water chemistry based on the step  3776  or the set point parameters retrieved from memory. In step  3780 , the pump control logic  84  transmits a message to the user or the system that attention may be needed regarding the water chemistry. 
       FIG.  19 M  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3782 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to detect a gasket leak or a shaft seal leak. In step  3784 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from a sensor in the gasket or shaft seal. In step  3786 , the pump control logic  84  determines if there is a gasket or shaft seal leak. In step  3788 , the determination is made whether there is in fact a gasket or shaft seal leak. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3790  and will transmit a message to the user or system that there is no leak. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will transmit a message in step  3792  that the user should fix the leak. 
       FIG.  19 N  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3794 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves factory specified life expectancy data of the shaft seal from memory. In step  3796 , the pump control logic  84  determines the alert threshold for the life expectancy of the shaft seal. For example, a 90% threshold will alert the user when 90% of the life expectancy of the shaft seal is reached. In step  3798 , the pump control logic  84  will receive operational data on the shaft seal runtime. In step  3880 , the pump control logic  84  will determine whether the runtime is greater than the threshold with regard to the life expectancy data. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will go back to step  3798 . If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will proceed to step  3882  and transmit a message to the user regarding the remaining shaft seal shelf life so that the user can proactively address the shaft seal before a leak occurs. 
       FIG.  19 O  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  3884 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to determine the cleanliness of the filter. In step  3886 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on the factory specified parameters from memory for debris in the filter and energy consumption of the pump. In step  3888 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from the sensors in the filter and energy consumption in the pump. In step  3890 , the pump control logic  84  determines the cleanliness of the filter based on the debris in the filter. In step  3892 , the pump control logic  84  makes a determination as to whether the filter needs to be serviced. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  in step  3894  will determine if the energy consumption of the pump exceeds a factory or user set threshold, and if it does, the process ends and if it does not, then in step  3896 , the pump control logic  84  can adjust the flow to maintain a flow rate based on the amount of debris in the filter. If a positive determination is made in step  3892 , the pump control logic  84  in step  3898  will transmit a message to the user or system to service the filter (e.g., clean the cartridge). In step  3900 , the pump control logic  84  will determine whether the user took action to service the filter. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will proceed to step  3902  to adjust the pump operation to maintain a flow rate needed by the rest of the system  10 . If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  will skip step  3902  and will proceed directly back to step  3888 . 
       FIG.  19 P  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for periodically testing and advising the user of the variance from a “clean filter” state. For example, pump control logic  84  can periodically enter a “test” filter system state where the pool/spa equipment go to predetermined positions/states/speeds for testing the filter. In step  3904 , pump control logic  84  monitors for a “clean filter” condition (e.g., operational data from filter or input from a user, servicer, or installer, etc.). For example, a skimmer could communicate (using and of the data communication protocols disclosed herein) to pump control logic  84  that the filter has been cleaned or replaced, or the user could utilize an input device to indicate to pump control logic  84  that the filter has been cleaned or replaced. In step  3906 , pump control logic  84  determines if a “clean filter” condition has been received. If a negative determination is made in step  3906 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  3904 . If a positive determination is made in step  3906 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3908 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves “test” filter system state setpoints (e.g., valve position, pump speed, etc.) from the memory. In step  3910 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the installed pool/spa equipment to operate at the “test” setpoints. In step  3912 , pump control logic  84  receives current operational date from the filter. In step  3914 , pump control logic  84  determines if there are (1) retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  3914 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3916  and saved the “clean filter” operational data to the memory. Thus, after pump control logic  84  receives a “clean filter” condition, the pool/spa equipment enters a “test” system state and records the current operational data from the filter to the memory as a baseline measurement for future comparison. If a negative determination is made in step  3914 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3918 , where pump control logic  84  computes the variance from the “clean filter” operational data. Optionally, in step  3920 , pump control logic  84  could transmit a message to (e.g., advise) the user (e.g., “Filter Health ## %). In step  3922 , pump control logic  84  transmits instructions to the installed pool/spa equipment to resume normal operation. In step  3924 , the logic is delayed for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.), and the process then reverts to step  3908 . 
       FIG.  19 Q  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining if debris is interfering with operation of the pump. For example, in step  3926 , pump control logic  84  retrieves setpoint data on the acceptable debris level at a pump component(s) from memory. This setpoint data could be provided by the pump manufacturer, or alternatively, could be set by the user. In step  3928 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data on debris at the pump component(s). It is noted that the pump control logic could monitor one or more individual components (e.g., the impeller, shaft seal, and motor shaft) of the pump and could further monitor one or more parameters associated with each component (e.g., the level of debris in the impeller and/or rotational speed of the impeller). For example, pump control logic  84  could determine if there is debris trapped in the impeller by monitoring motor current, motor power consumption, or by using an accelerometer to determine an increase in motor vibration. In step  3930 , pump control logic  84  determines if the level of debris at the pump component(s) is below the setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  3930 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  3928 . If a negative determination is made in step  3930 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3932 , where pump control logic  84  determines if there are retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  3932 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  3928 . If a negative determination is made in step  3932 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3934 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the user (e.g., “Clean Impeller”). While the foregoing process has been discussed in terms of monitoring debris, it is also contemplated that pump control logic  84  can monitor additional parameters and alert the user when these parameters have exceeded their respective setpoints using similar processing steps. For example, in addition to monitoring the level of debris trapped in the impeller, discussed above, pump control logic  84  could also monitor rotational speeds of the components, determine whether debris is causing physical interference with the rotation of the impeller, shaft seal, or motor shaft, and then transmit an instruction to the user to address the issue (e.g., “Binding in Impeller—Clear Debris”). For example, pump control logic  84  could monitor motor current, power consumption, and receive operational data from an accelerometer to determine an increase in motor vibration (thereby indicating physical interference/binding of the impeller). Further still, instead of alerting the user when an operational parameter has exceeded its respective operational setpoint, pump control logic  84  could alter the operation of the pump to restore normal operation. For example, in the case of a variable speed drive, pump control logic  84  could monitor the humidity of the air inside the variable speed drive enclosure and adjust its operating condition to minimize humidity, thereby increasing reliability. For example, pump control logic  84  could receive operational data from a humidity sensor located within the variable speed drive enclosure. If pump control logic  84  determines that the humidity within the variable speed drive enclosure is above a maximum setpoint value, pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to the variable speed drive to increase the speed of operation, thereby drying out the air within the enclosure (due to increased temperature of certain electrical components within the enclosure precipitated by the increase in operating speed). 
       FIGS.  19 R and  19 S  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for assisting the user in determining the pump setpoints that should be used based on the user&#39;s installed equipment and preferences. It is contemplated that pump control logic  84  could include a wizard-based application that is accessible by the user via a human machine interface installed on the pump, centralized pool/spa control system, smartphone/device, web browser, or any other means for communicating with the system, disclosed herein. For example, in step  3936 , pump control logic  84  prompts the user to specify installed pool/spa equipment and operational parameters therefore (e.g., minimum skimmer speed/flow, number of skimmers, minimum heater speed/flow, has heater, heat pump, solar, etc.). Alternatively, the application could utilize widely-known bar scanning technology (e.g., utilizing/in combination with a camera of smart device), enabling the user to simply scan the barcode of each piece of installed equipment thereby avoiding the necessity of manual entry. Pump control logic  84  could then retrieve additional information (e.g., specifications, setpoints, warranty information, etc.) on the scanned equipment from a remote location (e.g., a remote server) using any suitable communication protocol described herein (e.g., accessing the internet vial a home WiFi router). In step  3938 , pump control logic  84  prompts the user to specify the desired pool/spa activities (e.g., bathing, swimming, water sports, etc.). For example, pump control logic  84  could present the user with a list of pre-programmed activities from which to choose, the user could search a database of pre-programmed activities, or the user could program custom activities and save the same to memory for later retrieval and use. In step  3940 , pump control logic  84  determines an acceptable range of speed setpoints for the pump (e.g., speed/flow for all pump related features). In step  3942 , pump control logic  84  presents the acceptable speed presets to the user and then prompts the user to select desired/optimal setpoints for the pump and in step  3944 , pump control logic  84  stores the user selected pump setpoints to memory and the process then ends. Optionally, as shown in steps  3950 - 3954 , the wizard could assist the user in selecting the desired/optimal pump setpoints by stepping through multiple actual pump speeds/flows so that the user can “choose” a desired speed/flow while observing the effect of the different speeds/flows on the actual pool/spa environment. For example, after determining the acceptable speed setpoints for the pump in step  3940 , pump control logic  84  could then proceed to step  3950 , where an instruction is transmitted to the pump to operate at an (acceptable) first (1st) speed. In step  3952 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to operate at an (acceptable) second (2nd) speed. In step  3954 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to operate the pump at another (acceptable) speed. Pump control logic  84  then proceeds to step  3942 , described hereinabove. It is noted that any number of acceptable speeds can be presented to the user. Accordingly, because the application could be run, viewed, or accessed on a mobile device (e.g., not tethered to a specific location) the wizard/application enables the user to stand poolside, watching features as speeds/flows are automatically displayed by pump control logic  84  or selected by the user/installer for each prompt. The wizard/application also enables the user/installer to stand at the equipment pad, watching equipment function (e.g., heater ignition) as the pump steps through various speeds/flows. Optionally, as shown in steps  3946  and  3948 , pump control logic  84  could sense and/or advise of a maximum speed/flow beyond which the pump cavitates or reaches an undesirable inflection point in energy consumption/efficiency. For example, pump control logic  84  could determine the maximum speed/flow beyond which the pump cavitates using operational data received from an accelerometer, optical sensor, or other means. In step  3946 , pump control logic  84  determines if the user selected setpoints are causing pump cavitation. If a negative determination is made in step  3946 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3944 , discussed hereinabove. If a positive determination is made in step  3946 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3948 , where an alert is transmitted to the user. Alternatively, the system could determine speeds at which the pump cavitates beforehand and remove the speeds at which the pump cavitates from the acceptable setpoints that are presented to the user in step  3942 . Also optionally, pump control logic  84  could suggest to the user alternative modes of operation (e.g., other than that selected by the user) that either improve the reliability of one or more pieces of installed pool/spa equipment, or improve the efficiency of one or more pieces of installed pool/spa equipment, individually, or as a whole system. For example, other pieces of installed pool/spa equipment could communicate with the pump control logic  84  and advise of optimum performance criteria. This logic could reside in other installed pool/spa equipment and be communicated to the pump, or the logic could be contained within the pump itself. 
       FIG.  19 S  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for automatically determining the pump setpoints that should be used based on the user&#39;s installed equipment and preferences. According to this embodiment, pump control logic  84  is able to “auto detect” equipment that is installed and automatically determine how the system should be run based on a variety of optimization choices (e.g., energy consumption, water feature performance, heating preferences, etc.). In step  3956 , pump control logic  84  prompts the user to specify desired pool/spa activities (e.g., bathing, swimming, water sports, etc.). As described above, pump control logic  84  could present the user with a list of pre-programmed activities from which to choose, the user could search a database of pre-programmed activities, or the user could program custom activities and save the same to memory for later retrieval and use. In step  3958 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from pool/spa equipment. In step  3960 , pump control logic  84  determines what pool/equipment has been installed, using the received operational data therefrom. In step  3962 , pump control logic  84  retrieves the installed equipment setpoints (e.g., minimum flow and/or pressure for heater operation) from memory. Using the equipment setpoints, in step  3964 , pump control logic  84  then determines the optimal speed setpoints for the pump based on all of the installed equipment. For example, pump control logic  84  could estimate the necessary pump speed. Alternatively, pump control logic  84  could step through various speeds/flows and receive operational data from the installed equipment (e.g., heaters, water features, valves, etc.) when there is sufficient flow and/or pressure for operation. Pump control logic  84  then proceeds to step  3966 , where pump control logic  84  stores the pump setpoint data to memory, and then the process ends. It is also contemplated that, in addition to pump speed, pump control logic  84  could capture the correct valve positions for delivering the required flow and/or pressure. Pump control logic  84  could also search for signals from any smart utility, radio frequency, WiFi, cellular, Bluetooth, geo-positioning, etc. that provides data for energy costs, energy discount periods, peak demand, etc. (see  FIG.  33 T ). Pump control logic  84  could then use this data to optimize performance and/or energy costs. 
     In addition to the foregoing, the application/wizard could walk the user through multiple steps for different installation modes, such as relay control or connection to pool/spa automation controllers (e.g., Hayward automation), and could indicate supported software levels of the pool/spa automation controllers. The application could also access dealer-defined programs/schedules via the cloud and then download the programs/scheduled to the pump for local installation. Although pump control logic  84  could operate according to a dealer-defined or user-defined schedule, pump control logic  84  is capable of determining when pool/spa equipment requires a flow that deviates from the normal schedule (e.g., due to user interaction, weather patterns, addition of pool/spa equipment, etc.) and automatically adjusting the pump flow/speed therefore. The application could further provide the user/installer with answers to frequently asked questions (i.e., FAQs) for the installation process as well as for individual pieces of pool/spa equipment, installation videos (either stored locally or as links accessible through communication protocols discussed herein), and can serve as a dynamic “quick start guide.” Pump control logic  84  could also serve as an Automated Engineered pool system solution for areas having regulations, such as in Florida (e.g., reports and/or calculates total dynamic head and/or flow). As described herein, an “Automated Engineered” pool system solution is one that automatically derives Total Dynamic Head (“TDH”) by measuring key metrics. For example, it could measure suction head (negative pressure) on the vacuum side of the pump and measure the pressure head on the pressure side of pump, both measurement devices being integral or adjacent to the pump, to derive Total Dynamic Head. Further, an overall System Curve (TDH vs. flow) could be estimated or calculated from a single point or generated when measured at multiple speeds when using a multi-speed pump. 
       FIG.  19 T  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for recording baseline performance data for future reference. More specifically, once the initial installation of the pool equipment is complete (see  FIGS.  19 R and  19 S ), pump control logic  84  can record initial operational data from the installed equipment. For example, in step  3968 , pump control logic  84  determines if the user has completed the installation wizard (see  FIGS.  19 R and  19 S ). If a negative determination is made in step  3968 , pump control logic  84  repeats step  3968 . If a positive determination is made in step  3968 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3970 , where pump control logic  84  receives operational data from installed pool/spa equipment (e.g., pump performance, motor performance, sound levels, etc.). In step  3972 , pump control logic  84  saves the operational data to the memory as baseline performance data. This baseline performance data could be used, for example, in combination with the health monitoring pump control logic  84  processing steps shown in  FIG.  19 D  or as illustrated in  FIG.  19 U , discussed hereinbelow. 
       FIG.  19 U  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining pump health by comparing baseline performance data and current operational data. In step  3974 , pump control logic  84  retrieves baseline performance data (e.g., pump performance, motor performance, sound levels, etc.) from the memory. In step  3976 , pump control logic  84  determines an alert threshold (e.g., performance down 10%, sound level increase 10%, etc.). In step  3978 , pump control logic  84  receives current operational data from the installed pool/spa equipment and/or other connected devices (e.g., sound level from microphone located at the pump). In step  3980 , pump control logic  84  calculates the change (e.g., delta) from the baseline performance data. In step  3982 , pump control logic  84  determines if the change from baseline performance is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made in step  3982 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  3978 . If a positive determination is made in step  3982 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3984 , where pump control logic  84  determines if there are retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  3984 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  3978 . If a negative determination is made in step  3984 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  3986 , where an alert is transmitted to the user (e.g., “Service Pump”). The process then ends. 
       FIG.  19 V  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining current weather conditions. In step  3988 , pump control logic  84  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  3990 , pump control logic  84  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  3992 , pump control logic  84  receives web data on current weather conditions (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). It is noted that pump control logic  84  can receive web data through any wired and/or wireless communication protocols disclosed herein. Current weather conditions can include, for example, temperature, precipitation, wind speed, wind direction, etc. Web data on current weather conditions could also include live 3rd party data, for example, live weather maps of precipitation and cloud cover. In step  3994 , pool pump control logic  84  saves the current weather conditions to the memory for later retrieval. In step  3996 , pump control logic  84  is delayed by X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.) and then the process returns to step  3988 . Optionally, in step  3998 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  4000 , pump control logic  84  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device. In step  4002 , pump control logic  84  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi). While the foregoing is discussed in connection with pump control logic  84  obtaining current weather information from a remote source (e.g., the internet), it is contemplated that pump control logic  84  could obtain current weather information from local sources as well (e.g., receive operational data from local temperature sensors/thermocouples, wind meters/anemometers, rain gauges/ombrometers, etc.). 
     Pump control logic  84  can receive web data on future/forecasted weather conditions (e.g., 7-day forecasts, almanacs, etc.), in addition to current weather forecasts.  FIG.  19 W  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining forecasted weather conditions. Although the processing steps shown in  FIGS.  19 V and  19 W  are discussed sequentially, it should be understood that the processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  in  FIGS.  19 V and  19 W  could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. In step  4004 , pump control logic  84  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  4006 , pump control logic  84  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  4008 , pump control logic  84  receives web data on forecasted weather conditions (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). It is noted that pump control logic  84  can access receive web data through any wired and/or wireless communication protocols disclosed herein. Forecasted weather conditions can include, for example, temperature, precipitation, wind speed, wind direction, etc. Web data on forecasted weather conditions could also include live 3rd party data, for example, live weather maps of precipitation and cloud cover. In step  4010 , pool pump control logic  84  saves the forecasted weather conditions to the memory for later retrieval. In step  4012 , pump control logic  84  is delayed by X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.) and then the process returns to step  4004 . Optionally, in step  4014 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  4016 , pump control logic  84  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device. In step  4018 , pump control logic  84  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi). 
       FIG.  19 X  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for instructing the pump to run higher load operating modes during cooler times of the day if higher than normal temperatures are expected. In step  4020 , pump control logic  84  receives current date and time data (e.g., from internal clock, as web data, etc.). In step  4022 , pump control logic  84  retrieves forecasted weather conditions (e.g., hourly forecast) for the current date. The forecasted weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 W . In step  4024 , pump control logic  84  retrieves the pump schedule for the current date from the memory. In step  4026 , pump control logic  84  identifies periods (e.g., times of day) of high load operating conditions in the pump schedule. In step  4028 , pump control logic  84  identifies periods of forecasted high temperatures (e.g., times of day above 80° F.). In step  4030 , pump control logic  84  determines if the periods of forecasted high temperatures and high load conditions coincide. If a negative determination is made (e.g., the pump will not be running at a high-load during periods of high temperature) in step  4030 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  4020 . If a positive determination is made (e.g., the pump will be running at a high-load during periods of high temperature) in step  4030 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4032 , where periods of forecasted low temperatures (e.g., times of day below 70° F.) are identified. Pump control logic  84  then proceeds to step  4034 , where the pump schedule is modified so that the higher load operating modes run during periods of forecasted low temperatures. In step  4036 , pump control logic  84  saves the modified pump schedule to the memory. Pump control logic  84  then returns to step  4020 . 
       FIG.  19 Y  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for automated operation of pool devices based on current weather conditions (e.g., periods of heavy rain). In step  4038 , pump control logic  84  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., precipitation, wind speed, etc.) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 V . In step  4040 , pump control logic  84  retrieves maximum precipitation setpoint data from memory. In step  4042 , pump control logic  84  determines if the current amount of precipitation is above the maximum precipitation setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  4044 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to suspend operation (e.g., preventing damage due to water ingress). Optionally, in step  4046 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to disconnect power to high voltage circuits. The process then reverts to step  4038 . If a negative determination is made in step  4042 , the process proceeds to step  4048 , where pump control logic  84  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., pump, smart relays, smart circuit breaker, etc.) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., heavy precipitation). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  4038 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  4050 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  4052 , pump control logic  84  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “precipitation subsided”). The process then reverts to step  4038 . In addition to the foregoing, it is also contemplated that pump control logic  84  could suspend operation in advance of periods of heavy precipitation by monitoring the forecasted weather conditions and suspending operation before the precipitation begins. 
       FIG.  19 Z  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for automated operation of pool devices based on current weather conditions (e.g., high winds). In step  4054 , pump control logic  84  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 V . In step  4056 , pump control logic  84  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  4058 , pump control logic  84  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  4060 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to increase circulation, thereby providing better skimmer performance. Optionally, in step  4062 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to actuate a smart valve(s). As referred to herein, smart valves (or smart valve actuators) include an actuator which rotates valves in response to a control signal from pool control logic  70  (e.g., water feature control logic  72 , valve actuator control logic  74 , cleaner control logic  76 , lighting control logic  78 , heater control logic  80 , chemistry automation control logic  82 ). Accordingly, smart valves could be utilized in any application that requires the automated operation of valves in a pool/spa environment. For example, actuation of smart valves by pump control logic  84  could thereby automatically engage pool/spa operation, solar heating, pool cleaners, water features, provide additional flow to the skimmer(s), and/or decrease flow from the suction outlets during periods of high winds. Also optionally, in step  4064 , pump control logic  84  could further detect accumulated debris at pool/spa equipment (e.g., motor fan inlet) and in step  4066 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an alert to the user (e.g., “Remove Debris from Motor Fan Inlet”). The process then reverts to step  4054 . If a negative determination is made in step  4058 , the process proceeds to step  4068 , where pump control logic  84  determines if the operation of any pool devices has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  4054 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  4070 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  4072 , pump control logic  84  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  4054 . 
       FIG.  19 AA  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for automatically adjusting pump speed/flow for cleaning a pool/spa in response to a weather condition (e.g., high winds). More specifically, pump control logic  84  can manage and/or respond to heavy debris/particulate sources (e.g., trees, vegetation, dust, etc.) up-wind of the pool/spa area by adjusting the pump speed or flow, based on wind speed and/or direction. For example, in step  4074 , pump control logic  84  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed, direction) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 V . In step  4076 , pump control logic  84  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  4078 , pump control logic  84  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  4080 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves skimmer location data from the memory. The skimmer location data can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 A . In step  4082 , pump control logic  84  determines the most downwind skimmer(s). In step  4084 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to increase the flow to the downwind skimmer(s) and the process then reverts to step  4074 . The flow to the downwind skimmer(s) can be increased in various ways, including, but not limited to, transmitting an instruction to the pump to increase the pump speed, and transmitting an instruction to a smart valve to actuate, thereby adjusting to a position that optimizes flow to the skimmer. Optionally, in step  4086 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to deactivate or reduce water features (e.g., decrease pump speed, adjust valve positions to reduce flow, etc.), thereby preventing splash-out. If a negative determination is made in step  4078 , the process proceeds to step  4088 , where pump control logic  84  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., pump, smart valves, etc.) have been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made in step  4088 , the process reverts to step  4074 . If a positive determination is made in step  4088 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4090 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  4092 , pump control logic  84  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  4074 . 
       FIG.  19 AB  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for automatically adjusting operation of the pump in response to weather conditions (e.g., ambient temperature, wind speed, and/or wind chill) to provide freeze protection. This enables pump control logic  84  to provide a lower, more energy efficient setpoint (e.g., minimum speed and temperature). In step  4094 , pump control logic  84  retrieves current weather conditions data from memory (e.g., ambient temperature, wind speed, and/or wind chill). The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 V . In step  4096 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from the pump (e.g., pump speed/flow). In step  4098 , pump control logic  84  determines if there is a freeze risk based on the current weather conditions and the speed/flow of the pump. If a negative determination is made (e.g., there is no freeze risk) in step  4098 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  4094 . If a positive determination is made (e.g., there is a freeze risk) in step  4098 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to increase speed/flow. Pump control logic  84  then reverts to step  4094 . 
       FIG.  19 AC  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for adjusting the operation of the pump to meet the needs of other pool/spa equipment. For example, pump control logic  84  could increase the speed/flow of the pump in response to an increase in the output of the heater, necessitated by a drop in ambient temperature (e.g., heater output increased to maintain desired pool/spa temperature). In step  4102 , the heater output is increased (e.g., due to a drop in ambient temperature). In step  4104 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from the heater (e.g., current or requested BTU output). In step  4106 , pump control logic  84  determines if an increase in pump speed/flow is required based on the operational data received from the heater. If a negative determination is made in step  4106 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  4104 . If a positive determination is made in step  4106 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4108 , where an instruction is transmitted to the pump to increase speed/flow. Pump control logic  84  then returns to step  4104 . While the foregoing process steps are discussed in connection with the pump control logic  84  adjusting the operation of the pump in response to the needs of the heater during a drop in ambient temperature, it is contemplated that pump control logic  84  can adjust the operation of the pump in response to the needs of any of the installed pool/spa equipment disclosed herein. 
       FIG.  19 AD  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining and running a mode of operation based on the time of day (e.g., daytime or evening) or time of year (e.g., season). In step  4110 , pump control logic  84  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  4112 , pump control logic  84  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  4114 , pump control logic  84  receives web data on sunrise/sunset times (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). It is noted that pump control logic  84  can receive web data through any wired and/or wireless communication protocols disclosed herein. In step  4116 , pump control logic  84  saves the sunrise/sunset data to the memory for later retrieval. In step  4118 , pump control logic  84  receives current time and date data (e.g., from web or internal clock). In step  4120 , pump control logic  84  determines if the current time is between sunrise and sunset (e.g., daytime). If a positive determination is made in step  4120 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4122 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves equipment setpoints for a daytime operation mode (e.g., pump speed/flow during the day). In step  4124 , pump control logic  84  transmits instructions to installed pool/spa equipment to operate at the retrieved setpoints and then pump control logic  84  returns to step  4118 . If a negative determination is made in step  4120 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4126 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves equipment setpoints for an evening operation mode (e.g., pump speed/flow during the evening) and then pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4124 , discussed hereinabove. While the foregoing process steps have been discussed in terms of selecting a mode of operation based on the time of day, it is also contemplated that pump control logic  84  could select the mode of operation based on the time of year (e.g., season). Furthermore the modes of operation could be pre-programed (e.g., default seasonal modes of operation/programming provided by the manufacturer, pool professional (e.g., service technician, builders, installers, etc.)) or user-defined (e.g., customized modes of operation based on the time of day or season). Optionally, in step  4128 , pump control logic  84  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  4130 , pump control logic  84  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device. In step  4132 , pump control logic  84  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi). 
       FIG.  19 AE  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pump control logic  84  for determining and running a mode of operation based on the amount of sun exposure. In step  4134 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from an ambient light sensor (e.g., sun exposure). In step  4136 , pump control logic  84  retrieves ambient light setpoints (e.g., minimum and/or maximum sun exposure for modes of operation) from the memory. In step  4138 , pump control logic  84  determines if the current ambient light is above the minimum setpoint. Conversely, pump control logic  84  could also determine if the current ambient light is below the below the minimum setpoint or above or below the maximum setpoint, thereby determining high or low sun exposure. If a positive determination is made in step  4138 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4140 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves equipment setpoints (e.g., pump speed/flow) for a high sun exposure operation mode. If a negative determination is made in step  4138 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4144 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves equipment setpoints (e.g., pump speed/flow) for a low sun exposure operation mode. In step  4142 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction(s) to installed pool/spa equipment to operate at the retrieved setpoints for the current operation mode and then the process reverts to step  4134 . 
       FIG.  19 AF  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for minimizing sound pressure when pool occupants are in close proximity to a pumping system. In step  4146 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from a proximity sensor. In step  4148 , pump control logic  84  determines if there are pool occupants in close proximity. If a positive determination is made in step  4148 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4150 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves maximum ambient noise setpoint data for pump operation from the memory (e.g., maximum allowable decibels when occupants are in close proximity to the pump). In step  4152 , pump control logic  84  receives ambient noise operational data (e.g., measured decibels from a microphone positioned at or near the pump). In step  4154 , pump control logic  84  determined if the measured ambient noise is above the maximum ambient noise setpoint. If a positive determination is made at step  4154 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4156 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump to decrease output (e.g., reduce speed by 5%), thereby reducing the decibels generated by the pump. Pump control logic  84  then reverts to step  4152 . If a negative determination is made at step  4154 , pump control logic  84  reverts to step  4152 . If a negative determination is made at step  4148 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4158 , where pump control logic  84  determines if the operation of the pumping system has been altered (e.g., the output of the pump was previously reduced from normal operating levels). If a negative determination is made in step  4158 , pump control logic  84  reverts to step  4146 . If a positive determination is made in step  4158 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4160 , where pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the pump system equipment to resume normal operation. Thus, pump control logic  84  could reduce the output of the pumping system to reduce decibel levels when pool occupants are detected, but resume normal operation when pool occupants are no longer present. 
       FIG.  19 AG  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for addressing alert conditions. More specifically, pump control logic  84  could ask the user if it should automatically address the issue and if it should automatically address the issue in the future. In step  4162 , pump control logic  84  transmits an alert and recommendation to the user (e.g., “Excessive Motor Heating—Reduce Speed”). The alert and recommendation can be generated as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 D . In step  4164 , pump control logic  84  prompts the user for automatic system implementation of the recommendation (e.g., “Reduce Motor Speed?—YIN”). In step  4166 , pump control logic  84  determines if the user elects automatic implementation of the recommendation. If a negative determination is made in step  4166 , the process ends. If a positive determination is made in step  4166 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4168 , where pump control logic  84  prompts the user for automatic implementation of the recommendation for subsequent similar alerts (e.g., “Automatically Address This Alert From Now On?”). In step  4170 , pump control logic  84  determines if the user elects automatic implementation for subsequent alerts. If a positive determination is made in step  4170 , pump control logic  84  saves the user preference to memory. In step  4174 , pump control logic  84  transmits an instruction to the installed pool/spa equipment to implement the recommendation (e.g., reduce motor speed). If a negative determination is made in step  4170 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  7174  and the process then ends. 
       FIG.  19 AH  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by pump control logic  84  for automatically advising the user of nearby pool service companies when the pumping system, or any other installed pool/spa equipment, needs attention. It is contemplated that pump control logic  84  could notify the user by way of an on-board indicator provided on the pumping system and/or by way of a notification “pushed” out to other devices (e.g., smart devices) via any of the communication protocols disclosed herein. Pump control logic  84  could also automatically notify a user&#39;s preferred pool service provider when the pumping system, or any other installed pool/spa equipment, needs attention. In step  4176 , pump control logic  84  receives operational data from the installed pool/spa equipment (e.g., temperature of pump motor). In step  4178 , pump control logic  84  determines if any of the installed pool/spa equipment is in need of service. Pump control logic  84  can determine if any of the pool/spa equipment is in need of service by way of a similar process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 D . If a negative determination is made in step  4178 , pump control logic  84  returns to step  4176 . If a positive determination is made in step  4178 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4186 , where pump control logic  84  determines the location of the pool/spa. The location of the pool/spa can be determined by way of a similar process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  19 V . In step  4188 , pump control logic  84  receives web data on local pool service providers (e.g., pool service providers in close proximity to the pool/spa location). In step  4190 , pump control logic  84  prompts the user to select a preferred service provider (e.g., from a list of the local pool service providers. In step  4192 , pump control logic  84  stores the selected service provider to memory. In step  4194 , pump control logic  84  transmits an alert to the selected service provider (e.g., skimmer filter at [address] requires replacement). Optionally, pump control logic  84  could automatically notify a previously selected preferred service provider when any of the pool/spa equipment needs attention. For example, in step  4180 , pump control logic  84  could determine if a pool service provider was previously selected. If a negative determination is made in step  4180 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4186 . If a positive determination is made in step  4180 , pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4182 , where pump control logic  84  retrieves the previously selected service provider data from the memory. In step  4184 , pump control logic  84  transmits an alert to the previously selected service provider (e.g., skimmer filter at [address] requires replacement). Pump control logic  84  then returns to step  4176 .  FIG.  19 AI  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4300 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor the status of the filter. In step  4302 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on the factory specified parameters from memory for flow and/or pressure drop in the pump. In step  4304 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from a sensor regarding the flow and/or pressure drop in the pump. In step  4306 , the pump control logic  84  determines the pressure drop and/or flow rate in the pump. In step  4308 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the pressure and/or flow rate is within the factory specified parameters. If a positive determination is made, the process ends, and if a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4310  where the appropriate valves are actuated to initiate backwash filtering. 
       FIG.  19 AJ  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4312 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor the debris on the surface of the pool. In step  4314 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from the vision system which provides the location and amount of debris in locations of the pool surface. In step  4316 , the pump control logic  84  determines the location of high debris area on the pool surface. In step  4318 , the pump control logic  84  alters the position of return fittings and the skimmers to remove debris from the pool surface in an efficient and effective manner. 
       FIG.  19 AK  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . For example, pump control logic  84  could determine the correct water flow for water features by communicating with other pieces of installed pool/spa equipment which advise pump control logic  84  of optimum performance criteria. This logic could reside in other installed pool/spa equipment and be communicated to the pump, or the logic could be contained within the pump itself. In step  4320 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to determine the correct flow for a water feature. In step  4322 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data for the water features from memory. The data retrieved can include, but is not limited to, type of water feature, size, capacity, water flow capacity, water flow levels, etc. In step  4324 , the pump control logic  84  receives user input, if any, for water feature customization to achieve a custom appearance. For example, a manual mode could be provided to allow the user to specify the desired water feature performance. If there is no user input, then the pump control logic  84  can use the data retrieved in step  4322 . In step  4326 , the pump control logic  84  can calculate the optimal flow rate based on the characteristics of the water feature. Such characteristics, include but is not limited to, water feature, size, capacity, water flow capacity, water flow levels, etc. In step  4328 , the pump control logic  84  receives a schedule for the water features, if any. In step  4330 , the pump control logic  84  adjusts the valves of the water feature so that the their operation can be schedule based. In step  4332 , the pump control logic  84  transmits the flow rate needed for the water feature. The type of water features can include, but is not limited to, laminars, bubblers, waterfalls, deck jets, fountains, and skuppers. 
       FIG.  19 AL  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4334 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to provide flow to a heater. In step  4336 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves water temperature set point data for heater operation from memory. This data could include minimum and maximum water temperatures set by a user or set by factory specified operating parameters. In step  4338 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational temperature data. In step  4340 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the water temperature is below a minimum set point. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4342  to transmit an instruction to provide flow to the heater. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4344  to determine whether the water temperature is above a maximum set point. If a negative determination is made, the process ends. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  actuates valves to bypass the heater to improve hydraulic efficiency in step  4346 . 
       FIG.  19 AM  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4348 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to activate a heater or monitor or address heating controls. In step  4350 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves an optimum flow rate set point data for heater operation from memory. In step  4352 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational flow rate and/or valve position data. In this step, the pump control logic  84  receives data from the heat source identifying when the heat source has adequate flow and/or pressure to operate. In step  4354 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the operational data is within the optimal set point range. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4356  to store and/or update current optimal flow rate for each heater device. The pump control logic  84  can store a history of this data. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4358  where a determination is made regarding whether retries are remaining. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4360 , to transmit an instruction to increase flow to the heater by five percent. Any other percentage increase could be used. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4362  to transmit an error condition and the process would then end. 
       FIG.  19 AN  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4364 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to manage a pump. In step  4366 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from a pool cover. In step  4368 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the pool cover is closed. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  reverts back to step  4366 . If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4370  where it retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory such as pool surface area, volume, geometry, water features, etc. in step  4372 , the pump control logic  84  determines proper operation of the pump when the pool cover is closed based on the factors retrieved above. In step  4374 , the pump control logic  84  determines proper pump speed to ensure the pool cover is not damaged by flooding. In step  4376 , the pump control logic  84  can determine the decreased rate of chlorine reduction due to lack of direct sunlight or less solar loading. In step  4378 , the pump control logic  84  transmits instructions to pump of the foregoing calculations such as proper pump speed. 
     FIG.  19 A 0  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4380 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to manage the water level in the pool. In step  4382 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves pool water level settings from memory. This setting can be user set or set by factory default parameters. In step  4384 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from a sensor monitoring the water level in a pool. In step  4386 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the water level is within the set point parameters. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4388  to transmit an appropriate message to the user or the system. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4390  to adjust the operation of the pump to allow the water level in the pool to reach the set point parameters. In step  4392 , the pump control logic  84  transmit an appropriate message to the user or the system that the water level is not in set point range and that the pump operation has been adjusted to remedy the water level situation. 
       FIG.  19 AP  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4394 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to manage the operation of the pump based on the number of bathers in the pool. In step  4396 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from motion sensors. In step  4398 , the pump control logic  84  determines the number of bathers in the pool based on the data from the motion sensors. In step  4400 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory. Such parameters could include, but is not limited to, pool surface area, volume, geometry, etc. The parameters will assist the pump control logic  84  in step  4402  to determine proper pump speed based on the number of bathers in the pool. The pump in step  4402  can adjust its operation based on the number of bathers. Furthermore, the pump control logic  84  could also control other equipment that needs to be deactivated or activated based on the presence and/or number of bathers in the pool. For example, in step  4404 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether to activate or deactivate other pool equipment based on the number of bathers in the pool. In step  4406 , the pump control logic  84  transmits the deactivation or activation signal to the other equipment. 
       FIG.  19 AQ  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4408 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor system curve of the pump which is the summation of the dynamic head. In step  4410 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data regarding the pump from memory. In step  4412 , the pump control logic  84  receives operational data from sensors monitoring the pump. In step  4414 , the pump control logic  84  estimates or calculates the system curve based on the multiple speeds of the pump. Alternatively, pump control logic  84  could estimate or calculate the overall system curve based on a single point. In step  4416 , the pump control logic  84  provides an indication of system efficiency rating and alerts trade and/or consumers based on factory defined or selectable changes. In step  4418 , the pump control logic  84  provides an indication of system efficiency such as “efficiency mode,” “performance mode” etc. and assigns a push button to go to a selected mode with one push of a button. In step  4420 , the pump control logic  84  calculates periods of hydraulic inefficiencies and in step  4422 , it recommends ways to improve hydraulic efficiency. In step  4424 , the pump control logic  84  auto-delivers the correct flow or speed to make the equipment more efficient. For example, pump control logic  84  could measure suction head (negative pressure) on the vacuum side of the pump and measure pressure head on the pressure side of pump, both measurement devices being integral or adjacent to the pump, to derive Total Dynamic Head (“TDH”). An overall System Curve (TDH vs. flow) could also be estimated or calculated from a single point, or generated when measured at multiple speeds when using a multi-speed pump. Further pump control logic  84  could compare the calculated system curve to known industry system curves (e.g., “Curve A”, “Curve C”, etc.) and determine a hydraulic efficiency “score.” Pump control logic  84  could then determine how to improve the efficiency score and then either provide general suggestions to the user to improve said score, or automatically implement the suggestions. In one example, pump control logic  84  could monitor the typical operating flow of the pool/pump and suggest alternate schedules that would achieve the same number of turnovers in a day with lower power consumption. 
       FIG.  19 AR  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4426 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to monitor demand based operation from local utility companies. In step  4428 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified parameters from memory for the utility company. In step  4430 , the pump control logic  84  receives operation data of the pump flow. In step  4432 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the pump operational data is within the set point parameters set by the utility company. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4434  where a message is transmitted to the user regarding the pump operational data being within the set point parameters of the utility company and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4436  where the pump control logic  84  performs a function or changes the pump operation to conform to the utility company set point parameters. Then in step  4438 , the pump control logic  84  transmits a message that the pump operation has changed to conform to the utility company standards. 
       FIG.  19 AS  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4440 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to provide flow to a selected pool equipment. In step  4442 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified parameters from memory for the pumping needs of a selected pool equipment. In step  4444 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the flow data is being defined by the selected pool equipment. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4446  where the pump itself defines the flow parameters for the selected pool equipment based on the flow provided by the pump. If a positive determination is and after step  4446 , the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4448  where it receives operational data for the flow of the pool equipment. In step  4450 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the flow data is within the set point parameters either defined by the equipment or the pump. If a positive determination is made, a message is transmitted to the user or the system that the flow data is within operating parameters. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4454  where the speed of the pump is increased periodically to meet the demand of the pool equipment and the process again reverts to step  4448  to receiver operational data and make the same determination in step  4450 . 
       FIG.  19 AT  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4456 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to measure the turbidity of the water. In step  4458 , the pump control logic  84  retrieves data on factory specified parameters from memory regarding the turbidity of the water. In step  4460 , the pump control logic  84  recieves operational turbidity data. In step  4462 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether the turbidity data is within the specified operating parameters. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4464  where a message is transmitted regarding the turbidity data being within the operating range. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4466  where a determination is made as to whether the user wants to set a blackout time instead of a filter time. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4468  where the pump control logic  84  automatically sets the filter schedule based on turbidity level. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  sets a blackout time period based on the user input in step  4470 . Then in step  4472 , the pump control logic  84  adjusts the pump to pump only what is needed to save energy and meet turbidity levels. 
       FIG.  19 AU  is another flowchart illustrating the processing logic of the pump control logic  84 . In step  4473 , the pump control logic  84  receives an instruction to prime the pump. In step  4474 , the pump control logic  84  can start the pump at the desired speed, not the prime speed. In step  4476 , the pump control logic  84  receives operation data from the pump regarding water detection. In step  4478 , the pump control logic  84  determines whether water is detected. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4480  where the priming period timer is cleared and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4482  where a timer is started or continued. In step  4484 , the pump control logic  84  make a determination as to whether there is time remaining in the timer that was started. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  decrements the timer and proceeds back to step  4476 . If a negative determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4484  where a determination is made as to whether if the current try is a retry. If a positive determination is made, the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4490  where an error condition is transmitted alerting the system or user that the priming failed and the process ends. If a negative determination is made and the current try is the first try, then the pump control logic  84  proceeds to step  4492  where the pump is stopped and allowed to cool. Then in step  4494 , the pump control logic  84  reprimes at the maximum rotations per minute until flow return, then immediately the pump control logic  84  will return to the user or firmware desired speed. 
     The above processes for the pump control logic  84  can also be applied to a pumping system that is able to manage auxiliary pumps used at any given site. Some of the management features can include, but is not limited to, turning auxiliary pumps on/off according to specific schedules, as well as changing the pump speed for a variable speed pump. Indeed, all of the processes for the pump control logic  84  as shown with respect to  FIGS.  18 - 19 AU  can be applied to auxiliary pumps. Auxiliary pumps can include, but are not limited to, pressure cleaner booster pumps, waterfall pumps, and pumps used for water features or spas. 
     It is contemplated that any of the various processes in the embodiments described herein in connection with  FIGS.  19 A- 19 AU  could be incorporated into pump control logic  84  either alone or in any combination. Further any additional processes disclosed herein in connection with pool control logic  70  (e.g., water feature control logic  72 , valve actuator control logic  74 , cleaner control logic  76 , lighting control logic  78 , heater control logic  80 , chemistry automation control logic  82 ) could also be incorporated into pump control logic  84  either alone or in any combination. For example, the pump could include or be modularly upgradeable to include any of the various processes in the embodiments described herein in connection with  FIGS.  19 A- 19 AU . Further still, any of the flowcharts illustrating processing steps disclosed in connection with pump control logic  84  can be applied to pool control logic  70  (e.g., water feature control logic  72 , valve actuator control logic  74 , cleaner control logic  76 , lighting control logic  78 , heater control logic  80 , chemistry automation control logic  82 ). 
     As mentioned briefly above, embodiments may provide smart valves/smart valve actuators that include an actuator which rotates valves in response to a control signal. In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator may function as a stand-alone control for its associated valve or valves. In another embodiment, the smart valve actuator may operate in conjunction with a control automation system as described herein. In a further embodiments, the smart valve actuator can operate according to a preset, preconfigured, and/or modifiable schedule. The smart valve actuator as described further below may provide for an easier installation and use by untrained installers and users. Further, the smart valve actuator may reduce the time and cost required when needing multiple pumps and ball valves to attain a perfect balance of distributed or shared water features. Additionally the smart valve actuator gives the pool owner control over his water features, the ability to articulate and balance them remotely, and the possibility of providing varied effects on demand. 
     Traditional (non-smart) valve actuators have been used to electrify a valve to enable remote control. Existing valve actuators have internal or software driven limit switches that the installer can use to program the valve actuator to stop turning the valve at the desired point. This allows a valve to turn to a desired point and deliver a desired effect on a water feature, and prevents the actuator motor from turning the valve to inappropriate positions that may ‘dead-head’ the plumbing, blocking all water flow. However, the installer of such a valve actuator must carefully mount the valve actuator in one of four orientations on top of the valve in order to place the existing 180 degrees of control in the needed orientation with the valve. Then the installer must disassemble the actuator body and carefully re-position two cams so that when the shaft position reaches the desired limit, the cam depresses an internal limit switch and disconnects power to the motor. This installation procedure is time consuming and requires skill. 
     Traditional (non-smart) valve actuators have also required an AC low-volt power supply to power the actuator&#39;s motor. This power source may require additional circuitry or power transformers to generate this power source dedicated only for use to power the actuator motor. Additionally, traditional valve actuators have only one programmable limit for clockwise and one for counterclockwise actuation. These programmable limits may be set to achieve a particular effect on a water feature, for example causing a pleasing flow on a fountain or a desired height on a deck jet. However, if the water flow or pressure changes at the input port of the valve, the desired effect is lost. Similarly, water flow will change due to pump speed changes, filter media condition, and interaction with the valve position of additional valves in the system or booster pumps that may divert water. Having water features that are influenced by interactions with other equipment and valves results in undesired performance. Installers often add completely isolated plumbing systems only for water features to avoid this undesired behavior. An additional issue with traditional valve actuators is that the cam setting of traditional valves is limited in resolution to the splines present on the actuator drive shaft, and is often too coarse to allow setting for an exact water feature effect. This requires compromise in setting to the nearest setting. 
     Embodiments provide a smart valve actuator that addresses many of the drawbacks of traditional valve actuators. In one embodiment, a smart valve actuator has the ability to be controlled directly at the device or from the pool automation system in the same manner as one would control a variable speed pump, for example, by providing control of intermediate positions via software control. In one embodiment the smart valve actuator may be addressed automatically from the control. In another embodiment, the control may be given an address of the smart valve actuator that enables the control to transmit fixed and variable commands to the smart valve actuator. Embodiments may provide a number of additional features such as the ability to set minimum and maximum settings for each smart valve actuator to allow for minimum and maximum allowed flow and to set protection limits to prevent the valve from turning to potentially damaging positions. Additional features may enable the configuration/setting of high, medium and low default flow settings and the ability to control positions variably by using, as non-limiting examples, digital or analog + and − buttons, a digital or analog slider, or a rotary knob on the controller or on the actuator to control the flow. In one embodiment LEDs may be provided that allow the pool owner or servicer to identify settings, set points and flow at a glance. In further embodiments, an added flow, temperature or pressure sensor can monitor the water properties of the output flow and automatically adjust the valve position to seek a programmed setpoint and/or an absolute position sensor can allow manual valve actuation without requiring re-synchronization after the motor is re-connected to the shaft, thereby eliminating the need to mount the smart valve actuator in a particular orientation because the device can manage the valve angle over the entire 360 degree rotation of the valve. 
     The smart valve actuator can be used manually or through automation. The smart valve actuator may sit on an existing valve, may have a valve integral to it on pool equipment plumbing or may be located at a location in the backyard to control a flow of water between one to many plumbed water ports. In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator is capable of receiving from, or giving to, a pool controller, a unique address that enables communication of specific commands and settings between the actuator and its controlling entity. In some embodiments, when controlled by the pool automation system, the smart valve actuator may communicate by communication protocols, including without limitation, RS485, Ethernet, WiFi, Bluetooth, ZWave, Zigbee, thread, cellular or another communication protocol. Wireless control of the smart valve actuator from a web-enabled device or the pool controller may occur in the following embodiments: when the WiFi chip is on main (intelligence) PCB, is attached/plugged into main PCB, is modularly upgraded on the main PCB or in the PCB enclosure, is modularly upgraded on/external to the main PCB enclosure, or is remote to the main PCB enclosure. An antenna may be mounted with, or located remote to, the WiFi chip for all prescribed locations/methods described above. The smart valve actuator may also allow pool controlling devices to communicate directly with web-enabled devices (e.g.: phone, tablets, phones, thermostats, voice enabled devices, etc.) without the need to go through a home router. 
     The smart valve actuator can be configured to set specific open and close valve settings, and it can be defaulted or configured with default settings for low flow, medium flow, high flow, or programmable flow at varied angles. These flow rates can be used to dial in settings when a pump is powering the water associated with water features. In some cases these flow rates can be used to achieve the desired outcome at the lowest flow increasing the pool&#39;s energy efficiency. The smart valve actuator&#39;s position may be variably controlled in a number of ways, such as without limitation, by using push and hold digital or analog buttons, digital or analog + and − buttons, a digital or analog slider, and/or a rotary knob on the controller or on the actuator to control the flow. 
     In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator may be used to automate filter valves and their associated positions such as, for example, filter, backwash, rinse, waste, closed, recirculate, and winterize. An additional benefit of the smart valve actuator is that it may allow filters and valves to be bypassed when not required for certain applications, such as when operating an attached spa, thereby improving flow and energy efficiency. In another embodiments, the smart valve actuator could be used in connection with the addition of chemicals (e.g., ORP, pH, free chlorine, etc.) to the pool/spa. For example, the smart valve actuator could be used to integrate the automation of various positions for tablet feeding automation. 
     In an embodiment, the smart valve actuator may be used to automatically manage water flow needed for operation of suction and pressure cleaners. When a smart valve actuator is used in conjunction with a variable speed pump, the pump may be able to increase its speed to deliver the flow necessary for proper operation of a suction or pressure cleaner, thereby maximizing energy savings when compared to running the variable speed pump at a higher speed throughout the day. In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator control may set angles via commands. The commands may be stored in the controller or the actuator processor. The change in settings may be done automatically; may be done through power interruption to move to the next setting, may be done through time duration of the power interruption; and may be done with a manual setting on the actuator. 
     Among its features, the smart valve actuator may have 1 to many increments with increments set at 0.5 degrees for 180 degrees, or other resolution or range. The smart valve actuator may measure the angle set manually and store that position in memory for use as one of its default settings. In one embodiment the smart valve actuator may include sensor capabilities to measure the temperature, flow rates and/or pressure of the input water or output water when the valve is diverted and be able to use the measured parameters to turn the motor to achieve a desired setpoint. The flow sensing or pressure sensing may be built into the smart valve actuator or may be attained by a secondary flow sensor. 
     In one embodiment, a stored setpoint flow/pressure level may be used by a PID loop (or other control algorithm) to turn the valve to a needed position to achieve the flow and the smart valve actuator may update the position if conditions (pressure, flow, etc.) changes. 
     As noted, the smart valve actuator provides a number of improvements over traditional (non-smart) valve actuators. For example, the smart valve actuator may manage a fluid level in a spa with a sensor or may manage return valves from a spa to prevent the spa from emptying or overfilling via level sensing. The smart valve actuator may block a water feature flow if ambient temperatures are too low thus providing a valve-controlled freeze protection. For example, the smart valve actuator may be operated by a bi-metallic switch as an input that reverses the motor at low temperatures (no circuit board needed). The smart valve actuator may communicate with a pool cover sensor input that prevents activation of a water feature if the pool cover is closed. Additionally, in some embodiments, the smart valve actuator may open a solar panel return if the solar panel temperature has reached a desired setpoint. In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator may include a wind sensor and block a water feature flow if forecasted wind (retrieved from the web) is too high. For example, the smart valve actuator may reverse the motor at higher wind speeds to stop water features from dumping water out of the pool. The smart valve actuator may also block a water feature if flooding is sensed by float or conductivity sensing. In one embodiment, the smart valve actuator may include a dual input power capability that can accept either AC power inputs or DC power input to power the motor. Further, in some embodiments, the smart valve actuator can include a handle, or the like, to provide for manual operation of the smart valve actuator, if necessary, during loss of power (e.g., power cable being cut) or loss of communication (e.g., communications cable being cut, electronics failure, etc.) to the smart valve actuator. 
     Among the improvements made possible through the use of the smart valve actuator as described herein are increased efficiency in the pool system. For example, in one embodiment, the smart valve actuator may monitor energy saving interactions with a pump to support a minimum required speed to achieve requested flows in all of the active water features. This approach may enable all water to go through the water features and none through the return jets because of 100% efficiency. Similarly, the smart valve actuator may request a higher RPM if the desired flow cannot be achieved (a pump runs only at filtration speed, but if a water feature is turned on, the smart valve actuator controller can request increased speed if the flow setpoint cannot be achieved). The smart valve actuator position may also be adjusted to see if a desired flow rate can be achieved at the filtration flow rate. Calculations may be performed to determine the most efficient pump speed to achieve the desired results by algorithm or by communication from the pump of the power draw. The use of the smart valve actuator may facilitate measuring and reporting excess flow by comparing the controlled quantity to the valve position and computing the margin available; i.e. determining if the pump speed is higher than needed to achieve the requested water feature flow. The computation may indicate what reduction in pump speed may be implemented. 
     Embodiments may perform flow sensing and pressure sensing. For example, flow may be measured with a paddle wheel or a turbine and interpreted by a co-located processor or remotely located processor. Flow may also be measured with ultrasonic doppler methods, thermal mass/dispersion methods, magnetic/induction methods, optical methods, etc. Pressure sensing may be performed with a flow sensor mounted on a pipe, or a tube run from the pipe to a sensor mounted on the circuit board. Methods for pressure sensing include strain gage piezoresistive methods, capacitive methods, magnetic diaphragm displacement methods, optical methods, resonant frequency methods, etc. The smart valve actuator may also utilize a temperature sensor. For example, temperature sensing can determine ambient temperature, remote solar panel temperature, or water temperature at the input or output ports. 
     In some embodiments, the smart valve actuator may include protection features for the pool system. The protection features may include stored limits of damaging valve positions and undesired valve positions along with software to automatically restore permitted valve positions after manual actuation of the valve or understand its position upon power-up to assure that the valve is in the correct position. Additionally, the smart valve actuator may facilitate motor current monitoring and input voltage monitoring to initiate scale-back or shutdown to protect life and prevent internal damage to pool system components. 
     In one embodiment, the pool system may have a ‘legacy’ mode that can accept travel limit settings via pushbutton or power interrupt signaling from the controller. This legacy mode can be implemented by disconnecting the motor from the drive shaft and signaling the software by timed direction reversals, wireless communication, or a physical or magnetic pushbutton. In some embodiments, software can learn the relationship between valve angle and measured parameters and predict if a requested setting is possible based on a simulation of what valve angle will be needed to achieve the desired effect. In one embodiment the software may contain methods to prevent ‘hunting’ or needless motor activation for minor fluctuations of the measured parameters. Further, the motor drive software may generate stepper motor signals to drive the motor faster or slower than current products based on synchronous motors. 
       FIG.  20    is a diagram  1200  illustrating chemistry automation control logic  82 . Chemistry automation control logic  82  could incorporate and/or be in communication with a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, chemistry automation control logic  82  can communicate with, or receive, user input data  1202 , chemistry automation operational data  1204 , chemistry automation factory specifications  1206 , chemistry automation configuration parameters  1208 , web data  1210 , pool configuration parameters  1212 , data from related devices  124 , health monitoring data  1216 , and/or external sensor data  1218 . 
     User input data  1202  could include timers, schedules (e.g., on/off, what speed, operation duration, etc.), chlorination levels, alternative sanitizers (e.g., liquid, chlorine, tablets, etc.), etc. Chemistry automation operational data  1204  could include water chemistry, water temperature, air temperature, water detection, water flow (rate), water flow (yes/no), water pressure, air cavitation, salt concentration, chemistry dispense rate, power consumption, current draw, water conductivity, salinity, applied voltage, water hardness, etc. Chemistry automation factory specifications  1206  could include power consumption, current draw, input voltage, etc. Chemistry automation configuration parameters  1208  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zip code, time and date, etc. Web data  1210  could include location (based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, regional and local weather forecast data, temperature, ambient light, solar radiation, humidity, season, elevation, dew point, etc. In one example the chemistry automation logic  82  could shift operation based on weather input. Pool configuration parameters  1212  could include pool surface area, pool geometry, pool liner color, pool cover (yes/no), volume, etc. Data from related devices  1214  could include data relating to at least the following: pump(s), heater(s) (gas/heat pump), heat (solar), pool covers, controller(s), spa(s), water feature(s), secondary pump(s), valves/actuators/bypasses, alternative sanitizers (agent, fill level, weight, feed rate, etc.), etc. In one example, the chemistry automation control logic  82  could receive input from an external device to identify an operating profile. Health monitoring data  1216  could include power consumption, current monitoring, line-to-line balance, grounding, bonding, leak current, runtime, operating temperatures, number of power cycles, efficiency, pressure drop of scaling cell (chlorinator), presence of gas pockets (chlorinator), ultraviolet output (UV sanitizer), ozone suction (UV sanitizer), lamp temperature (UV sanitizer), time to clean (chemistry dispenser), age of dispense medium (chemistry dispenser), born on date (chemistry dispenser), etc. External sensor data  1218 , could include water temperature, water flow rate, air temperature, suction/vacuum pressure, water chemistry, turnover rate of pool, ambient light, pool cover detection, motion sensors, bather detection, salt concentration, pH, water hardness, cyanuric acid levels, turbidity, ozone concentrations, algae, microbial populations, phosphate levels, nitrate levels, water level, bather load, etc. It is noted that, the chemistry automation control logic  82  could sample the water from various locations, including ports, as well as offline sensing equipment. It is further noted that the external sensor data  1218  (as well as external sensor data received by any and/or all of the control logic systems  72 - 83 ) can be received from sensors in a plurality of locations, including but not limited to, the pool pad, in the pool itself, or remote from the pool. Additionally, the chemistry automation control logic  82  can receive learned information and a pool cover schedule. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a particular pool chemistry sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the pool chemistry (e.g., by manually testing the pool chemistry by conventional means that are well known to the art) and then entering the pool chemistry information into the system via a user interface. 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 I  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the chemistry automation control logic  82 .  FIG.  21 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1300 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives an instruction to activate the chemistry automation system. In step  1302 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data from the chemistry automation system water detection sensor. The chemistry automation system water detection sensor can be, for example, a flow switch, flow meter, current flow (“gas sensor”), etc. In step  1304 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if water is detected. If a positive determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1306  where it transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1308  where it determines if there are any retries remaining. For example, in step  1308  the chemistry automation control logic  82  could determines if there are any retries remaining for a timer (e.g., 1 hour, 6 hours, 24 hours, or any other suitable time interval), or if there has been no flow detected over the same period of time. If a positive determination is made, e.g., the twenty-four hour timer has not expired, then the process returns to step  1302  and continues from there. If a negative determination is made, e.g., the twenty-four hour timer has expired indicating that there has been no flow over a twenty-four hour period, then the process proceeds to step  1310  where an error condition is transmitted, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  21 B  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1312 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives an instruction to activate the chemistry automation system. In step  1314 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves data on factory specified power parameters from memory (e.g., power consumption, current draw, and line voltage). In step  1316 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives line power operational data. In step  1318 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the line power is within factory specifications. If a positive determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1320  where it transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1322  where it determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  1316  and continues from there. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1324  where an error condition is transmitted, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  21 C  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1326 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves user-specified chlorination levels from memory. In step  1328 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory, e.g., pool surface area, volume, geometry, etc. In step  1330 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data from the chemistry automation system, e.g., chlorination rate. In step  1332 , chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the length of chlorination time to reach the user-specified level. In step  1334 , chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to run for the determined length of time, and then returns to step  1330 . 
       FIG.  21 D  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1336 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves user-specified chlorination levels from memory. In step  1338 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives pump operational data, e.g., turnover rate. In step  1340 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives water chemistry operational data from external sensors. In step  1342 , chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits pump and water chemistry operational data to memory. In step  1344 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the chlorine level is below the user-specified level. If a negative determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  returns to step  1338  and continues from there. If a positive determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1346  where it determines the length of chlorination time required to reach the user-specified chlorine level. In step  1348 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits the determined chlorination time to memory. In step  1350 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to run for the determined length of time, and then returns to step  1338 . 
       FIG.  21 E  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1352 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data from ambient light sensors. In step  1354 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the amount of direct sunlight to a body of water. In step  1356 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory, e.g., pool surface area, volume, geometry, etc. In step  1358 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the rate of chlorine reduction due to direct sunlight. In step  1360 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to increase dispensing rate of chlorine by rate of chlorine reduction due to direct sunlight, and then returns to step  1352 . 
       FIG.  21 F  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1362 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives an instruction to activate the chemistry automation system. In step  1364 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data from the pool cover. In step  1366 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the pool cover is closed. If a negative determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  returns to step  1364  and continues from there. If a positive determination is made, then the chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds to step  1368  where it retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory, e.g., pool surface area, volume, geometry, etc. In step  1370 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the decreased rate of chlorine reduction due to lack of direct sunlight. In step  1372 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to decrease the dispensing rate of chlorine by the decreased rate of chlorine reduction due to lack of direct sunlight, and then returns to step  1364 . 
       FIG.  21 G  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1374 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives an instruction to activate the chemistry automation system. In step  1376 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data from the motion sensors. In step  1378 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the number of bathers in the pool. In step  1380 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory, e.g., pool surface area, volume, geometry, etc. In step  1382 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines an increased chlorine demand based on the number of bathers. In step  1384 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to increase the dispensing rate of chlorine by the increased chlorine demand based on the number of bathers, and then returns to step  1376 . 
       FIG.  21 H  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  determining alert conditions of a chemistry automation system. The chemistry automation control logic  82  proceeds with four parallel routine sequences that respectively begin with steps  1386 ,  1396 ,  1406 ,  1416 . Each routine sequence is discussed sequentially, though it should be understood that the routine loops could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. The first sequence begins in step  1386  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves factory specified life expectancy data from memory. In step  1388 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines an alert threshold, e.g., less than 90% of chemistry automation life expectancy remaining or runtime value. In step  1390 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data on chemistry automation runtime. In step  1392 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the chemistry automation runtime is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1390  and continues to receive operational data on chemistry automation runtime. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1394  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The second sequence begins in step  1396  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves factory specified operating temperature data from memory. In step  1398 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines an alert threshold, e.g., a temperature value that is 10% above or below operating temperature. In step  1400 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data on chemistry automation system operating temperature. In step  1402 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the chemistry automation system operating temperature exceeds the threshold, or is outside of a threshold range. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1400  and continues to receive operational data on chemistry automation system operating temperature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1404  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  reduces the output of the chemistry automation system. 
     The third sequence begins in step  1406  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves factory specified power consumption data from memory. In step  1408 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines an alert threshold, e.g., power value that is 110% of specified power consumption. In step  1410 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives operational data on chemistry automation system power consumption. In step  1412 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the chemistry automation system power consumption is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1410  and continues to receive operational data on chemistry automation system power consumption. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1414  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  reduces the output of the chemistry automation system. 
     The fourth sequence begins in step  1416  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves factory warranty data from memory, e.g., a warranty expiration date. In step  1418 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines an alert threshold, e.g., days left on factory warranty. In step  1420 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  receives current date information. In step  1422 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the current date is beyond the threshold date or the number of days remaining is below the threshold date. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1420  and continues to receive current date information. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1424  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  21 I  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the chemistry automation control logic  82  communicating with a chemistry automation system. In step  1426 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves factory specified servicing data from memory, e.g., service intervals. In step  1428 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  retrieves date of previous service from memory. In step  1430 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the time to the next service and then proceeds to steps  1432  and  1438 . In step  1438 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an instruction to the human-machine interface device to display the time to the next service. In step  1432 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines the alert threshold, e.g., 30 days to next service. In step  1434 , the chemistry automation control logic  82  determines if the time to the next service is less than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1428  and continues to receive the date of pervious service from memory. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1436  where the chemistry automation control logic  82  transmits an alert to the user. 
       FIG.  22    is a diagram  1500  illustrating heater control logic  80 . Heater control logic  80  could incorporate and/or be in communication with a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, heater control logic  80  can communicate with, or receive, user input data  1502 , heater operational data  1504 , heater factory specifications  1506 , heater configuration parameters  1508 , web data  1510 , pool configuration parameters  1512 , data from related devices  1514 , health monitoring data  1516 , and/or external sensor data  1518 . 
     User input data  1502  could include heating and/or cooling temperature set points, heating or cooling mode, pool/spa mode, heater x or cooler x, where “x” is an index referring to one or more heating and/or cooling devices, countdown to heat, etc. Heater operational data  1504  could include line voltage, power consumption, gas pressure, air pressure or vacuum, air temperature, humidity, other environmental conditions, flow rate, water level, state (e.g., on/off), temperature setpoint, duration setpoint, operating noise, etc. Heater factory specifications  1506  could include gas heater input rating, gas heater thermal efficiency, heat pump output &amp; COP (coefficient of performance) at T1 (reference test temperature 1), RH1 (reference test relative humidity 1), heat pump output &amp; COP at T1, RH2 (reference test relative humidity 2), heat pump output &amp; COP at T2 (reference test temperature 2), RH1, heat pump output &amp; COP at T2, RH2, power consumption, current draw, input voltage, etc. Heater configuration parameters  1508  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zip code, etc. Web data  1510  could include regional solar irradiance data, regional weather forecast data, regional fuel cost data, direct solar irradiance—modeled clear-sky, diffuse solar irradiance—modeled clear-sky, air temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, cloud cover, cost of natural gas, cost of propane gas, cost of electricity, etc. Pool configuration parameters  1512  could include pool surface area, pool volume, emissivity of pool, absorptivity of pool, pool solar exposure, fraction of weather station wind speed at pool surface, desired water temperature, pump schedule, type of pool cover (solar transmittance, thermal conductivity, emissivity, absorptivity), pool cover use schedule, etc. Data from related devices  1514  could include data relating to at least the following: pump(s), secondary pump(s), filter bypass, water feature(s), chemical dispensers, valves/actuators/bypass, pool cover(s), controller(s), spa(s), etc. The following relationships could exist between the heater control logic  80  the related devices: water features (used to assist loss of heat/coolers), chemical dispensers (logic  80  could open bypass to prevent off balance chemistry from entering the heater), secondary pump (affects overall system flow), tablet/liquid chlorine feeder (if present in system should not be used on the same loop as the heater), and external sensors (could have shared flow switch and water temperature sensors). Health monitoring data  1516  could include runtime, operating temperatures/profile, power consumption, predictive failure, number of cycles, degradation of efficiency, pool chemistry, fuel gas pressure, refrigerant pressures, refrigerant temperatures, exhaust temperature, carbon monoxide, freeze and condensation warnings, motor speed (RPM), other operating conditions, settings, troubleshooting data, etc. External sensor data  1518 , could include air temperature, humidity, ambient noise, pool chemistry, fuel gas pressure, exhaust temperature, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, oxygen, vibration, bather detection, etc. Additionally, the heater control logic  80  can receive information pertaining to time limits on setting block heater schedules, maximum allowable temperatures, password protection, scheduled heating, and setback schedules. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a temperature sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the temperature (e.g., by checking a thermometer, a thermocouple, a weather forecast, the internet, etc.) and then entering the temperature into the system via a user interface. 
       FIGS.  23 A- 23 J  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the heater control logic  80 .  FIG.  23 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1520 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1522 , the heater logic  80  retrieves data pertaining to factory specified power parameters from memory, e.g., parameters relating to power consumption, current draw, and line voltage. In step  1524 , the heater logic  80  receives line power operational data. In step  1526 , the heater logic  80  determines whether the line power operational data is within factory specifications. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1528 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1530 . In step  1528 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1526 , then the process proceeds to step  1530 . In step  1530 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1524  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1532  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  23 B  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1534 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1536 , the heater logic  80  retrieves minimum fuel setpoint data for heater operation from memory, e.g., minimum gas pressure. In step  1538 , the heater logic  80  receives operational data on fuel, e.g., current gas pressure. In step  1540 , the heater logic  80  determines whether the gas pressure is above a minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1542 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1541 . In step  1542 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1540 , then the process proceeds to step  1541 . In step  1541 , the heater control logic  80  logs the error timestamp. In step  1543 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the number of error logs for the week exceeds the allowable amount. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1545 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1544 . In step  1545 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an alert to the user, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1543 , then the process proceeds to step  1544  where the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1538  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1546  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  23 C  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1548 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1550 , the heater logic  80  retrieves blower setpoint data for heater operation from memory, e.g., minimum air pressure. In step  1552 , the heater logic  80  receives blower operational data, e.g., air pressure. In step  1554 , the heater logic  80  determines whether the air pressure is above the minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1556 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1558 . In step  1556 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1554 , then the process proceeds to step  1558 . In step  1558 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1560  and transmits an instruction to the blower to increase the air pressure by 5%, and proceeds to step  1552  and continues the process from that step. It is noted that while the blower could increase air pressure in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1562  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  23 D  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1564 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1566 , the heater logic  80  retrieves water temperature setpoint data for heater operation from memory, e.g., minimum and maximum water temperatures. In step  1568 , the heater logic  80  receives operational temperature data, e.g., water temperature read by a sensor. In step  1570 , the heater logic  80  determines whether the water temperature is below the minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1572 . If a negative determination is made, the process returns to step  1568 . In step  1572 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate. In step  1574 , the heater control logic  80  receives operational temperature data. In step  1576 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the water temperature is above a maximum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1578  and transmits an instruction to the heater to switch to standby mode, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  returns to step  1574 . 
       FIG.  23 E  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1582 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1584 , the heater logic  80  retrieves minimum flow rate setpoint data for heater operation from memory, e.g., gallons per minute. In step  1586 , the heater logic  80  receives operational flow rate data. In step  1588 , the heater logic  80  determines whether the flow rate is above the minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1590 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1592 . In step  1590 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1588 , then the process proceeds to step  1592 . In step  1592 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1594  and transmits an instruction to the pump to increase the flow by 5%, and proceeds to step  1586  and continues the process from that step. It is noted that while the pump could increase flow in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1596  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  23 F  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1598 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction to activate the heater. In step  1600 , the heater logic  80  retrieves runtime setpoint data for heater operation from memory, e.g., duration of operation. In step  1602 , the heater logic  80  transmits an instruction to the heater to activate. In step  1604 , the heater logic  80  sets a countdown timer for a predefined number (“x”) of seconds, where “x” is the desired runtime of the heater, and activates the timer. In step  1606 , the heater logic  80  determines if the timer has reached “0.” If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1608 . If a negative determination is made, the process returns to step  1604 . In step  1608 , the heater control logic  80  transmits an instruction to deactivate the heater, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  23 G  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1610 , the heater control logic  80  retrieves maximum ambient noise setpoint data for heater operation from memory. In step  1612 , the heater logic  80  receives ambient noise operational data. In step  1614 , determines if the ambient noise is above the maximum allowed value. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1616 . If a negative determination is made, the process returns to step  1612 . In step  1616 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1618  and transmits an instruction to the heater to decrease the output by 5%, and proceeds to step  1612  and continues the process from that step. It is noted that while the heater could decrease output in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1620  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  23 H  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  communicating with a heater. In step  1622 , the heater logic  80  receives operational data from ambient noise sensors. In step  1624 , the heater logic  80  transmits operational data from ambient noise sensors to memory. In step  1626 , the heater logic  80  determines the average ambient noise setpoint based on operational data from the sensors. In step  1628 , the heater logic  80  receives operational data from heater noise sensors. In step  1630 , the heater logic  80  determines if the decibel level is above the average ambient setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1632 . If a negative determination is made, the process returns to step  1628 . In step  1632 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1634  and transmits an instruction to the heater to decrease performance by 5%, and proceeds to step  1628  and continues the process from that step. It is noted that while the heater could decrease performance in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made, then the heater control logic  80  proceeds to step  1636  and transmits an error condition signal, and then ends the process. 
     It is noted that the processing logic of the heater control logic  80  shown in  FIGS.  23 G and  23 H  could be combined into a process that determines the average ambient noise level over a given period of time and then saves the average ambient noise level to the memory for later retrieval as the maximum ambient noise setpoint data for heater operation, illustrated in step  1610  of  FIG.  23 G . The process could then proceed according to the steps as illustrated in  FIG.  23 G  as described above. 
       FIG.  23 I  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the heater control logic  80  determining alert conditions of a heater. The heater control logic  80  proceeds with four parallel routine sequences that respectively begin with steps  1638 ,  1648 ,  1658 , and  1668 . Each routine sequence is discussed sequentially, though it should be understood that the routine loops could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. The first sequence begins in step  1638  where the heater control logic  80  retrieves factory specified life expectancy data from memory. In step  1640 , the heater control logic  80  determines an alert threshold, e.g., less than 90% of heater life expectancy remaining or runtime value. In step  1642 , the heater control logic  80  receives operational data on heater runtime. In step  1642 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the heater runtime is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1642  and continues to receive operational data on heater runtime. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1646  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The second sequence begins in step  1648  where the heater control logic  80  retrieves factory specified operating temperature data from memory. In step  1650 , the heater control logic  80  determines an alert threshold, e.g., a temperature value that is 10% above or below operating temperature. In step  1652 , the heater control logic  80  receives operational data on heater system operating temperature. In step  1654 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the heater system operating temperature exceeds the threshold, or is outside of a threshold range. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1652  and continues to receive operational data on heater system operating temperature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1656  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The third sequence begins in step  1658  where the heater control logic  80  retrieves factory specified power consumption data from memory. In step  1660 , the heater control logic  80  determines an alert threshold, e.g., power value that is 110% of specified power consumption. In step  1662 , the heater control logic  80  receives operational data on heater system power consumption. In step  1664 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the heater system power consumption is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1662  and continues to receive operational data on heater system power consumption. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1666  where an alert is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The fourth sequence begins in step  1668  where the heater control logic  80  retrieves maximum carbon monoxide output setpoint from memory, e.g., the maximum permitted carbon monoxide output for the heater. In step  1670 , the heater control logic  80  determines an alert threshold, e.g.,  905  of maximum carbon monoxide output. In step  1672 , the heater control logic  80  receives operational data on heater system carbon monoxide output. In step  1674 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the heater system carbon monoxide output is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1672  and continues to receive operational data on heater system carbon monoxide output. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1676  where it transmits an instruction to the heater to deactivate. The process then proceeds to step  1678  and transmits an alert to a user, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  23 J  is a flowchart illustrating the procedure implemented when heat is being requested by a user. In step  1680 , the heater control logic  80  receives an instruction that heat is called for. In step  1682 , the heater control logic  80  proceeds to check if the heater has power. In step  1684 , the heater control logic determines if the heater has power. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1714 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1686 . In step  1714 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made then the process returns to step  1682 , but if a negative determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1716  where the heater control logic  80  indicates an error condition and the process ends. As referenced above, if a positive determination is made in step  1684 , then the process proceeds to step  1686 . In step  1686 , the heater control logic  80  checks the gas pressure. In step  1688 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the pressure is within the specified range. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1690 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1718 . In step  1718 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made then the process returns to step  1686 . If a negative determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1720  where the heater control logic  80  indicates an error condition and the process ends. As referenced above if a positive determination is made in step  1688 , then the process proceeds to step  1690 . In step  1690 , the heater control logic  80  checks the blower operation. In step  1692 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the air pressure is within the specified range. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1694 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1722 . In step  1722 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made then the process returns to step  1690 . If a negative determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1724  where the heater control logic  80  indicates an error condition and the process ends. As referenced above if a positive determination is made in step  1692 , then the process proceeds to step  1694 . In step  1694 , the heater control logic  80  checks the water flow. In step  1696 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the flow rate (GPM) is within the specified range. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1698 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1726 . In step  1726 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1728  where it sends an electronic signal to the pump to increase or decrease the flow by 5%, and then returns to step  1694 . It is noted that while the pump could increase or decrease flow in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made in step  1726  then the process proceeds to step  1730  where the heater control logic  80  indicates an error condition and the process ends. As referenced above if a positive determination is made in step  1696 , then the process proceeds to step  1698 . In step  1698 , the heater control logic  80  queries for an operation temperature setpoint. In step  1700 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the operation temperature setpoint has been received. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1702 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1732 . In step  1732 , the heater control logic  80  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1734  where it prompts the heater for a desired water temperature, and then returns to step  1698 . If a negative determination is made in step  1732  then the process proceeds to step  1736  where the heater control logic  80  indicates an error condition and the process ends. As referenced above if a positive determination is made in step  1700 , then the process proceeds to step  1702 . In step  1702 , the heater control logic  80  electronically receives data relating to the water temperature. In step  1704 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the operation temperature setpoint is greater than the water temperature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1706 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1740 . In step  1740 , the heater control logic  80  places the heater in standby and returns to step  1702 . As referenced above if a positive determination is made in step  1704 , then the process proceeds to step  1706 . In step  1706 , the heater control logic  80  engages the heater. In step  1708 , the heater control logic  80  starts a timer. In step  1710 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the temperature setpoint is lower than the water temperature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1712  where it deactivates the heater and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1742 . In step  1742 , the heater control logic  80  determines if the operation duration has exceeded the threshold. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1712  where it deactivates the heater and the process ends. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  1706 . 
       FIG.  24    is a diagram  1800  illustrating lighting control logic  78 . Lighting control logic  78  could incorporate and/or be in communication with a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, lighting control logic  78  can communicate with, or receive, user input data  1802 , lighting operational data  1804 , lighting factory specifications  1806 , lighting configuration parameters  1808 , web data  1810 , pool configuration parameters  1812 , data from related devices  1814 , health monitoring data  1816  and/or external sensor data  1818 . 
     User input data  1802  could include lighting color, lighting intensity, lighting duration, timers, schedule, default program(s), pool temperature setpoint(s), etc. Lighting operational data  1804  could include status (on/off), cycles (on/off), line voltage, current draw, power consumption, environment (water/air), temperature (lights), ambient light, light color, light intensity, etc. Lighting factory specifications  1806  could include lumen output, life expectancy, current draw, input voltage, power consumption, operating environment, etc. Lighting configuration parameters  1808  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zip code, time and date, etc. Web data  1810  could include location (based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, local lighting code, regional and local weather forecast data, etc. Pool configuration parameters  1812  could include pool surface area, pool geometry, pool liner color, pool cover (yes/no), pool cover schedule, etc. Data from related devices  1814  could include data relating to at least the following: additional lights/systems, chlorinator(s), pump(s), cleaner(s), water feature(s), heater (gas), heater (solar), chemical dispenser, valve(s), pool cover (various), controller, spa, water slide, etc. For example, the following relationships could exist between the lighting control logic  78  the related devices: valves (activate water features, solenoid, dancing waters, etc.), and water slide (shows path, auto-on). Health monitoring data  1816  could include errors, runtime, estimated lumen output, average power consumption, line voltage, line current, percent of light output, operating environment, warranty countdown, water pressure, etc. External sensor data  1818 , could include ambient light, lighting output, motion/occupancy, bather detection, temperature (pool), moisture, chlorine content, pH level, etc. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a pool temperature sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the pool temperature (e.g., by checking a thermometer, thermocouple, etc.) and then entering the pool temperature into the system via a user interface.  FIGS.  25 A- 25 AB  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the lighting control logic  78 .  FIG.  25 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1820 , the lighting control logic  78  receives an instruction to activate the lighting system. In step  1822 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves data pertaining to factory specified power parameters from memory, e.g., parameters relating to power consumption, current draw, and line voltage. In step  1824 , the lighting control logic  78  receives line power operational data. In step  1826 , the lighting logic  78  determines whether the line power operational data is within factory specifications. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1828 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1830 . In step  1828 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1826 , then the process proceeds to step  1830 . In step  1830 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1824  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1832  and transmits an error condition signal, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 B  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1832 , the lighting control logic  78  receives an instruction to activate the lighting system. In step  1834 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory specified operating environment data from memory, e.g., is the light in air or water. In step  1836 , the lighting control logic  78  receives data from lighting fixture moisture sensor. In step  1838 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the environment of the lighting fixture, e.g., is the fixture in air or water. In step  1840 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting fixture is in the environment specified by the factory specified operating environment. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1842 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1844 . In step  1842 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate, and the process ends. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made at step  1840 , then the process proceeds to step  1844 . In step  1844 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1836  and continues the process from that step. If a negative determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1846  and transmits an error condition signal, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 C  is a flowchart illustrating a process for a user to define a light show. In step  1848 , the lighting control logic  78  prompts the user for a desired lighting color. In step  1850 , the lighting control logic  78  receives the desired lighting color data from the user. In step  1852 , the lighting control logic  78  prompts the user for a desired lighting speed. In step  1854 , the lighting control logic  78  receives the desired lighting speed data from the user. In step  1856 , the lighting control logic  78  prompts the user for a desired lighting motion profile. In step  1858 , the lighting control logic  78  receives desired lighting motion profile data from the user. In step  1860 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves pool geometry data from memory. In step  1862 , the lighting control logic  78  processes the data received from the user and the pool geometry data. In step  1864 , the lighting control logic  78  generates a virtual preview of a light show from the user data and pool geometry data. In step  1866 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits the virtual preview of the light show to the user. In step  1868 , the lighting control logic  78  prompts the user to save virtual preview parameters to the memory. In step  1870 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has saved the parameters. If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  1872  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits the parameters to memory as a stored light show, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1874  where the lighting control logic  78  prompts the user to enter new parameters, and then proceeds to step  1876 . In step  1876 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has elected to enter new parameters. If a positive determination is made then the process returns to step  1848 . If a negative determination is made then the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 D  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1878 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the geographic location of the pool, e.g., based on IP address or configuration parameters. In step  1880 , the lighting control logic  78  receives sunrise/sunset data from the web based on the geographic location. In step  1882 , the lighting control logic  78  receives current time data. In step  1886 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is after sunset. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1888 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1884  where the lighting control logic  78  delays operation for a predetermined period of time, and after the expiration of the predetermined period of time returns to step  1882 . As referenced above, if a positive determination is made at step  1886 , then the process proceeds to step  1888 . In step  1888 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is before sunrise. If a positive determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1890  where it transmits an instruction to activate the lighting system, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1892  where it delays operation for a predetermined period of time, and after the expiration of the predetermined period of time returns to step  1882 . 
       FIG.  25 E  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1894 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the geographic location of the pool, e.g., based on IP address or configuration parameters. In step  1896 , the lighting control logic  78  receives sunrise/sunset data from the web based on the geographic location. In step  1898 , the lighting control logic  78  receives current time data. In step  1900 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is after sunset. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1902 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  1910  where the lighting control logic  78  delays operation for a predetermined period of time, and after the expiration of the predetermined period of time returns to step  1898 . As referenced above, if a positive determination is made at step  1900 , then the process proceeds to step  1902 . In step  1902 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is before sunrise. If a positive determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1904 . If a negative determination is made, then the lighting control logic  78  proceeds to step  1892  where it delays operation for a predetermined period of time, and after the expiration of the predetermined period of time returns to step  1898 . As referenced above, if a positive determination is made at step  1902 , then the process proceeds to step  1904 . In step  1904 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a pool cleaner. In step  1906 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the pool cleaner is running. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1898 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1908  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to activate the lighting system. 
       FIG.  25 F  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1914 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a water feature. In step  1916 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the operational status of the water feature. In step  1918 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the water feature is running. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1914 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1920  where the lighting control logic  78  interlocks with the water feature. In step  1922 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate. 
       FIG.  25 G  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1924 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a pool cover. In step  1926 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the operational status of the pool cover, e.g., is the pool cover open or closed. In step  1928 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the pool cover is open. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  1924 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1930  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to deactivate, and then returns to step  1924 . 
       FIG.  25 H  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1932 , the lighting control logic  78  receives an instruction to activate the lighting system. In step  1934 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a pool cover. In step  1936 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the operational state of the pool cover, e.g., is the pool cover open or closed. In step  1938 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the pool cover is open. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1940  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate and then returns to step  1934 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1942  where the lighting control logic  78  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  1934 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1944  where an error condition is transmitted, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 I  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1946 , the lighting control logic  78  receives an instruction to activate the lighting system. In step  1948 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a pool cover. In step  1950 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the operational state of the pool cover, e.g., is the pool cover open or closed. In step  1952 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the pool cover is open. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1960  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1954  where the lighting control logic  78  prompts a user to open the pool cover. In step  1956 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has issued an instruction to open the pool cover. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1948 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1958  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the pool cover to open, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 J  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  1962 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a minimum ambient light setpoint value. In step  1964 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a maximum ambient light setpoint value. In step  1966 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a current ambient light value from an external sensor. In step  1968 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current ambient light value is below the minimum ambient light setpoint. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1966 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1970  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate the lights. In step  1972 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a current ambient light value from an external sensor. In step  1974 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current ambient light value is below a minimum ambient light setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1980  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to increase the lumen output by 5% and then returns to step  1972 . It is noted that while the lighting system could increase lumen output in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1976 . In step  1976 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current ambient light value is above the maximum ambient light setpoint. If a negative determination is made (e.g., the ambient light is in the acceptable range—above the minimum setpoint and below the maximum setpoint), then the process proceeds to step  1978  where it delays for a predetermined time period and then returns to step  1972 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1984  where the lighting control logic  78  determines if there are any retries remaining. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1986  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to deactivate the lights and then returns to step  1966 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1982  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to decrease lumen output by 5% and then returns to step  1972 . It is noted that while the lighting system could increase lumen output in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). 
       FIG.  23 K  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  determining an error condition and preventative maintenance reminders for a lighting system. The lighting control logic  78  proceeds with six parallel routine sequences that respectively begin with steps  1988 ,  1994 ,  2004 ,  2014 ,  2024 ,  2034 . Each routine sequence is discussed sequentially, though it should be understood that the routine loops could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. The first sequence begins in step  1988  where the lighting control logic  78  monitors for an error condition. In step  1990 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there is an error condition. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1988 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1992  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an error condition. In step  1993 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has snoozed the error condition. If a negative determination is made, then the process ends. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  1995  where it delays for a predetermined period of time and then returns to step  1992 . 
     The second sequence begins at step  1994 , where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory specified life expectancy data from memory. In step  1996 , the lighting control logic  78  determines a preventative maintenance threshold, e.g., less than 90% of light life expectancy remaining or runtime value. In step  1998 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data on lighting system runtime. In step  2000 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system runtime is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  1998  and continues to receive operational data on lighting system runtime. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2002  where a preventative maintenance reminder is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The third sequence begins in step  2004  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory specified lumen output data from memory. In step  2006 , the lighting control logic  78  determines a maintenance threshold, e.g., a lumen output value that is 90% of a specified lumen output. In step  2008 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data on lighting system lumen output. In step  2010 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system operating lumen output is less than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2008  and continues to receive operational lumen output data for the lighting system. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2012  where a preventative maintenance reminder is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The fourth sequence begins in step  2014  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory specified power consumption data from memory. In step  2016 , the lighting control logic  78  determines a maintenance threshold, e.g., power value that is 110% of specified power consumption. In step  2018 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data on lighting system power consumption. In step  2020 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system power consumption is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2018  and continues to receive operational data on lighting system power consumption. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2022  where a preventative maintenance reminder is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The fifth sequence begins in step  2024  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory specified input voltage data from memory. In step  2026 , the lighting control logic  78  determines a maintenance threshold, e.g., an input voltage value that is +/−10% of specified line voltage. In step  2028 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data on lighting system line voltage. In step  2030 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system line voltage is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2028  and continues to receive operational data on lighting system line voltage. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2032  where a preventative maintenance reminder is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
     The sixth sequence begins in step  2034  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves factory warranty data from memory. In step  2036 , the lighting control logic  78  determines a maintenance threshold, e.g., 90% of the time period of the factory warranty has expired. In step  2038 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data on lighting system runtime. In step  2040 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system runtime is greater than the threshold. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2038  and continues to receive operational data on lighting system runtime. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2042  where a preventative maintenance reminder is transmitted to a user, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 L  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2044 , the lighting control logic  78  receives lighting system temperature operational data. In step  2046 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system needs to scale back lumen output due to temperature. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2044 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2048  where the lighting control logic  78  receives pool temperature operational data. In step  2050 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the required reduction in pool temperature to return the lighting system to full lumen output. In step  2052 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the heater to reduce the temperature by the required amount, and then returns to step  2044 . 
       FIG.  25 M  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2054 , the lighting control logic  78  receives lighting system temperature operational data. In step  2056 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system needs to scale back lumen output due to temperature. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2054 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2058  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the heater instructing it to decrease output by 5%, and then returns to step  2054 . It is noted that while the heater could decrease output in 5% increments it is contemplated that any satisfactory incremental value could be chosen for optimization of the system (e.g., 1%, 2%, 5%, 10%, etc.). 
       FIG.  25 N  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2060 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves pool temperature setpoint data from memory. In step  2062 , the lighting control logic  78  receives pool temperature operational data. In step  2064 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the range between temperature setpoint and temperature operational data. In step  2066 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves RGB color table from memory. In step  2068 , the lighting control logic  78  generates a lookup table including desired RGB color spectrum and associated temperature range (e.g., from blue at measured temperature to white at setpoint). In step  2070 , the lighting control logic  78  receives pool temperature operational data. In step  2072 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the RGB color associated with temperature operational data. In step  2074 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the RGB color associated with the pool temperature, and then returns to step  2070 . 
       FIG.  25 O  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2076 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves chlorine level setpoint data from memory. In step  2078 , the lighting control logic  78  receives chlorine level operational data. In step  2080 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the range between chlorine level setpoint and chlorine level operational data. In step  2082 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves RGB color table from memory. In step  2084 , the lighting control logic  78  generates a lookup table including desired RGB color spectrum and associated chlorine level range (e.g., from green at measured temperature to purple at setpoint). In step  2086 , the lighting control logic  78  receives chlorine level operational data. In step  2088 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the RGB color associated with chlorine level operational data. In step  2090 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the RGB color associated with the chlorine level. In step  2092 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the chlorine level operational data is equal to the chlorine level setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2094  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits a message stating that the pool chemistry is “OK,” and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2096  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits a message stating that chlorine should be added to the pool. The process then proceeds to step  2098  where it delays for a predetermined period of time before returning to step  2086 . 
       FIG.  25 P  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2100 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves chlorine level setpoint data from memory. In step  2102 , the lighting control logic  78  receives chlorine level operational data. In step  2104 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the chlorine level operational data is equal to the chlorine level setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  2102 . If a negative determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2106  where it retrieves a lighting program associated with a chlorine imbalance from memory, e.g., activate yellow or flashing yellow light to alert a user to a chlorine imbalance. In step  2108 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the program associated with a chlorine imbalance, and then returns to step  2102 . 
       FIG.  25 Q  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2110 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors for user-selected light shows and colors. In step  2112 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has selected a light show or colors. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2110 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2114  where the lighting control logic  78  receives parameters of the user-selected light show or color. In step  2116 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a timestamp for the user-selected light show or colors. In step  2118 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits the parameters and timestamp to memory. In step  2120 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the most commonly selected light show or colors. In step  2122 , the lighting control logic  78  saves the most commonly selected light show or colors to memory as a default lighting program, and then returns to step  2110 . 
       FIG.  25 R  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. This process includes two parallel branches for defining a lighting program for pool features and displaying a lighting program for a specific pool features. The process begins at steps  2124  and  2144 . In step  2124 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors for user-selected light shows and colors. In step  2126 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the user has selected a light show or colors. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2124 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2128  where the lighting control logic  78  determines if additional pool features are currently active, e.g., pool/spa spillover features. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2142  where the lighting control logic  78  displays the user-selected light show or colors, and the process ends. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2130  where it receives operational data of the currently active pool features. In step  2132 , the lighting control logic  78  receives parameters of the user-selected light show or color. In step  2134 , the lighting control logic  78  receives a timestamp for the currently active pool features and lightshow. In step  2136 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits the pool feature operational data, light show parameters, and timestamp to memory. In step  2138 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the most commonly selected light show or colors associated with the additional pool feature. In step  2140 , the lighting control logic  78  saves the most commonly selected light show or colors to memory as a default lighting program for the additional pool features, and then returns to step  2124 . 
     In step  2144 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors for currently active pool features. In step  2146 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there are any currently active pool features. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2144 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2148  where the lighting control logic  78  determines if there is a stored default lighting program for the pool feature. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2124 , where it goes through the process of having a user define a light show for that pool feature. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2150 , where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves the stored default program for the pool feature from memory. In step  2152 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the default program for the pool feature, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 S  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2154 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a motion sensor. In step  2156 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the motion sensor has been triggered. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2154 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2158  where the lighting control logic  78  receives sunrise/sunset data from the Internet. In step  2160 , the lighting control logic  78  receives the current time data. In step  2162 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is after sunset. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2154 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2164 . In step  2164 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current time is before sunrise. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2154 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to steps  2166  and  2168 , where the lighting control logic  78  transmits a signal to activate the lighting system, transmits an alert to the user, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  25 T  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2170 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a motion sensor. In step  2172 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the motion sensor has been triggered. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2170 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2174  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves a minimum ambient light setpoint value from memory. In step  2176 , the lighting control logic  78  receives ambient light operational data. In step  2178 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the ambient light operational data is below the minimum setpoint. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2170 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to steps  2180  and  2182 , where the lighting control logic  78  transmits a signal to activate the lighting system, transmits an alert to the user, and then ends the process. 
       FIG.  25 U  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2184 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from a motion sensor. In step  2186 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the motion sensor has been triggered. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2184 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2188  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves a minimum ambient light setpoint value from memory. In step  2190 , the lighting control logic  78  receives ambient light operational data. In step  2192 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the ambient light operational data is below the minimum setpoint. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2184 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2194  where it determines if a light show is in progress. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2202 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2196 . In step  2196 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to discontinue showing the current show. As referenced above, if a negative determination is made in step  2194 , then the process proceeds to step  2202 . In step  2202 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to activate the lighting system. Step  2196  and  2202  both proceed to step  2198  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display white light at the maximum lumen value. In step  2200 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an alert to the user, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 V  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2204 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from light sensors. In step  2206 , the lighting control logic  78  saves operational data from the light sensors to memory. In step  2208 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the average setpoint based on operational data from the light sensors. In step  2210 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there is remaining time to establish the setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  2204  and the setpoint continues to be established. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2212  where the lighting control logic  78  determines the acceptable deviation from the setpoint, e.g., 90% of the setpoint. In step  2214 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from the light sensors. In step  2216  the lighting control logic  78  determines if the operational data from the light sensors is within the acceptable deviation. If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  2214 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2218  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the pump to activate. In step  2220 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the chlorinator to activate and then proceeds to step  2222  where it delays for a predetermined period of time before returning to step  2204 . 
       FIG.  25 W  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2224 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the geographic location of the pool, e.g., based on IP address or configuration parameters. In step  2226 , the lighting control logic  78  receives local weather forecast data from the Internet/Web. In step  2228 , the lighting control logic  78  processes the weather forecast and identifies impending inclement weather. In step  2230 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there is any impending inclement weather. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2226 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2232  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves a weather alert lighting program from memory and then proceeds to steps  2234  and  2236 . In step  2234 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the weather alert program, e.g., a flashing white light at maximum lumen output. In step  2236 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the pool devices to shield against lightning strike. 
       FIG.  25 X  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2238 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from external moisture sensors. In step  2240 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the presence of precipitation, e.g., versus a splash of water, for example. In step  2242 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if there is precipitation. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2246 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2244  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate, and then returns to step  2238 . In step  2246 , the lighting control logic  78  receives operational data from the lighting system. In step  2248 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the lighting system is active. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2238 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2250  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to deactivate, and returns to step  2238 . 
       FIG.  25 Y  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2252 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors safety alarms for incoming operational data. In step  2254 , the lighting control logic  78  receives incoming operational data from the safety alarms. In step  2256 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if a safety alarm has been triggered. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2252 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2258  where the lighting control logic  78  receives parameters of the user-selected light show or color. In step  2116 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves a safety alarm lighting program from the memory. In step  2260 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display the safety alarm program, e.g., a flashing red light at maximum lumen output, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 Z  is another flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with a lighting system. In step  2262 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the geographic location of the pool, e.g., based on IP address or configuration parameters. In step  2264 , the lighting control logic  78  receives regional sea turtle migratory and nesting data from the Internet/Web. In step  2266 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the proximity of the pool to sea turtle nesting areas. In step  2268 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the pool is located in a sea turtle nesting area. If a negative determination is made, then the process returns to step  2264 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2270  where the lighting control logic  78  receives the current data. In steps  2272  and  2274 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the current date is during the sea turtle nesting season. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  2270 . If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2276  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to lock out all colors other than amber, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  25 AA  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the lighting control logic  78  for controlling multiple light sources. The lighting control logic  78  proceeds with four parallel routine sequences that respectively begin with steps  2278 ,  2288 ,  2298 ,  2308 . Each routine sequence is discussed sequentially, though it should be understood that the routine loops could operate in parallel, or alternatively, in series with each other. The first sequence begins in step  2278  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to a first light source to display a color. In step  2280 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors a first motion sensor for incoming operational data. In step  2282 , the lighting control logic  78  receives incoming operational data from the first motion sensor. In step  2284 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if motion has been detected. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  2280 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2286  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the first light source to change the color, and then returns to step  2284 . 
     The second sequence begins in step  2288  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to a second light source to display a color. In step  2290 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors a second motion sensor for incoming operational data. In step  2292 , the lighting control logic  78  receives incoming operational data from the second motion sensor. In step  2294 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if motion has been detected. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  2290 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2296  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the second light source to change the color, and then returns to step  2294 . 
     The third sequence begins in step  2298  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to a third light source to display a color. In step  2300 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors a third motion sensor for incoming operational data. In step  2302 , the lighting control logic  78  receives incoming operational data from the third motion sensor. In step  2304 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if motion has been detected. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  2300 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2306  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the third light source to change the color, and then returns to step  2304 . 
     The nth sequence begins in step  2308  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to an nth light source to display a color. In step  2310 , the lighting control logic  78  monitors an nth motion sensor for incoming operational data. In step  2312 , the lighting control logic  78  receives incoming operational data from the nth motion sensor. In step  2314 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if motion has been detected. If a negative determination is made then the process returns to step  2310 . If a positive determination is made then the process proceeds to step  2316  where the lighting control logic  78  transmits an instruction to the nth light source to change the color, and then returns to step  2314 . 
       FIG.  25 AB  is another flowchart illustrating processing steps of the lighting control logic  78  communicating with the lighting system  14   h . In step  2318 , the lighting control logic  78  receives water pressure operational data from external sensor(s) at a first time. In step  2320 , the lighting control logic  78  delays for x seconds, where “x” refers to any suitable integral value (e.g., 30, 60, 3600, 7200, etc.). In step  2322 , the lighting control logic  78  receives water pressure operational data from external sensor(s) at a second time. In step  2324 , the lighting control logic  78  determines the change (e.g., delta (A)) in water pressure. In step  2326 , the lighting control logic  78  retrieves setpoint data for the acceptable drop, or increase, in water pressure from the memory. In step  2328 , the lighting control logic  78  determines if the change in water pressure is acceptable (e.g., by comparing the actual change in water pressure to the acceptable change in water pressure). If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  2318 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2230  where the lighting control logic  78  retrieves a lighting program associated with a drop, or increase, in water pressure from the memory (e.g., red lights, red flashing lights, fast pulsing lights for pressure increase, slow pulsing lights for pressure decrease, etc.). In step  2332 , the lighting control logic  78  transmits instructions the lighting system  14   h  to display the lighting program associated with the drop, or increase, in pressure. Optionally, in step  2334 , the lighting control system  78  could also for example, transmit a “Backwash” message to the user/operator. The processing control logic  78  then returns to step  2318 . 
     The lighting control logic  78  can also manage and/or control the brightness of a plurality of lights in response to noise or sound. An ambient noise or sound sensor can be used to detect a plurality of bathers ingress and egress from the swimming pool and even the bathers voices. For example, the ambient noise sensor can detect voice commands and/or noise levels and control the lights based such voice commands and noise levels. Furthermore, the lighting control logic  78  can modulate the plurality of lights color, tempo, etc. if the control logic senses music, games, voices, etc. Further, the noise sensor could also sense for games being played by bathers, for example, “Marco Polo,” and adjust output of the lights accordingly. 
     The lighting control logic  78  can also receive input from a pressure sensor for effectively determining depth of the water above the sensor. This sensor can be located in a light or any other suitable location in a pool or spa environment. The lighting control logic  78  can trigger an automatic water fill routine or draining routine to adjust the water level based on any set level in the system. 
       FIG.  26    is a diagram  2400  illustrating pool cleaner control logic  76 . Pool cleaner control logic  76  could incorporate a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, pool cleaner control logic  76  could incorporate user input data  2402 , pool cleaner operational data  2404 , pool cleaner factory specifications  2406 , pool cleaner configuration parameters  2408 , web data  2410 , pool configuration parameters  2412 , data from related devices  2414 , health monitoring data  2416 , and/or external sensor data  2418 . While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a pool cover detection sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining if the pool cover has been deployed (e.g., by visual inspection) and then entering the pool cover deployment status into the system via a user interface. 
     User input data  2402  could include timers, schedules (e.g., on/off and what speed), cleaning patterns (e.g., orientation of cleaner), etc. Pool cleaner operational data  2404  could include submersion (e.g., float switch and/or moisture sensor), debris level (e.g., collection bag), debris weight, power consumption, current draw, speed of motor (RPM), speed of turbine (RPM), speed of cleaner, orientation of cleaner, etc. In one example, the pool cleaner control logic  76  could make a determination as to whether energy can be supplied to the cleaner via an integral turbine. Pool cleaner factor specifications  2406  could include motor speed, power consumption, current draw, input voltage, life expectancy, etc. Pool cleaner configuration parameters  2408  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zipcode, time and date, etc. Web data  2410  could include location (e.g., based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, ambient light, season, etc. Pool configuration parameters  2412  could include connected pool devices, pool surface area, pool geometry, pool liner color, pool cover (e.g., yes or no), pool cover schedule, etc. Data from related devices  2414  could include the pump, booster pump, changeover valve, valve actuator, vision system, pool cover, controller, power supply, etc. Health monitoring data  2416  could include line-to-line balance, grounding, bonding, leak current, runtime, operating temperature, power consumption, etc. External sensor data  2418  could include water circulation, water flow rate, water pressure water turbidity, power consumption, current draw, line voltage, valve actuation, ambient light, debris location, pool cover detection, etc. Using this data, the pool cleaner control logic  76  could optimize the operation of the pool cleaner. Examples include, anti-kink/hose un-tangle, adjust performance based on internal sensors, cleaner and/or cleaner circuit pressure sensing, time of day sensing, and send cleaner to dirty/high debris area of the pool. 
       FIGS.  27 A- 27 O  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76 .  FIG.  27 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing logic of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a pump. In step  2420 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instruction to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2422 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operation data from a pump. In step  2424 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pump is on. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  2426 . If a negative determination is made, then in step  2425  the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to activate, and then proceeds to step  2426 . In step  2426 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves minimum flow rate setpoint data for the pool cleaner operation from a memory (e.g., gallons per minute. In step  2428 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational flow rate data  2428 . In step  2430 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the flow rate is above a minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2432 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2430 , then the process proceeds to step  2434 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2436 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to increase the flow rate (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts back to step  2428 . If instead, a negative determination is made in step  2434 , then in step  2438 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 B  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a booster pump. In step  2440 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate the pool cleaner. In step  2442 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves pool configuration data from memory (e.g., connected pool devices). In step  2444 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a pump. In step  2446 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pump is on. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  2448 . If a negative determination is made, in step  2456 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to activate, and the proceeds to step  2448 . In step  2448 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there is a booster pump. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2450  the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from the booster pump. In step  2452 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the booster pump is on. If a positive determination is made in step  2452 , then in step  2454 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. If a negative determination is made in step  2452 , then in step  2458  the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the booster pump to activate, and then proceeds to step  2454 . If a negative determination is made in step  2448 , then the process proceeds to step  2454  (as discussed above). 
       FIG.  27 C  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a valve actuator. In step  2460 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2462 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a changeover valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2464 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the valve actuator is in the correct orientation (e.g., valve is open). If a positive determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2466 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2464 , then the process proceeds to step  2468 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2470 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the valve actuator to move to the correct orientation (e.g., open), and the process reverts to step  2462 . If instead, a negative determination is made in step  2468 , then in step  2472 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 D  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a pressure sensor. In step  2474 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2476 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves pressure setpoint data for pool cleaner operation from memory (e.g., minimum pressure). In step  2478 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a pressure sensor. In step  2480 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pressure is sufficient. If a negative determination is made in step  2480 , then in step  2490 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2490 , then in step  2492 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to increase output (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts back to step  2478 . If a negative determination is made in step  2490 , then in step  2494 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., leak), and the process ends. If a positive determination is made in step  2480 , then in step  2482 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves flow rate setpoint data for pool cleaner operation from a memory (e.g., minimum flow rate). In step  2484 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a flow sensor. In step  2486 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the flow rate is sufficient. If a positive determination is made in step  2486 , then in step  2488 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2486 , then in step  2496 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2498 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to increase output (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2484 . If instead, a negative determination is made in step  2496 , then in step  2500 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., blockage), and the process ends. It should be noted that the above process can apply to actuate valves to control the pool cleaner. The valve actuation algorithms are explained in greater detail below. 
       FIG.  27 E  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a valve. In step  2502 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2504 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves pressure setpoint data for a pool cleaner operation from a memory (e.g., minimum circuit pressure). In step  2506 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a pressure sensor. In step  2508 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the circuit pressure is sufficient. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2510 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2508 , then in step  2512 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2514 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from an input valve (e.g., valve position). In step  2516 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines required valve actuation to achieve pressure setpoint (e.g., open 90%). In step  2518 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the valve to actuate by a determined amount. If a negative determination is made in step  2512 , then in step  2520 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 F  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a pool cleaner submersion sensor. In step  2522 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instruction to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2524 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from the pool cleaner submersion sensor (e.g., float switch or moisture sensor). In step  2526 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pool cleaner is submerged. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2528 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. If a negative determination is made in step  2526 , then in step  2530 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made, then the process reverts to step  2524 . If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  2532 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 G  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a debris sensor of the pool cleaner collection bag. In step  2534 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2536 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a debris sensor for a collection bag. In step  2538 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the debris level of the collection bag. In step  2546 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  could optionally transmit instruction to an HMI device to display the debris level of the collection bag. In step  2540 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the collection bag is full. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2544 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits a message to the user to empty the collection bag, and the process reverts to step  2536 . Optionally, in step  2541  the pool cleaner logic  76  could transmit an instruction to the pool cleaner to swim to a pool skimmer and purge the collection bag so that the debris from the collection bag is emptied without user intervention and quickly removed from the pool via the skimmer. If a negative determination is made in step  2540 , then in step  2542 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 H  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a pool cleaner regarding a motor speed threshold. In step  2548 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves factory specified pool cleaner motor speed data from memory. In step  2550 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the motor speed threshold for a full collection bag (e.g., 95% of factory specified speed). In step  2552 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from the pool cleaner (e.g., motor speed). In step  2554 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the motor speed is below a threshold. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  2552 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  2556 , where the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits a message to the user to empty the collection bag, and the process reverts to step  2552 . 
       FIG.  27 I  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating regarding line power operational data. In step  2558 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2560 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves data on factory specified power parameters from a memory (e.g., power consumption, current draw, and/or line voltage). In step  2562 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives line power operational data. In step  2564 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the line power is within factory specifications. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2566 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. If a negative determination is made in step  2564 , then in step  2568 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2568 , then the process reverts to step  2562 . If a negative determination is made in step  2570 , then in step  2570 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 J  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with an internal tachometer. In step  2572 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2580 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. In step  2574 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves turbine setpoint data for a pool cleaner operation from memory (e.g., minimum RPMs). In step  2576 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from an internal tachometer. In step  2578 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the speed of the turbine is sufficient. If a positive determination is made in step  2578 , the process reverts to step  2576 . If a negative determination is made in step  2578 , then in step  2582 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2582 , then in step  2584 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to increase output (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2576 . If a negative determination is made in step  2582 , then in step  2586 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., obstruction), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 K  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with an internal tachometer. In step  2588 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2596 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. In step  2590 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves turbine setpoint data for a pool cleaner operation from a memory (e.g., minimum RPMs). In step  2592 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from an internal tachometer. In step  2594 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the speed of the turbine is sufficient. If a positive determination is made, the process reverts to step  2592 . If in step  2594 , a negative determination is made, then in step  2598 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2598 , then in step  2600 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a flow rate sensor. In step  2602 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the required increase in flow rate to achieve the turbine speed setpoint. In step  2604 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the required increase in pump speed to achieve a required flow rate. In step  2606 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits the instruction to the pump to increase output by the determined amount, and the process reverts to step  2592 . If a negative determination is made in step  2598 , then in step  2608 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits an error condition (e.g., obstruction), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  27 L  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a pump. In step  2610 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  retrieves scheduling data for a pool cleaner operation from a memory (e.g., operating hours, duration, schedule, weather conditions, upcoming events at the site, etc.). In step  2612 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives time data from a clock (e.g., current time). In step  2614 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the current time is within hours of operation. If a negative determination is made, then the process reverts to step  2612 . If a positive determination is made, then in step  2616 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a pump. In step  2618 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pump is on. If a positive determination is made in step  2618 , then in step  2620 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate. If a negative determination is made in step  2618 , then in step  2622 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to activate, and the process proceeds to step  2620 . 
       FIG.  27 M  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with an ambient light sensor. In step  2624 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from an ambient light sensor. In step  2626 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the time of day (e.g., day, night, etc.). In step  2628 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether it is nighttime. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  2624 . If a positive determination is made, then in step  2630 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a pump. In step  2632 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines whether the pump is on. If a positive determination is made in step  2632 , then in step  2634 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2632 , then in step  2636 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pump to activate, and the process proceeds to step  2634 . 
       FIG.  27 N  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a vision system. In step  2638 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives instructions to activate a pool cleaner. In step  2640 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  receives operational data from a vision system (e.g., location of debris). In step  2642 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the location of a high debris area. In step  2644 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  determines the location and orientation of the pool cleaner. In step  2646 , the pool cleaner control logic  76  transmits instructions to the pool cleaner to traverse the high debris area. The process then reverts to step  2640 . 
       FIG.  27 O  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool cleaner control logic  76  communicating with a software application. In step  2639  the application displays a graphical representation or image of the pool on the device on which the software application is installed. While step  2639  shows the software application installed on a smartphone, it is to be appreciated that the software application can be installed on various devices of the system  10 , including but not limited to, the computer system  20  or the pool/spa control system  14   f . In step  2641 , the user indicates (e.g., by touching the smartphone screen in the appropriate location) where debris is observed in the pool. In step  2643  the software application marks each spot that the user has indicated with a graphical overlay (e.g., a box is placed around each indicated debris area). In step  2645  the software application transmits an instruction to the cleaner  14   g  to navigate to the debris areas indicated by the user and clean the same. The process then ends. 
     It is noted that the pool cleaner control logic illustrated in  FIGS.  27 A- 27 O  and discussed above could be used to control a pool/spa cleaner that does not have on-board electronic controls, such as, for example, a conventional suction or pressure cleaner. In such instances, control of the cleaner could be implemented by way of a valve actuator that has an associated processor and network connectivity, such as the valve actuator discussed herein in connection with  FIGS.  28 - 29 I . The valve actuator would be in fluid communication with the cleaner, and the control logic discussed in connection with  FIGS.  27 A- 27 O  would be applied to control the valve actuator to correspondingly control operation of the cleaner. 
       FIG.  28    is a diagram  2700  illustrating valve actuator control logic  74 . Valve actuator control logic  74  could incorporate a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, valve actuator control logic  76  could incorporate user input data  2702 , valve actuator operational data  2704 , valve actuator factory specifications  2706 , valve actuator configuration parameters  2708 , web data  2710 , pool configuration parameters  2712 , data from related devices  2714 , health monitoring data  2716 , and/or external sensor data  2718 . 
     User input data  2702  could include schedule information (e.g., on/off and what orientation, duration of power on/off for specific orientation, open/close), etc. Valve actuator operational data  2704  could include line voltage, operation (e.g., on, off, etc.), orientation (e.g., open, close, etc.), power duration, etc. Valve actuator factor specification  2706  could include source voltage, power consumption, current draw, etc. Valve actuator configuration parameters  2708  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zipcode, time and date, etc. Web data  2710  could include location (e.g., based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, temperature, ambient light, season, etc. Pool configuration parameters  2712  could include pool surface area, pool geometry, pool line color, pool cover (e.g., yes, no, etc.), pool cover schedule, etc. Data from related devices  2714  could include additional valves, pump, heater (e.g., gas, heat pump, etc.), heat (e.g., solar), spa, UV ozone, cleaner, controller, chlorinator, water features, water slide, skimmer, filter, etc. Health monitoring data  2716  could include power consumption, current monitoring, source voltage, etc. External sensor data  2718  could include water flow rate, water pressure, etc. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a water pressure sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the water pressure (e.g., by visually inspecting an analog water pressure gauge) and then entering the water pressure information into the system via a user interface. 
       FIGS.  29 A- 29 I  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74 .  FIG.  29 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a valve actuator. In step  2720 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to actuate a valve. In step  2722 , the valve actuator control logic  74  retrieves data on factory specified power parameters from a memory (e.g., line voltage). In step  2724 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives line voltage operational data. In step  2726 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the line voltage is within the factory specifications. If a positive determination is made, then in step  2728 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the valve actuator to actuate. If a negative determination is made in step  2726 , then in step  2730 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2730 , then the process reverts to step  2724 . If a negative determination is made in step  2730 , then in step  2732 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., undervoltage, overvoltage, etc.), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  29 B  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a heater. In step  2734 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to activate a heater. In step  2736 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a pump. In step  2740 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a heater valve actuator (e.g., orientation)  14   e . In step  2742 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the heater valve actuator  14   e  is in the correct orientation (e.g., valve is open). If a positive determination is made in step  2742 , then in step  2750  a determination is made as to whether the pump  14   a  is on. If a positive determination is made in step  2750 , in step  2744 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater  14   b  to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2750  the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an instruction to the pump  14   a  to activate and the process then proceeds to step  2744 . If a negative determination is made in step  2742 , then in step  2738 , a determination is made as to whether the pump  14   a  is on. If a positive determination is made in step  2738 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an instruction to the pump  14   a  to deactivate. If a negative determination is made in step  2738 , the process proceeds to step  2754 . In step  2752 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2752 , then in step  2754 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater valve actuator  14   e  to move to the correct orientation (e.g., open) and the process then reverts to step  2736 . If a negative determination is made in step  2752 , then in step  2756 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  29 C  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a heater. In step  2758 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to activate a heater. In step  2760 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a pump. In step  2762 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the pump is active. If a negative determination is made in step  2762 , then in step  2776 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2776 , then the process reverts to step  2760 . If a negative determination is made in step  2776 , then in step  2778 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., interlock), and the process ends. If a positive determination is made in step  2762 , then in step  2764 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a heater valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2766 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the heater valve actuator is in the correct orientation (e.g., valve is open). If a positive determination is made in step  2766 , then in step  2768 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater to activate, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2766 , then in step  2770 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2770 , then in step  2772 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater valve actuator to move to the correct orientation (e.g., open). If a negative determination is made in step  2770 , then in step  2774 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  29 D  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a water feature valve actuator. In step  2780 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to increase the output of the water stream feature (e.g., new flow rate setpoint). In step  2782 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a water feature (e.g., flow rate). In step  2784 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the water feature is active. If a positive determination is made in step  2784 , then in step  2786 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the flow rate is sufficient. If a positive determination is made in step  2786 , then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2786 , then in step  2794 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2794 , then in step  2796 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the water feature valve actuator to increase throughput (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2782 . If a negative determination is made in step  2794 , then in step  2798 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., blockage), and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2784 , then in step  2788 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2788 , then in step  2790 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the water feature valve actuator to open, and the process reverts to step  2782 . If a negative determination is made in step  2788 , then in step  2792 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., blockage), and the process ends. It is to be appreciated that while flow rate operational data is received from the water feature in the process described above, similar process steps could be followed should pressure, or other, operational data be received from the water feature. 
       FIG.  29 E  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a water feature valve actuator. In step  2800 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to activate a water feature. In step  2802 , the valve actuator control logic  74  retrieves flow rate setpoint data for water feature operation from a memory (e.g., minimum flow rate). In step  2804 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a water feature (e.g., flow rate). In step  2806 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the water feature is active. If a positive determination is made in step  2806 , then in step  2808 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the flow rate is sufficient. If a positive determination is made in step  2808 , then the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2808 , then in step  2816 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2816 , then in step  2818 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the water feature valve actuator to increase throughput (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2804 . If a negative determination is made in step  2816 , then in step  2820  the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., blockage), and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2806 , then in step  2810 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2810 , then in step  2812 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the water feature valve actuator to open, and the process reverts to step  2802 . If a negative determination is made in step  2810 , then in step  2814 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., blockage), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  29 F  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a heater valve actuator. In step  2822 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to activate the heater. In step  2824 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a heater valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2826 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the heater valve actuator is in the correct orientation (e.g., valve is open). If a negative determination is made in step  2826 , then in step  2834 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2834 , then in step  2836 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater valve actuator to move to the correct orientation (e.g., open), and the process reverts to step  2824 . If a negative determination is made in step  2834 , then in step  2838 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. If a positive determination is made in step  2826 , then in step  2828 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a pump valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2830 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the pump valve actuator is in the correct orientation (e.g., valve is open). If a positive determination is made in step  2830 , then in step  2832 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the heater to activate. If a negative determination is made in step  2830 , then in step  2840 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2840 , then in step  2842 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the pump valve actuator to move to the correct orientation (e.g., open), and the process reverts to step  2828 . If a negative determination is made in step  2840 , then in step  2844 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  29 G  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74 . In step  2846 , the heater valve actuator receives instructions to open. In step  2848 , the heater valve actuator sends instructions to the pump valve actuator to open. In step  2850 , the heater valve actuator receives operating data from the pump valve actuator. In step  2852 , the heater valve actuator determines if the pump valve actuator is open. In step  2854 , the heater valve actuator moves to the open orientation. 
       FIG.  29 H  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74 . In step  2856 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives instructions to actuate a valve. In step  2858 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives an input from a timer for x seconds. In step  2860 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the valve actuator to move to a desired orientation. 
       FIG.  29 I  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the valve actuator control logic  74  communicating with a pump. In step  2862 , the valve actuator control logic  74  retrieves operational setpoint data on valve actuator orientation for a given pump speed (e.g., actuate valve at a given speed). In step  2864 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a pump (e.g., RPMs). In step  2866 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines the correct valve actuator orientation for a speed of the pump. In step  2868 , the valve actuator control logic  74  receives operational data from a valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2870 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether the valve actuator is in the correct orientation. If a positive determination is made in step  2870 , then the process reverts to step  2864 . If a negative determination is made in step  2870 , then in step  2872 , the valve actuator control logic  74  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2872 , then in step  2874 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits instructions to the valve actuator to move to the correct orientation, and the process reverts to step  2868 . If a negative determination is made in step  2872 , then in step  2876 , the valve actuator control logic  74  transmits an error condition (e.g., valve seized), and the process ends. 
       FIG.  30    is a diagram  2900  illustrating water feature control logic  72 . Water feature control logic  72  could incorporate a variety of types of data and/or data sources. More specifically, water feature control logic  72  could incorporate user input data  2902 , water feature operational data  2904 , water feature factory specifications  2906 , water feature configuration parameters  2908 , web data  2910 , pool configuration parameters  2912 , data from related devices  2914 , health monitoring data  2916 , and/or external sensor data  2918 . 
     User input data  2902 , could include timers, schedules, feature parameters (e.g., how high, how much flow for effect), etc. Water feature operational data  2904  could include pressure, water flow rate, debris sensing, actuator position, etc. Water feature configuration parameters  2908  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, zipcode, time and date, etc. Web data  2910  could include location (e.g., based on IP address), time and date, sunrise/sunset data, regional/local weather forecast, wind speed, wind direction, etc. Pool configuration parameters  2912  could include connected pool devices, pool surface area, pool geometry, pool line color, pool cover (e.g., yes, no, etc.), pool cover schedule, etc. Data from related devices  2914  could include additional water features, pump, chemistry dispenser, heater (e.g., gas pump, heat pump, etc.), heat (e.g., solar), chiller, spa, UV sanitizer, pool cleaner, controller, chlorinator, water slide, skimmer, filter, voice recognition/activation system, etc. External sensor data  2918  could include debris sensor, water temperature, motion sensor, ambient noise, etc. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a water temperature sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the water temperature (e.g., by checking a thermometer, thermocouple, etc.) and then entering the water temperature into the system via a user interface. Using this data, the water feature control logic  76  could optimize the operation of the water features by, for example, determining if the feature has been degraded due to debris by receiving data from a pressure sensor in the unit, determining appropriate operation by receiving weather data (e.g., wind location, direction, and speed) and modifying operating parameters, not running the water feature or altering the operation thereof if users are present (e.g., auto-home, or auto-away), enhance turn-over and make pH adjustments, varying the height of water from a water feature by using a variable position actuator, self-leveling the water feature using an actuator and level sensor. 
       FIGS.  31 A- 31 F  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 .  FIG.  31 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2920 , the water feature control logic  72  receives instructions to activate a water feature. In step  2922 , the water feature control logic  72  retrieves minimum flow rate setpoint data for water feature operation from a memory (e.g., gallons per minute). In step  2924 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational flow rate data. In step  2926 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the flow rate is above a minimum setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  2926 , then in step  2928 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the water feature actuator valve to move to an open orientation, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2926 , then in step  2930 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether there are any retries remaining. If a positive determination is made in step  2930 , then in step  2932 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the pump to increase flow (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2924 . If a negative determination is made in step  2930 , then in step  2934 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits an error condition, and the process ends. 
       FIG.  31 B  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2936 , the water feature control logic  72  receives instructions to activate a water feature. In step  2938 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from connected pool devices (e.g., additional water features). In step  2940 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether there are additional water features. If a positive determination is made in step  2940 , then in step  2942 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether additional water features are active. If a positive determination is made in step  2942 , then in step  2944 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the water feature actuator valve to move to an open orientation, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2942 , then in step  2946 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to additional water feature actuator valves to move to the open orientation, and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  2940 , then the process proceeds to step  2944  (as discussed above). 
       FIG.  31 C  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2948 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from chemistry automation system. In step  2950 , the water feature control logic  72  determines if the chemistry automation system is active. If a negative determination is made in step  2950 , then the process reverts to step  2948 . If a positive determination is made in step  2950 , then in step  2952 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the water feature actuation valve to move to the open orientation. 
       FIG.  31 D  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2954 , the water feature control logic  72  retrieves water temperature setpoint data from memory (e.g., desired pool temperature). In step  2956 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from a temperature sensor. In step  2958 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the temperature is above a setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  2958 , then in step  2960 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the chiller to activate. In step  2962 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instructions to the water feature actuation valve to move to the open orientation, and the process reverts to step  2956 . If a negative determination is made in step  2958 , then in step  2964 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from chiller and water feature. In step  2966 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the chiller and water feature are active. If a negative determination is made in step  2966 , then the process reverts to step  2956 . If a positive determination is made in step  2966 , then in step  2968 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to deactivate the chiller and water feature. 
       FIG.  31 E  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2970 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from a motion sensor. In step  2972 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the motion sensor is triggered. If a positive determination is made in step  2972 , then in step  2980 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to the water feature valve actuator to move to the open position, and the process reverts to step  2970 . If a negative determination is made in step  2972 , then in step  2974 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from a water feature valve actuator (e.g., orientation). In step  2976 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the valve actuator is in the open orientation. If a negative determination is made in step  2976 , the process reverts to step  2970 . If a positive determination is made in step  2976 , then in step  2978 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to the water feature valve actuator to move to the closed position, and the process reverts to step  2970 . 
       FIG.  31 F  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the water feature control logic  72 . In step  2982 , the water feature control logic  72  retrieves ambient noise setpoint data from memory (e.g., maximum ambient noise value). In step  2984 , the water feature control logic  72  receives operational data from an ambient noise sensor. In step  2986 , the water feature control logic  72  determines whether the ambient noise is above a maximum setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  2986 , then in step  2988 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to water feature valve actuator to decrease throughput (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2984 . If a negative determination is made in step  2986 , then in step  2990 , the water feature control logic  72  transmits instruction to the water feature valve actuator to increase throughput (e.g., by 5%), and the process reverts to step  2984 . 
     It is noted that the water feature control logic illustrated in  FIGS.  31 A- 31 F  and discussed above could be used to control a pool/spa water feature that does not have on-board electronic controls, such as, for example, a conventional water feature. In such instances, control of the water feature could be implemented by way of a valve actuator that has an associated processor and network connectivity, such as the valve actuator discussed herein in connection with  FIGS.  28 - 29 I . The valve actuator would be in fluid communication with the water feature, and the control logic discussed in connection with  FIGS.  27 A- 27 O  would be applied to control the valve actuator to correspondingly control operation of the water feature. 
       FIG.  32    is a diagram  3000  illustrating another embodiment of pool control logic  70 . Pool control logic  70  could incorporate a variety of types of data and/or data sources in addition to those discussed hereinabove. More specifically, pool control logic  70  could process user input data  3002 , operational data  3004 , equipment factory specifications  3006 , equipment configuration parameters  3008 , web data  3010 , pool configuration parameters  3012 , data from related devices  3014 , health monitoring data  3016 , and/or external sensor data  3018 . 
     User input data  3002 , could include maximum sun exposure (e.g., UV, intensity, etc.), minimum sun exposure, device operation setpoints, preferred pool/spa area, contact means (e.g., SMS/text), user profiles, zip code, maximum wind speed setpoint, lighting programs, mode selection, override code, and desired actions (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.). Operational data  3004  could include GPS coordinates, compass bearing, accelerometer information, image data, IP address, timers, energy usage, and video monitoring data. Equipment factory specifications  3006  could include device maximum wind speed, device operation setpoints, device power requirements, and device critical requirements (e.g., plumbing size, flow rate, clearance, etc.). Equipment configuration parameters  3008  could include IP address, GPS coordinates, ZIP code, time and date, lighting programs, etc. Web data  3010  could include location (based on IP address), time &amp; date, sun position, maximum sun exposure, sunrise/sunset data, local lighting code, regional &amp; local weather, forecast data, wind speed and direction, historic weather conditions, live weather maps, local noise ordinance, local traffic conditions, local energy providers, local energy costs, energy rebates and discounts, video monitoring data, device/equipment information, etc. Pool configuration parameters  3012  could include, pool surface area, pool geometry, pool cover (e.g., yes, no), etc. Related devices/systems  3014  could include smart devices, user interface devices, shading devices, skimmers, pumps, water features, fire features, pool covers, lighting systems, heaters or coolers, pool cleaners, sanitization systems, chemical dispensing systems, alarm systems, garage doors, interior (home) lights, maintenance system/application, etc. Health monitoring data  3016  could include ambient temperature, water temperature, wind speed, warranty countdown, maintenance schedule, past equipment issues, service history, etc. External sensor data  3018  could include motion sensors (e.g., bather detection), ambient temperature sensors, water temperature sensors, ambient noise sensors, light sensors (home/interior), video (home/interior), bar code scanners, etc. While it may be desirable for external sensors to monitor/provide data on as many system parameters as possible (thereby providing greater optimization, automation, and user/operator comfort), it is contemplated that some systems need not utilize an external sensor to monitor every system parameter. For example, if a temperature sensor has not been installed in a particular system, the user/operator can provide this information by first determining the temperature (e.g., by checking a thermometer, a thermocouple, a weather forecast, the internet, etc.) and then entering the temperature into the system via a user interface. 
       FIGS.  33 A- 33 AH  are flowcharts illustrating additional processing steps of the pool control logic  70  carried out with respect to related devices, systems, and applications.  FIG.  33 A  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic  70  for determining locations of skimmers and/or the pool/spa to account for wind, sun, or other external factors. In step  3100 , the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to traverse the perimeter of the pool while holding the smart device. In step  3102 , the pool control logic  70  receives positioning data (e.g., GPS coordinates, compass bearing, etc.) from the smart device as the user traverses the pool. In step  3104 , the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to place the smart device at a skimmer location. In step  3106 , the pool control logic  70  receives positioning data (e.g., GPS coordinates, compass bearing, accelerometer information, etc.) from the smart device placed at the skimmer location. Optionally, to enable higher accuracy in locating the skimmer and/or pool/spa, in step  3108 , the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to photograph the skimmer and pool using the smart device and in step  3110 , the pool control logic  70  receives image data from the smart device. In step  3112 , the pool control logic  70  determines the location of the skimmer relative to the pool (e.g., using GPS, compass, accelerometer information, and/or image data provided by the smart device). In step  3114 , pool control logic  70  saves the location of the skimmer to memory for later retrieval, described hereinbelow in connection with  FIG.  33 G . Optionally, in step  3116  pool control logic can also determine the location, geometry, and orientation of the pool/spa (e.g., using GPS, compass, accelerometer information, and/or image data from the smart device) and in step  3118 , pool control logic  70  could save the location, geometry, and orientation of the pool/spa to memory for later retrieval, described hereinbelow in connection with  FIG.  33 L . 
       FIG.  33 B  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for estimating sun exposure and alerting the user to the same. In step  3120 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to photograph the pool/spa using a smart device. In step  3122 , pool control logic  70  receives data from the smart device (e.g., GPS, compass, image, date and time data, etc.). In step  3124 , pool control logic  70  determines if additional photographs are needed (e.g., multiple photographs could be taken at various times during the day). If a positive determination is made, pool control logic  70  proceeds to step  3126 , where the logic is delayed for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.), and the process then reverts to step  3120 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3128 , where pool control logic  70  receives data on sun position (e.g., from sun tracking application or web data) based on location data from the smart device. In step  3130 , pool control logic  70  receives current date and time data (e.g., from internal clock or as web data). In step  3132 , pool control logic estimates the current sun exposure (e.g., ultraviolet “UV” index) based on location, image, sun position, and date and time data. In step  3134 , pool control logic  70  retrieves a maximum UV exposure setpoint from the memory. The maximum UV exposure setpoint could be provided by the user, or retrieved as web data provided by a recognized health organization. In step  3136 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current sun exposure is above the maximum UV exposure setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3138 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an alert to the user (e.g., “Caution—High UV Index”). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3130 . 
       FIG.  33 C  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for automatically deploying shading devices (e.g., umbrellas, awnings, shades, etc.) based on estimated sun exposure. In step  3140 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to photograph the pool/spa using a smart device. In step  3142 , pool control logic  70  receives data from the smart device (e.g., GPS, compass, image, date and time data, etc.). In step  3144 , pool control logic  70  determines if additional photographs are needed (e.g., multiple photographs could be taken at various times during the day). If a positive determination is made, pool control logic  70  proceeds to step  3146 , where the logic is delayed for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.), and the process then reverts to step  3140 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3148 , where pool control logic  70  receives data on sun position (e.g., from sun tracking application or web data) based on location data from the smart device. In step  3150 , pool control logic  70  receives current date and time data (e.g., from internal clock or as web data). In step  3152 , pool control logic  70  estimates the current sun exposure (e.g., ultraviolet “UV” index, sun intensity, etc.) based on location, image, sun position, and date and time data. In step  3154 , pool control logic  70  retrieves a shading device setpoint from the memory. The shading device setpoint is a sun exposure value for triggering operation of the shading devices, and could be provided by the user, as a configuration parameter, or retrieved as web data. In step  3156 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current estimated sun exposure is above the shading device setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3158 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the shading devices to deploy and then reverts to step  3150 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3160 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the shading devices are deployed. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3150 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3162 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the shading devices to retract and then reverts to step  3150 . 
       FIG.  33 D  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for notifying a user of sun conditions at a preferred area of the pool (e.g., lounging area). In step  3164 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to photograph the pool/spa using a smart device. In step  3166 , pool control logic  70  receives data from the smart device (e.g., GPS, compass, image, date and time data, etc.). In step  3168 , pool control logic  70  determines if additional photographs are needed (e.g., multiple photographs could be taken at various times during the day). If a positive determination is made, pool control logic  70  proceeds to step  3170 , where the logic is delayed for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.), and the process then reverts to step  3164 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3172 , where pool control logic  70  receives data on sun position (e.g., from sun tracking application or web data) based on location data from the smart device. In step  3174 , pool control logic  70  retrieves location data of a preferred area of the pool from the memory. The location data of the preferred area of the pool can be obtained by way of a similar process, as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 A  (e.g., process for determining skimmer location). In some embodiments, multiple users could specify one or more preferred areas of the pool/spa area. In step  3176 , the pool control logic  70  receives current date and time data (e.g., from internal clock, or as web data). In step  3178 , pool control logic  70  estimates the current sun exposure at the preferred area (e.g., using GPS, compass, image, and sun positioning data). In step  3180 , pool control logic  70  retrieves a minimum sun exposure setpoint (e.g., minimum UV index or sun intensity) from the memory. In step  3182 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current estimated sun exposure is above the minimum sun exposure setpoint. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3176 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3184 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an alert to the user (e.g., “Lounge Area is Sunny”). In some embodiments, multiple users can create profiles containing their preferred areas of the pool and a means for receiving alerts. For example, a user could create a profile with two preferred areas of the pool, name the preferred areas of the pool (e.g., “lounge area,” “spa area,” etc.) and pool control logic  70  could sent the user a SMS/text message when either of the preferred areas are sunny. It is also noted that pool control logic  70  could collect historical usage data for each user and save the data (e.g., to the memory) to individual user profiles for later retrieval and use. 
       FIG.  33 E  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for planning the optimal placement of a pool/spa prior to installation. In step  3186 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to photograph a desired pool/spa location using a smart device. In step  3188 , pool control logic  70  receives desired location data from the smart device (e.g., GPS coordinates, compass bearing, image data, etc.). In step  3190 , pool control logic  70  receives data on sun position (e.g., data from sun tracking application or as web data), based on the location data from the smart device. In step  3192 , pool control logic  70  determines the optimal location and orientation of the pool/spa for ideal sun exposure (e.g., using GPS, compass, and image data from smart device). Optionally, in step  3194 , pool control logic  70  receives data on historic weather conditions (e.g., prevailing winds, speed, direction, etc.) based on the location data from the smart device and in step  3196 , pool control logic  70  determines the optimal location of a skimmer (e.g., based on historic wind conditions/direction). In step  3197 , pool control logic  70  transmits the optimized location and orientation data to the user (e.g., in the form of architectural drawings, renderings, etc.). In step  3198 , pool control logic  70  saves the optimized location data to the memory for later retrieval. 
       FIG.  33 F  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for determining current weather conditions. In step  3200 , pool control logic  70  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  3202 , pool control logic  70  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  3204 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on current weather conditions (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). Current weather conditions can include, for example, temperature, precipitation, wind speed, wind direction, etc. Web data on current weather conditions could also include live 3rd party data, for example, live weather maps of precipitation and cloud cover. In step  3206 , pool control logic  70  saves the current weather conditions to the memory for later retrieval. In step  3208 , pool control logic  70  is delayed by X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.) and then the process returns to step  3200 . Optionally, in step  3210 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  3212 , pool control logic  70  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device. In step  3214 , pool control logic  70  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi. 
       FIG.  33 G  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for selecting a skimmer based on current weather conditions. In step  3216 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind direction) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3218 , pool control logic  70  retrieves skimmer location data from the memory. The skimmer location data can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 A . In step  3220 , pool control logic  70  determines if there are multiple skimmers. If a negative determination is made, the process ends. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3222 , where pool control logic  70  determines the most downwind skimmer (using the location data). In step  3224 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the most downwind skimmer to activate. Pool control logic  70  could also sent an instruction to all other skimmers to deactivate. The process then reverts to step  3216 . In some embodiments, pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to increase the suction of an upwind skimmer to compensate for the wind conditions or pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to decrease the suction of a downwind skimmer to compensate for the increased debris flowing therethrough due to the wind condition. In further embodiments, pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to alter the skimmer suction relative to main drain suction. 
       FIG.  33 H  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for automated operation of pool devices based on current weather conditions. In step  3226 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed, up-wind debris source direction) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3228 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3230 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3238 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pump to increase circulation. Optionally, in step  3240 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to deactivate or reduce water features (e.g., fountains). Optionally, in step  3242 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to deactivate or reduce fire features. Optionally, in step  3224 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to retract shading devices (e.g., umbrellas, awnings, shades, etc.). Alternatively, in the event of pool devices that are not capable of being automated/receiving control signals/are not connected to the system  10 , in step  3246 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Caution—High Winds”). The process then reverts to step  3226 . If a negative determination is made in step  3230 , the process proceeds to step  3232 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3226 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3234 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3236 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3226 . The above process can also be used to configure the skimmer locations with respect to the up-wind debris direction. 
       FIG.  33 I  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for automated operation of a pool cover based on current weather conditions. In step  3248 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3250 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3252 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3260 , where pool control logic  70  receives operational data from a pool motion sensor (e.g., bather detection, as described hereinabove). In step  3262 , pool control logic  70  determines if an active bather has been detected. If a positive determination is made, the process could optionally proceed to step  3264 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to display a weather alert program (e.g., flashing white lights) and the process then reverts to step  3248 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3266 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to close the pool cover (e.g., 90% closed, allowing for safety egress). If a negative determination is made in step  3252 , the process proceeds to step  3254 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., pool cover, lighting system) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3248 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3256 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3258 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3248 . 
       FIG.  33 J  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for compensating heat loss due to current weather conditions. In step  3268 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3270 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3272 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3280 , where pool control logic  70  retrieves pool configuration parameters from memory (e.g., pool surface area, geometry, volume, etc.). In step  3282 , pool control logic  70  receives data on the ambient temperature (e.g., from sensor or web data). In step  3284 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data on water temperature (e.g., from sensor). In step  3286 , pool control logic  70  determines heat loss due to the current weather condition (e.g., prevailing winds). In step  3288 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the heater to increase output (e.g., compensating for the heat loss) and the process reverts to step  3268 . If a negative determination is made in step  3272 , the process proceeds to step  3274 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., heater) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3268 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3276 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3278 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3268 . 
       FIG.  33 K  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for determining if a freeze risk exists and if so, taking appropriate action. In step  3290 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3292 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3294 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3302 , where pool control logic  70  receives data on the ambient temperature (e.g., from sensor or web data). In step  3304 , pool control logic  70  determines heat loss due to the current weather condition (e.g., prevailing winds). Heat loss due to the weather conditions (e.g., wind) can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 J . In step  3306 , pool control logic  70  determines if a freeze risk exists (e.g., due to ambient temperature, heat loss, wind chill, etc.). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3290 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3308 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pump to increase speed. Optionally, in step  3310 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the heater to increase output, in step  3312 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the lighting system to display a freeze risk program (e.g., flashing blue lights), and in step  3314 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Freeze Risk”). The process then reverts to step  3290 . If a negative determination is made in step  3294 , the process proceeds to step  3296 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., pump, heater, lighting system, etc.) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3290 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3298 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3300 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3290 . 
       FIG.  33 L  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for cleaning a pool/spa in response to a weather condition (e.g., high winds). In step  3316 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed, direction) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3318 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3320 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3328 , where pool control logic  70  retrieves pool geometry and orientation data from the memory. The pool geometry and orientation data can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 A . In step  3330 , pool control logic  70  determines the downwind area of the pool/spa. In step  3332 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool cleaner to traverse the downwind area of the pool and the process then reverts to step  3316 . If a negative determination is made in step  3320 , the process proceeds to step  3322 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., pool cleaner) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3316 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3324 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3326 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3316 . 
       FIG.  33 M  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for sanitizing a pool/spa in response to a weather condition (e.g., high winds). In step  3334 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions (e.g., wind speed) data from the memory. The current weather conditions can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . In step  3336 , pool control logic  70  retrieves maximum wind speed setpoint data from memory. In step  3338 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current wind speed is above the maximum wind speed setpoint. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3346 , where pool control logic  70  retrieves pool configuration parameters (e.g., pool surface area, geometry, volume, etc.) from the memory. In step  3348 , pool control logic  70  determines the increased sanitization needs of the pool due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds causing increased debris in pool). In step  3350 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a sanitization system to increase operation by the determined amount and the process then reverts to step  3334 . If a negative determination is made in step  3338 , the process proceeds to step  3340 , where pool control logic  70  determines if the operation of any pool devices (e.g., sanitization system) has been altered due to the weather condition (e.g., high winds). If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3334 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3342 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to revert to regular operation of the pool device(s). Optionally, in step  3344 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a message to the user (e.g., “Wind Has Subsided”). The process then reverts to step  3334 . 
       FIG.  33 N  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operating pool devices based on timers triggered by sunrise/sunset times. In step  3352 , pool control logic  70  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  3354 , pool control logic  70  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  3356 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on sunrise/sunset times (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). In step  3358 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., via an internal clock or as web data). In step  3360 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is the sunrise or sunset time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3358 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3362 , where pool control logic  70  begins a timer for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.). In step  3364 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool device to activate/alter operation. For example, pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the pump  14   a  to increase speed upon sunrise, for a specified duration of time, or pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to display a countdown to sundown. In step  3366 , pool control logic  70  determines if the timer has reached zero (0) seconds. If a negative determination is made, the process repeats step  3366 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3368 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool device to deactivate/resume normal operation. The process then reverts to step  3352 . Optionally, in step  3370 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  3372 , pool control logic  70  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device and then the process could proceed to step  3356 . In step  3374 , pool control logic  70  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi) and then the process could proceed to step  3356 . 
       FIG.  33 O  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operating pool devices based on sunrise/sunset times (e.g., activate at sunrise, deactivate at sunset). For example, the pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the pump  14   a  to increase speed upon sunrise and decrease speed upon sunset, the pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to increase the filtration rate or hours based on sunlight hours, or the pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the lighting system  14   h  to activate upon sundown and deactivate upon sunrise. In step  3376 , pool control logic  70  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  3378 , pool control logic  70  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  3380 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on sunrise/sunset times (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). In step  3382 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., via an internal clock or as web data). In step  3384 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is the sunrise or sunset time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3382 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3386 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool device to activate/alter operation. In step  3388 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., via an internal clock or as web data). In step  3390 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is the sunrise or sunset time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3388 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3392 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool device to deactivate/resume normal operation. The process then reverts to step  3376 . Optionally, in step  3394 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  3396 , pool control logic  70  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device and then the process could proceed to step  3380 . In step  3398 , pool control logic  70  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi) and then the process could proceed to step  3380 . 
       FIG.  33 P  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operating pool devices at different setpoints during the daytime and evening. For example, pool control logic  70  could operate a sanitization system at a first setpoint during the daytime and operate at a second setpoint during the evening. In step  3400 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on sunrise/sunset times. The web data on sunrise/sunset times can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 N . In step  3402 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., via an internal clock or as web data). In step  3404 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is the sunrise or sunset time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3402 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3406 , where pool control logic  70  retrieves setpoint data for a daylight sanitization rate from the memory. In step  3408 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a sanitization system to operate at the daylight sanitization rate. In step  3410 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., via an internal clock or as web data). In step  3412 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is the sunrise or sunset time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3410 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3414 , where pool control logic  70  retrieves setpoint data on an evening sanitization rate from the memory. In step  3416 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the sanitization system to operate at the evening sanitization rate. The process then reverts to step  3400 . 
       FIG.  33 Q  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operating a sanitization system based on the current weather conditions. In step  3418 , pool control logic  70  retrieves current weather conditions data from the memory. Current weather conditions data can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 F . Current weather conditions could include air temperature, humidity, heat/cold index, wind-chill, etc. Optionally, in step  3426 , pool control logic  70  could receive water temperature operational data from a sensor. In step  3420 , pool control logic  70  retrieves pool configuration parameters from the memory. In step  3422 , pool control logic  70  determines the sanitization rate based on the current weather conditions. While the sanitization rate could be determined based on the current weather conditions, other chemical dispensing and/or production rates could be determined as well. Optionally, in step  3428 , pool control logic  70  could determine the sanitization rate based on the water temperature. In step  3424 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the sanitization system to operate at the determined rate. The process then reverts to step  3418 . 
       FIG.  33 R  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operating the system  10  based on maximum ambient noise. In step  3430 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on the local noise ordinance (e.g., maximum decibels at specified times allowed by code). The web data on the local noise ordinance can be obtained by way of a similar process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 N  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3432 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., internal clock or web data). In step  3434 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data from an ambient noise sensor. In step  3436  pool control logic  70  determines if the current ambient noise is above the maximum ambient noise (set by ordinance) at the current time. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3432 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3438 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool device (e.g., water feature, pump, heater, blower, etc.) to reduce operation by X %, wherein X is any suitable integer between one (1) and one hundred (100) (e.g., 1, 2, 5, 10, etc.). The process then reverts to step  3432 . The above process can apply based on geo-positioning data. 
       FIG.  33 S  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for compensating for ambient noise. In step  3440 , pool control logic  70  receives web data (e.g., Google maps) on local traffic conditions (e.g., number/density/speed of vehicles surrounding current location). The web data on the local traffic conditions can be obtained by way of a similar process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 N  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3442 , pool control logic  70  determines/estimates the noise intensity of the local traffic. Optionally, in step  3452 , pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from an ambient noise sensor that is positioned to sense the noise produced by the local traffic. In step  3444 , pool control logic  70  determines the intensity of white noise needed to compensate for the noise intensity of the local traffic. In step  3446 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool device (e.g., water feature or other device capable of producing white noise) to increase output by X %, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 50, etc.). In step  3448 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data from an ambient noise sensor (e.g., white noise sensor). In step  3450 , pool control logic  70  determines if the white noise being produced is sufficient to compensate for the noise being produced by the local traffic. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3446 . If a positive determination is made, the process reverts to step  3440 . 
       FIG.  33 T  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for determining the local cost of energy. In step  3454 , pool control logic  70  receives an IP address from a smart device on a local network. In step  3456 , pool control logic  70  receives location data based on the IP address (e.g., web data/geolocation provider). In step  3458 , pool control logic  70  receives web data (e.g., a listing) of local energy providers (based on ZIP code, location/address, or GPS coordinates, discussed hereinbelow). In step  3460 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the user to select their local energy provider (e.g., from a list of local energy providers). The local energy providers/vendors can also be determined by way of the user entering, scanning, or selecting the vendor from a drop-down menu. In step  3462 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on local energy cost (e.g., as provided by the selected energy vendor). The local energy costs could include both current energy costs and/or forecasted energy costs. Optionally, in step  3474 , pool control logic  70  could transmit a rebate/discount message to the user (e.g., government and/or power company energy and/or energy-based equipment rebates and discounts). In step  3464 , pool control logic  70  saves the local energy cost data to the memory for later retrieval. In step  3466 , pool control logic  70  is delayed for X seconds, wherein X is any suitable integer (e.g., 5, 10, 3600, etc.) and the process then reverts to step  3454 . Optionally, in step  3468 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the user to enter a ZIP code via a user interface device and in step  3470 , pool control logic  70  could receive the ZIP code data from the user interface device and then the process could proceed to step  3458 . In step  3472 , pool control logic  70  could also/alternatively receive GPS data from a smart device on the local network (e.g., smart phone connected to home WiFi) and then the process could proceed to step  3458 . 
       FIG.  33 U  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for informing the user of the cost of a desired action. In step  3476 , pool control logic  70  retrieves local energy cost data from the memory. The web data on the local energy costs can be obtained by way of the process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 T  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3478 , pool control logic  70  receives user input on a desired action (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.). The desired action could also include bringing a pool feature to a desired state, over time (e.g., bringing the pool water temperature to 80 degrees Fahrenheit by Friday at 5:00 pm and maintaining the temperature for a specified duration of time). In step  3480 , pool control logic  70  determines the predicted cost of the desired action. In step  3482 , pool control logic  70  transmits a message to the user (e.g., cost per minute, hour, day, etc.). 
       FIG.  33 V  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for optimizing the operation of pool devices based on energy cost (peak and off-peak hours). In step  3484 , pool control logic  70  retrieves local energy cost data from the memory (e.g., peak/off-peak cost of electricity). The web data on the local energy costs can be obtained by way of the process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 T  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3486 , pool control logic  70  receives user input on pool device operating schedules (e.g., filtering, pool cleaning, etc.). In step  3488 , pool control logic  70  determines an optimized schedule for the lowest energy cost. For example, normal filtering and pool cleaner operation cycles could be adjusted based on the lowest cost of energy during off-peak hours. In step  3490 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool devices to operate according to the optimized schedule. In addition, energy-based commands could be capable of auto-overriding other system commands, and vice-versa, based on weather/environmental demands (e.g., optimized energy settings vs. weather vs. basic pool requirements—clean, sanitized, etc.). The process then returns to step  3484 . 
       FIG.  33 W  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for warning the user of pool device operation during peak energy cost hours. In step  3492 , pool control logic  70  retrieves local energy cost data from the memory (e.g., peak/off-peak cost of electricity). The web data on the local energy costs can be obtained by way of the process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 T  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3494 , pool control logic  70  retrieves user input on a desired action (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.). In step  3496 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., internal clock, or as web data). In step  3498 , pool control logic  70  determines whether the current time corresponds to peak hours for electricity costs. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3500 , where pool control logic  70  transmits a message to the user (e.g., “Warning—Peak hours. Do you wish to proceed?”). In step  3502 , pool control logic  70  receives user input (e.g., yes/no). In step  3504 , pool control logic  70  determines if the user wishes to proceed with the desired action. If a negative determination is made, the process ends. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3506 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool device to perform the desired action (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.) and the process ends. If a negative determination is made at step  3498 , the process proceeds to step  3506 . 
       FIG.  33 X  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for preventing use of the system  10  during peak electrical cost hours. In step  3508 , pool control logic  70  retrieves local energy cost data from the memory (e.g., peak/off-peak cost of electricity). The web data on the local energy costs can be obtained by way of the process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 T  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3510 , pool control logic  70  retrieves user input on a desired action (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.). In step  3512 , pool control logic  70  receives time and date data (e.g., internal clock, or as web data). In step  3514 , pool control logic  70  determines if it is currently peak hours for electricity costs. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3516 , where pool control logic  70  transmits a message to the user (e.g., “Warning—Peak hours. Please enter Priority User override code.”). In step  3518 , pool control logic  70  receives user input (e.g., Priority User override code). In step  3520 , pool control logic  70  determines if the Priority User override code is correct. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3522 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool device to perform the desired action (e.g., pump speed up, spa on, lights on, etc.) and the process ends. If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3524 , where pool control logic  70  determines if there are retries remaining (e.g., remaining attempts to enter the correct code). If a negative determination is made at step  3524 , the process ends. If a positive determination is made at step  3524 , the process reverts to step  3518 . If a negative determination is made at step  3514 , the process proceeds to step  3522 . 
       FIG.  33 Y  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for deactivating high-powered systems/devices/components to reduce electrical costs. In step  3526 , pool control logic  70  receives an instruction to activate “Energy Save Mode.” In step  3528 , pool control logic  70  identifies high-powered lighting devices in the lighting system. The high-powered lighting devices could be identified at the time of installation (e.g., manually or scanned) or by pool control logic  70  (e.g., macro or sensed). In step  3530 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the high-powered lighting to deactivate (e.g., deactivate non-LED lighting devices). While the “Energy Save Mode” has been described herein in connection with lighting devices, “Energy Save Mode” could also identify and deactivate any device using an amount power that exceeds a predefined setpoint. Additionally, pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to a device to reduce operation until the device is only consuming power at low, predefined setpoint. In addition to the examples discussed hereinabove, in connection with  FIGS.  33 T- 33 Y , web data (e.g., 3rd party Web advised conditions, energy cost, weather, environmental, etc.) could be used to prompt/trigger pool control logic  70  (e.g., pump control, valve control, lighting control, cleaner control, etc.) to adjust speed, flow, position, mode, performance, behavior, etc. of any piece of pool equipment or feature, or any other device in communication with the system  10 , to reduce energy costs, or to return to a previous state. 
     The system of the present disclosure also provides systems for leveraging synergies between the pool control logic  70  and other applications (e.g., connecting to and/or communicating with a common application and sharing a user interface, advising the user of various alerts/conditions, controlling pool functions and/or devices, reaction or synchronization to/with external devices connected through the cloud, etc.). For example,  FIG.  33 Z  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for alerting the user to pool/spa area ingress and egress. In step  3532 , pool control logic  70  receives live or historical video of the pool/yard (e.g., from 3rd party application/source). In step  3534 , pool control logic  70  analyzes the video of the pool/yard for occupant ingress/egress. In step  3536 , pool control logic  70  determines if there has been an ingress/egress (e.g., unwanted intrusion, monitoring the whereabouts of children, etc.) in connection with a body of water. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3532 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3538 , where pool control logic  70  transmits a message to the user (e.g., “Alert—pool ingress/egress”). The process then reverts to step  3532 . Optionally, in step  3540 , pool control logic  70  could transmit instructions to an alarm system to activate (e.g., 3rd party alarm system/security provider) and then revert to step  3532 . The pool control logic  70  could also communicate with 3rd party security systems (e.g., front-door systems with video, audio, door unlock/lock, etc.) and in-home lighting systems and receive data from 3rd party live satellite image/video feeds. 
       FIG.  33 AA  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for leveraging video data from a 3rd party to maintain the cleanliness of a pool/spa. In step  3542 , pool control logic  70  receives live or historical video of the pool/yard (e.g., from 3rd party application/source). In step  3544 , pool control logic  70  analyzes the video of the pool/yard for debris (e.g., presence of debris in pool, debris movement in pool, debris concentration in pool, etc.). In step  3546 , pool control logic  70  determines if there is debris in the pool. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3542 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3548 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a pool device to activate (e.g., cleaner, skimmer, filter, etc.). The process then reverts to step  3542 . Optionally, in step  3550 , pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to a pool cleaner to traverse the area of the pool having the highest concentration of debris, and then revert to step  3542 . 
       FIG.  33 AB  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for operation of the lighting system  14   h  based on operational data from an external source. In step  3552 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data from an external source (e.g., a signal that the garage door is opening). Optionally, in step  3562 , pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from another external device (e.g., a signal that the indoor lighting devices are turned on). In step  3554 , pool control logic  70  receives web data on sunrise/sunset times (e.g., based on ZIP code, address, or GPS coordinates). The web data on the sunrise/sunset times can be obtained by way of the process as described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 N  (e.g., by determining the location of the system  10  and then receiving web data based on that location). In step  3556 , pool control logic  70  receives current time and date data (e.g., from an internal clock, or as web data). In step  3558 , pool control logic  70  determines if the current time is after sunset. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3552 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3560 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to activate (e.g., a selection, pool zone, yard zone, or all outdoor lights). The process then reverts to step  3552 . In addition to the foregoing, pool control logic  70  could also synchronize/trigger the outdoor/pool lighting system to an “all on” command for the indoor lights. This is particularly useful for emergency lighting scenarios. For example, the indoor lights could receive an “all on” command in response to a triggered smoke detector and pool control logic  70  could transmit an instruction to the lighting system  14   h  to activate all lights at maximum intensity. Pool control logic  70  could determine that an “all on” command has been sent to the indoor lights directly, by receiving the same command (e.g., direct communication or network communication between the indoor lights and/or smoke detector and pool control logic  70 ), or indirectly, by monitoring the indoor lighting and/or smoke detector (e.g., light sensors or video monitoring for the indoor lighting, noise sensor for the smoke detector, etc.). 
       FIG.  33 AC  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for matching or synchronizing the operation of the lighting system  14   h  to interior mood lighting in a home. In step  3564 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data from an external device (e.g., mood/color lighting selected in a home). Alternatively, pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from a sensor positioned for sensing the lighting conditions (e.g., intensity or color) in the home, or pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from a third party application or video feed showing the lighting conditions in the house. In step  3566 , pool control logic  70  determines the RGB color spectrum of the mood lighting. In step  3568 , pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the lighting system to operate the lights at the determined RGB color spectrum (e.g., matching the mood lighting to a selection, pool zone, yard zone, or all outdoor lights). 
       FIG.  33 AD  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for communicating with a smart device in the possession of a servicer/installer. In step  3570  the smart device scans an equipment bar code (e.g., at time of service, installation, etc.). Optionally, in step  3585 , pool control logic  70  could receive the equipment bar code data scanned by the smart device. In step  3572 , the smart device identifies the location of the scanned equipment (e.g., via GPS, geo-positioning application, etc.). In step  3574 , the smart device transmits the location of the equipment and the date of service/installation to the cloud. For example, the location of the equipment and date of service/installation could be used for warranty registration, as well as other purposes, as described hereinbelow. The cloud could be accessed by pool control logic  70 , or a third party system (e.g., smart device/maintenance system used by servicer/installer). Optionally, in step  3582 , pool control logic  70  could save the location of the equipment and the date of service/installation to the memory for later retrieval. In step  3576 , pool control logic  70  receives information on existing equipment installed at the same location/site (e.g., from the cloud or from the memory). In step  3578 , pool control logic  70  determines if it is at or near time to service/replace any of the existing installed equipment. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3580 , where pool control logic  70  transmits a notification to the servicer/installer (e.g., “Device due for maintenance in X days”) and the process ends. Optionally, if a positive determination is made in step  3578 , the process could proceed to step  3584 , where pool control logic  70  transmits information to the servicer/installer regarding past issues with the equipment at the location/site and the process ends. If a negative determination is made in step  3578 , the process ends. This service information could also be accessed through the cloud and viewed by the servicer/installer, original equipment manufacturer, or authorized service center. The service information could also be provided to the servicer/installer before arrival at the site through a smart device and/or application utilizing geo-fencing and global positioning systems (e.g., a geo-fence is placed around the site and the service information is provided to the servicer/installer upon crossing the geo-fence threshold), discussed hereinbelow. 
       FIG.  33 AE  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for communicating with an application used by a servicer/installer. In step  3586 , a smart device scans an equipment bar code (e.g., at the time of service, installation, etc.). Optionally, in step  3606 , pool control logic  70  could receive the equipment bar code data scanned by the smart device. In step  3588 , an application on the smart device receives equipment information (e.g., web data from the equipment manufacturer). In step  3590 , the application displays critical equipment requirements (e.g., plumbing size, flow, clearance, etc.). In step  3592 , the application receives information on existing equipment at the same location/site (e.g., from the cloud or from memory). The application can receive information on existing equipment by way of a similar process as to that described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 AD . Alternatively, in addition to scanning the equipment being scanned/installed, any preexisting equipment could be scanned, and data on the preexisting equipment could be received from the cloud or from memory. In step  3594 , the application analyzes the information for any potential adverse interactions with other equipment installed at the same location/site. In step  3596 , the application determines if there are any potential adverse interactions. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3598 , where the application displays a notification to the servicer/installer (e.g., “Caution—incompatible equipment”). If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3600 , where the application receives known pool parameters (e.g., location, regional weather/environmental conditions, pool geometry, connected pool devices, energy costs, user preferences, etc.). In step  3602 , the application determines optimal settings for the newly serviced/installed equipment. The application can recommend programming based on regional preferences, including seasonal programming (summer, winter, etc.). Further, the application can estimate energy costs based on location weather data and other locational factors. The price estimation can take into account local currency. In step  3604 , the application displays the optimal settings for the newly serviced/installed equipment. While the process described hereinabove, in connection with  FIG.  33 AE , makes reference to an application that could be used by a servicer/installer, pool control logic  70  could also accomplish these same steps. 
     It is noted that global positioning and geo-fencing systems could be utilized with the systems of the present disclosure to provide a servicer with service opportunities (e.g., time to service/replace existing equipment). For example, a smart device having a global positioning system could be used to alert the servicer of service opportunities when an application on the smart device recognizes that the current location of the smart device is within a specified range of a geo-fenced area around a site having equipment in need of servicing/replacement. In this regard,  FIG.  33 AF  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by notifying a servicer of servicing opportunities around his/her current location. In step  3608 , an application receives current location data (e.g., GPS coordinates) from a smart device. The application could run on the smart device, a laptop, a remote server having a web-accessible user interface, or any other suitable mobile device that can accompany the servicer/installer. In step  3610 , the application receives the location of equipment and date of service/installation from the cloud within a specified range (e.g., location and service/installation dates of equipment within 50 miles. In step  3612 , the application determines if any of the equipment within the specified range needs servicing/replacement. In step  3614 , the application places a geo-fence around sites with equipment needing servicing/replacement. In step  3616 , the application determines if the current location of the smart device (e.g., mobile device running application and carried by the servicer) is within a geo-fenced area. If a negative determination is made, the process reverts to step  3608 . If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3618 , where the application transmits a notification to the servicer/installer (e.g., location of site, equipment needing service/replacement, past issues, etc.) and the process reverts to step  3608 . While the process described hereinabove, in connection with  FIG.  33 AE , makes reference to an application that could be used by a servicer/installer, pool control logic  70  could also accomplish/be used in connection with these same steps. For example, pool control logic  70  could transmit the location and service date of the equipment to the cloud or same the data to memory, where the data is later accessed by the application, or pool control logic  70  could determine if any of the equipment needs servicing/replacing and transmit a notification to the application regarding same. 
       FIG.  33 AG  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of a maintenance/targeted marketing system in accordance with the system of the present disclosure for notifying a pool/spa owner that equipment is in need of service. In step  3620 , the maintenance system receives (e.g., from pool control logic, cloud, servicer, etc.) data on the location of equipment and date of service/installation. In step  3622 , the maintenance system determines if any equipment needs servicing/replacement. In step  3624 , the maintenance system cross-references the location of the equipment needing servicing/replacement with a customer information database (e.g., house phone, cellular phone, home address, email address, etc.). In step  3626 , the maintenance system transmits a notifications to owners/users with equipment needing servicing/replacement (e.g., robo-calls, SMS messaging, letters, emails, etc.). 
       FIG.  33 AH  is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the pool control logic  70  for limiting the operation of pool devices when the an adult is not present. In step  3628 , pool control logic  70  retrieves pool location, geometry, and orientation data from memory. The pool location, geometry, and orientation data can be obtained by way of the process described herein, in connection with  FIG.  33 A . In step  3630 , pool control logic  70  places a geo-fence around the pool/spa area. In step  3632 , pool control logic  70  receives operational data from a smart device of an adult/parent (e.g., GPS coordinates). In step  3634 , pool control logic  70  determines if the smart device is within the geo-fenced area. If a positive determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3636 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool devices to operate in “Adult Mode” (e.g., parent, adult-only, features enabled) and the process reverts to step  3632 . If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step  3638 , where pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to the pool devices to operate in “Safe Mode” (e.g., parent, adult-only, features disabled) and the process reverts to step  3632 . 
       FIGS.  34 A- 34 J  are diagrams showing additional embodiments of the pool and/or spa control system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  4610 . More specifically,  FIGS.  34 A- 34 J  illustrate modular relays  4670 , a wiring hub  4646 , and a control module  4661  provided in accordance with the present disclosure. 
       FIG.  34 A  is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  4610 . In this embodiment, network connectivity and remote monitoring/control is provided by way of a wiring hub  4646  which can be easily mounted to a variety of surfaces (discussed hereinbelow in connection with  FIGS.  34 F- 34 I . The wiring hub  4646  provides connections for various pool and spa equipment, such as a variable speed pump  4614   a , a single-speed pump  4613 , and a legacy heater  4615 , as well as other equipment. For example, the hub  4646  could communicate with and control a smart valve actuator  4614   e , and/or lighting system  4614   h . Optional smart control relays  4670  could also be in communication with the hub  4646 , or could communicate with any other HUA (e.g., a unique addressing system, digital, analog or mechanical switches or dip switches) enabled pool/spa component capable of receiving or assigning a network address. 
     As can be seen, the hub  4646  could be in communication (e.g., using any of the wired or wireless connections and associated communication protocols discussed hereinabove) with a control module  4661  having a user interface  4660 . The user interface device  4660  could include physical keys, a digital display, and/or a touchscreen  4662 , as shown in  FIG.  34 A . Any other suitable input technologies, or any combination thereof, could also be utilized, thereby enabling a user to interact with the pool and/or spa control system  10 . Additionally, the control module  4661  could provide a WiFi hotspot for allowing a service provider&#39;s cellular telephone, tablet computer, or other mobile computing device  4644  to communicate with the system  10 , and to control the pool/spa equipment shown in  FIG.  34 A . Communication between the service provider&#39;s cellular telephone, tablet computer, or other mobile computing device  4644  and the system  10  could be established using the user interface  4660  (e.g., using physical keys, a digital display, and/or by touch) or by proximity to the control module  4661 , described in greater detail hereinbelow. A breaker panel  4627  provides electrical power to the various devices shown in  FIG.  34 A . Breaker panel  4627  could also be a smart circuit breaker (e.g., a circuit breaker that can be controlled via wired or wireless communication) used to provide and/or to interrupt power to the devices disclosed herein. In some embodiments, photovoltaic (e.g., solar) cells and/or systems could provide electrical power to one or more of the various devices shown in  FIG.  34 A . The hub  4646  could also communicate with the homeowner&#39;s WiFi router  4622  via the control module  4661 , thereby providing an Internet connection to the pool/spa components in communication with the wiring hub  4646 . A remote pool/spa server  4618  could communicate with the router  4622  via the Internet, to provide remote monitoring and control of the pool/spa equipment, if desired. Additionally, the server  4618  could communicate with one or more remote computer systems  4620  such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, a remote computer system, home automation, etc., if desired. The pool/spa control logic discussed herein could be installed in the server  4618 , in one or more of the remote computers  4620 , and/or in the control module  4661 , if desired. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  34 A , the system could include a control/UI/WiFi module  4661  which includes an external controlling unit  4660  having a user interface (“UI”) display  4662 , a control board with processor and memory (not shown), and which is able to communicate with a home router  4622  by way of a wired or wireless connection (e.g., integral WiFi/cellular/RF, wired Ethernet, and/or an external WiFi/cellular antenna). More specifically, the Control/UI/WiFi module  4661  could include a printed circuit board (not shown), a control module having a processor and memory, a graphical user interface display  4662  (e.g., LCD, LED, buttons, knobs, capacitive plastic, etc.), a WiFi module, ethernet jack, USB port, LEDs, a sealed enclosure, a mounting bracket (e.g., for mounting the module  4661  to a wall, post, pole, plumbing, etc.), and a means for communication with a wiring hub  4646 . In other embodiments, the control module  4661  could be mounted on or inside another piece of equipment such as, for example, a pump, heater, chlorinator, control, timeclock, etc.) The control module  4661  could communicate with the wiring hub  4646  by way of either wired (e.g., RS485, ethernet, USB, serial, etc.) or wireless (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee, ZWave, cellular, thread, etc.) communication protocols. 
     The wiring hub  4646  includes an enclosure, provisions for wire routing (meeting or exceeding IPxx ingress protection standards), a printed circuit board, and a power cord “whip” (cable). The wiring hub could be provided with communication interfaces for receiving and transmitting data to one or more devices. For example, the wiring hub could communicate with, temperature sensors, external sensor, flow sensors, pressure sensors, chemical and physical property sensors, valve actuator ports, RS485 bus connections (for smart devices, smart relay(s), smart (firmware assisted) valves, smart sensors, and other smart devices) chlorination connections, lighting connections, power connectors, low voltage relays, etc. Additionally, the communication interfaces could also be used to expand the functionality of the wiring hub such as, for example, by being used to interface with wireless communication chips (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee, ZWave, cellular, thread, etc.), and additional communication modules. 
     The Control/UI/WiFi module  4661  is used to monitor, activate, and operate installed pool equipment. The control module  4661  could operate the equipment as needed with people present or absent, in the pool or around the backyard, which may be year-round and/or all-day based on application (e.g. residential vs. commercial) or location. The control module  4661  also monitors, detects, informs, and initiates protective action through a heuristic capability (using one or more algorithms) by accumulating and analyzing raw sensor data and external data to automatically develop ‘normal’ and ‘abnormal’ operating ranges, then taking action or alerting operators when the algorithm detects that operation is out of normal or safe operating range. The heuristic algorithms can also learn from operator response to a condition, and therefore account for factors not anticipated or sensed by the equipment. Such algorithms could be implemented in any of the embodiments discussed in the present disclosure, and need not be limited to the control module  4661 . 
     The control module  4661  provides for distributed (e.g., the control module can be moved throughout the pool/spa environment based on the particular needs of the pool/spa environment and needs/wants of the pool/spa user) control of pool equipment and conditions that can be moved according to the specific needs of a particular pool/spa environment and/or user. For example, the control module  4661  could be moved away from the power switching or pool equipment to a remote location, closer to the wireless network, or closer to the home, or closer to wherever the user is (e.g., poolside). In addition, the control module  4661  could also allow for full pool control capability to be moved, or transferred, to a remote location from the pool pad, such as for example, to a cloud server  4618  or to a remote office. 
     The connection to the wiring hub can be extended or virtualized via communications protocol over other mediums. The wiring hub  4646  could locally switch power or the wiring hub  4646  could command smart relays  4670  (discussed hereinbelow) to switch power or control signals. The wiring hub  4646  could further be provided with “limp mode” behaviors (discussed in greater detail hereinbelow) if communication to the controller is severed or impaired. These behaviors could include, but are not limited to, maintaining interlocks between relays, schedules, or other special behaviors that are intended to keep the pool system functional at a reduced level until normal operation is restored. The wiring hub  4646  could also integrate safety control functions needed for heating or other appliances, or the wiring hub  4646  could directly communicate with such safety controls. 
     The control module  4661  and wiring hub  4646  could be mounted on a wall, on a post, on a stake (e.g., rebar), on a piece of plumbing, inside or on a piece of existing pool/spa equipment (e.g., pump, heater, chlorinator, existing automation, etc.). Further the control module  4661  and wiring hub  4646  may be mounted together in a single location or mounted separately. 
     The wiring hub  4646  could provide power to the control system by tapping existing power connections at the load end of the conduit coming from a sub panel, timeclock, control, junction box or other electrical connection to the powered equipment. After turning off the power at breaker  4627 , a pool installer or service professional could remove the power whip from the existing equipment, and then reconnect the power whip to the wiring hub, thereby providing power to the wiring hub and control module  4661  without having to access the line voltage compartment of an electrical panel. Further, a new whip could then be connected to the wiring hub  4646  which could, in turn, deliver power from the wiring hub  4646  to additional powered equipment (see  FIGS.  34 B and  34 C ). For example, an existing power conduit from a variable speed pump  4614   a  or a single speed pump  4613  could be disconnected from the variable speed pump  4614   a  and then plugged back into, or otherwise connected to, the wiring hub  4646 . A new power whip could then be used to connect the wiring hub  4646  to the variable speed pump  4614   a . Further, a communication cable (e.g., RS485) could be connected between the wiring hub  4646  and the variable speed pump  4614  to provide communication therebetween. In another example, the installed power conduit from a heater  4615  could be disconnected from the heater  4615  and then plugged into, or otherwise connected to, the wiring hub  4646 . A new power conduit could then be used to connect the wiring hub  4646  to the heater  4615  and a communication cable (e.g., RS485) could be connected between the wiring hub  4646  and the heater  4615  to provide communication therebetween. In a further example, the installed power conduit from a powered device (e.g., pump, heater, chlorinator, cleaner, transformer, etc.) is disconnected from the powered device and then reconnected to an input of the wiring hub  4646 . A new power conduit cable is then used to connect the wiring hub  4646  to a smart relay  4670  and an additional power conduit cable is used to connect the smart relay  4670  to the powered device (e.g., pump, heater, chlorinator, cleaner, transformer, etc.). As illustrated in  FIG.  34 F , the wiring hub  4646  and/or control/UI/WiFi module  4661  could also be powered directly from a 120V/240V NEMA style plug, thereby qualifying as a cord-connected appliance. Because safety codes allow for increased flexibility in the location and mounting of cord-connected appliances, the labor to install or retrofit the devices is reduced, and the accessibility to the user, installer, or site wiring technician is improved. The modular nature of the wiring hub  4646  and control module  4661  provides for configurations thereof that are tailored for integration with the installed pool/spa equipment (e.g., such as a pump, heater, chlorinator, etc.) or that can remain in stand-alone configurations, thereby providing flexible communication to the controlled devices (e.g., via a wired or wireless connection). It is within the scope of the present disclosure that any and all of the pool control logic described herein could be located in and run from the wiring hub  4646  and/or the control module  4661 . 
     The modular relays of the present disclosure could be used in connection with both residential and some commercial applications. The modular relays provide control (e.g., activation and deactivation) of a piece of pool equipment based on a control signal received from a controller (e.g., control module  4661 ) or local manual input (discussed hereinbelow). For example, the modular relay  4670  could be used to control a pump, cleaner booster, spa booster, heater, pool lights, spa lights, landscape lights, post lights, accent lights, other types of lights, fans, chlorinators, water feature pumps, pond pumps, and cleaners, as well as additional pieces of electrically powered/controlled pool/spa equipment and yard equipment/devices. The modular relay  4670  could include a printed circuit board, a processor, an HUA (e.g., a unique addressing system, digital, analog or mechanical switches or dip switches), activation and/or deactivation button, status LEDs, a relay (s), an enclosure with multiple power entries, a power cord whip, and wired (e.g., RS485, USB, ethernet, etc.) and/or wireless communication (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE, ZWave, Zigbee, cellular, thread, mesh, etc.) interfaces for communicating with the controlling hardware. 
     The modular relay  4670  can be controlled by a variety of controlling devices. For example, the relay  4670  could be controlled on schedule (e.g., existing timeclocks  4672 ), using an algorithm (e.g., controller/pool control logic  70 ), through user input (e.g., a button on the modular relay), from a web enabled device (e.g., through the cloud, the router or direct) or in stand-alone manual mode. The controlling devices could include, but are not limited to, a pump, a heater, a cleaner, a salt chlorinator, a lighting controller, a chemical automation system, a hub or an existing controller, a smart phone, tablet, computer, or smartwatch, or a voice enabled device (e.g., Amazon Echo). 
     The modular relay of the present disclosure could be capable of detecting when there is no communication from a controlling system/device, if the modular relay has not yet been configured, or if the modular relay has been improperly operated or installed, and in response, placing itself in stand-alone manual or ‘limp’ modes. 
     In stand-alone mode (as well as service, manual, limp or other modes which are independent from commands from a controller), the relay can operate independently of the pool/spa control system. For example, in the event that communication with the control system could not be established, the modular relay could automatically enter standalone mode. In standalone mode, the modular relay could provide a visual indication (e.g., a flashing or steadily illuminated multicolor LED status indicator) that communication with the control system could not be established, or that communication has been severed. The modular relay could then implement a limp mode for the relay. In limp mode the modular relay could still be activated in response to timed events/schedules. The behaviors of the modular relay when in manual or limp modes could be defined by firmware or set by user preference, thus providing the ability to maintain a schedule, always turn off, always turn on, switch to a special schedule, or other actions intended to maintain the water body while the pool/spa control system is in a state of reduced functionality. 
     The relay could also enter service mode in response to motion or other proximity detection (e.g., when a service provider is in close proximity to a piece of pool/spa equipment), geofencing (e.g., when a service provider enters the vicinity of the pool/spa area), voice command (e.g., in response to audible request to “enter service mode”) or a button press (e.g., a physical “service” button located on the relay). Service mode could also allow a technician to temporarily operate the relay and then pass control back (e.g., manually or via a timer) to the controller. The modular relay device could also allow local control (e.g., by touch or voice) at the smart relay without disabling remote control. 
     In an exemplary embodiment the relay could enter service mode in response to a service provider being in close proximity to the relay. For example, an application running on the service provider&#39;s mobile device could communicate with the relay using any of the communication protocols heretofore described and grant the service provider access to configuration parameters for the relay and/or the pool control system  10 . In further embodiments, additional security measures could be implemented for preventing unauthorized access to the configuration parameters. For example, a password could be required for access to the configuration parameters. The password could be stored within the application so as to auto-populate and unlock the system parameters when the service provider is in close proximity to the relay. Alternatively, the service provider could be prompted for a password when in close proximity to the relay. Multiple passwords could be set so as to unlock various system parameters associated with individual passwords. For example, a service provider password could be used to unlock all of the system parameters, whereas a pool user password could only unlock a subset of the system parameters. 
     The modular relay could indicate the status of the modular relay through LEDs (e.g., integrated into the modular relay), text, graphics, or sound (e.g., provided on a user interface device), or directly to web, WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee enabled devices (e.g., smartphones and other mobile devices). For example the status indications could include, but are not limited to, power, Internet connection, communicating with the system, no communication with the system, WiFi connected, no WiFi, controlled mode, service mode, enabled or disabled, current, voltage, run-time history, actuation history, etc. 
     The smart relay can identify itself to a controller (e.g., by providing a physical or network address, or by asking for an address to be provided by the controller automatically), thereby allowing the modular relay to communicate with, and be controlled by the controller. The modular relay could also be manually given a particular network address. The controller could control one or a plurality of relays independently, in a timed sequence, or simultaneously. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  34 A  discussed in greater detail hereinbelow, the modular relay device could be provided with its own proprietary/dedicated electrical/junction box (“enclosure”) for one (e.g., relay  4670 ) or a plurality of relays (e.g., wiring hub  4646 ), but could also be installed in an existing single gang, dual gang, timeclock, or non-traditional electrical/junction box. As shown in  FIGS.  34 G- 34 I , the proprietary/dedicated enclosure of the modular relay device could be provided with a multitude of means for mounting the enclosure to the pool pad. For example, the means for mounting the enclosure could include, but are not limited to, hose clamps, screw holes, rebar mounts, zip-tie holes, etc.  FIG.  34 F  illustrates the modular relay  4670  with integral means for mounting to a plumbing pipe (e.g., rounded back).  FIG.  34 G  illustrates the modular relay  4670  with integral means for mounting to a pole (e.g., rounded back).  FIG.  34 H  illustrates the modular relay  4670  with integral means for mounting to a post or wall (e.g., screw bosses).  FIG.  34 I  illustrates the modular relay  4670  with integral means for mounting to rebar inserts (e.g., rebar holders). A secondary structure could also be provided and could include one or more of the means for mounting the enclosure. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  34 B , the modular relay device could include an incoming (power) whip/connection (including conduit connection hardware) for conducting power from the supply (e.g., breaker panel). The connection could be built in, attached, supplied or purchased separately. According to the embodiment illustrated in  FIG.  34 B , incoming whip(s) could connect to an existing sub-panel, timeclock enclosure, or junction box with conductors connecting to existing equipment&#39;s power connection and the opposite end of the incoming whip(s) could connect to the relay connection in the modular relay system inside the enclosure. It is desirable to utilize the existing whip to connect the breaker panel  4627  to the wiring hub  4646  or another intermediary piece of equipment (e.g., timeclock  4672 ) so as to avoid entering/accessing the “hot” section of the breaker panel  4627  or subpanel. 
     Whips can enter and exit the enclosure from the same side (e.g., both entering and exiting the bottom of the enclosure as shown in  FIG.  34 B ) or from opposite sides (e.g., from a side to the top or bottom, from the top or bottom to the side, or from the top to the bottom or bottom to the top, etc.). The whips could be coupled to the enclosure using straight connections, using 45 degree or 90 degree conduit connectors, or low profile connectors. Standard conduit connectors could be used or proprietary connections could be added to improve simplicity of connections. The threading of the conduit connectors could be male or female, or alternatively, the conduit connectors and the enclosure need not use threading at all. Additionally, there can be a conduit entry and/or exit in the cover of the relay or relay enclosure. All of the conduit entries/exits and conduit connectors discussed hereinabove could also have integral liquid tight cord entries for ease of installation. Accordingly, the modular relay device enclosure is designed such that it readily accepts incoming whips from existing equipment (e.g., sub-panel, timeclock or junction box, etc,) and exiting whips to the powered and controlled device. 
     The enclosure of the modular relay device could have relays that are detachable, that are integral, or that are integral and fully potted. Further, the relays could be permanently installed, mounted by way of screws, or could be mounted by way of a hinged connection (inside or outside) with one or more screws. 
     The modular relay device could have a ground fault circuit interrupter (“GFCI”), arc fault, or other protective circuit built into the relay. The modular relay device could also measure load power, supply voltage, contact closure, contact resistance, or general contact health. In addition, the modular relay device could measure circuit or ambient temperature, or sense water flow or temperature via an attached sensor. The inclusion of GFCI or other safety functions could satisfy wiring requirements without needing an additional (and expensive) GFCI breaker. 
     The relay could be encased/over molded into a line cord, thereby allowing a servicer/installer to remove the existing whip from the power supply (e.g., breaker panel) to the piece of equipment and replace it with a new line cord having an integral relay. It is desirable to utilize the existing whip to connect the breaker panel to the wiring hub so as to avoid entering/accessing the “hot” section of the breaker panel or subpanel, and use the new over molded line cord with integral relay to connect the wiring hub and piece of pool/spa equipment. However, the new over molded line cord with integral relay could be used to connect breaker panel and the wiring hub, and the existing whip could be used to connect the piece of pool/spa equipment and the wiring hub. The new line cord could further include a means to communicate with the controller (e.g., RS485, USB, Ethernet, Bluetooth, WiFi, Zigbee, Cellular, Thread, LE Bluetooth, any mesh type network, etc.). 
     The relay could also include a number of additional smart relay capabilities that could allow for the addition of other circuitry, inputs, or external communication modules. For example, the modular relay device could accept sensor inputs (e.g., temp, light, wind, etc.) or external data (e.g., storm detection, web servers, GPS inputs for geo fencing, etc.). It is within the scope of the current disclosure that any and all of the pool control logic described herein could be locate in and run from the relay  4670 . 
       FIG.  35    is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the system of the present disclosure, wherein a wireless communication device, indicated generally at  4800 , provides communication between pool/spa components or equipment, a home router, and the internet. The wireless communication interface  4800  allows pool controlling devices (e.g., pump, heater, chlorinator, cleaner, hub, automation, etc.) to communicate with the home router and thereby communicate with the Internet. The wireless communication device could be located directly on the main (intelligence) printed circuit board (“PCB”), could be attached/plugged into the main PCB, could be provided as a modular upgrade to the main PCB or PCB enclosure, could be a modular upgrade to/external to the main PCB enclosure, or could be located remotely to the main PCB enclosure. As shown in  FIG.  35   , an antenna could be mounted with (internal antenna  4804 ) or remote to (external antenna  4816 ) a wireless transceiver module  4802  in the embodiments described herein. The wireless communication interface  4800  could also allow pool controlling devices to directly communicate with web enabled devices (e.g., smartphones, tablets, thermostats, voice enabled devices, etc.) without the need to go through a home router. Additionally, the wireless communication interface  4800  could provide communication between the pool/spa components or equipment and the web/cloud server, thereby providing tools and indicators to assist a user in solving connectivity problems with the controller through the server/cloud and to the consumer and apps. 
     As shown in  FIG.  35   , the wireless communication interface  4800  includes a protocol processor  4808 , a radio circuit  4810 , and an antenna  4804  and could be installed directly on the circuit board of the controlling equipment. In another embodiment, the wireless communication interface  4800  could have a secondary external antenna  4816  that could be installed for better connectivity (e.g., signal strength) or for placement at a location closer to the home router. 
     The wireless communication interface  4800  could also include a printed circuit board, a protocol processor  4808 , an HUA module  4812  (e.g., for providing a unique hardware address), a radio circuit  4810 , an antenna  4804 , status LEDs  4814 , an ethernet/USB/RS485/Bluetooth connection  4806 , and an enclosure that could be mounted using the enclosure itself or using a secondary mount. For example, a secondary mount could be provided for mounting the wireless communication interface  4800  without (or with) the use of tools (e.g., by snapping the antenna to the mount or other suitable methods). In addition to, or in place of, the ethernet/USB/RS485/Bluetooth connection  4806 , the wireless communication interface  4800  could include any wired or wireless communication protocol disclosed herein for communicating with the controller hardware. 
     An antenna (internal antenna  4802  or external antenna  4816 ) is used to communicate commands from remote web enabled devices (e.g., wireless devices) to a controller unit, which activate equipment as needed with people present or absent, in the pool or around the backyard, which may be year-round and/or all-day based on application (e.g. residential vs. commercial) or location. Additionally, the wireless communication interface  4800  could communicate with the controlling devices by way of RS485, USB, Bluetooth, ethernet, cellular, WiFi, Zigbee or other communication protocols. For example, the antenna  4802  could facilitate communication with the home router through WiFi, Cellular, Bluetooth, ethernet, or other communication protocols. 
     The wireless communication interface  4800  could also be provided with a button to activate service/troubleshooting indicators (e.g., LEDs  4814 ) to provide information relating to the status/connectivity problems of the wireless communication interface  4800 . For example, the wireless communication interface  4800  could be provided with LED indicators  4814  which could be illuminated in various colors (e.g., black, green, orange, red, etc.) and activation patterns (e.g., solid, blinking, etc.) based on the status of the wireless communication interface  4800 . For example, a green LED could indicate normal operation, a yellow LED could indicate an issue that can be addressed by the user, and a red LED could indicate an issue that needs to be addressed by a service provider. The status LEDs could further include a power icon LED (indicating bad cable, no power, power ok, WPS activation), a router icon LED (indicating router not present, incorrect password, no IP address assigned, router DHCP error, incompatible router/black listed firmware or model), a web icon LED (indicating web not present, no UDP connection allowed, no remote server found, connected to web server), an Internet icon LED (indicating no internet/no google, high error rate, connected to the internet), a signal strength LED (indicating not configured, out of range, weak signal, 75% or greater signal), a quality of signal LED (indicating error rates via a bar graph, high error rate, strong connection/low error rate), and a connection speed LED (indicating reduced connection speed/sufficient connection speed). Additionally, the LEDs could indicate the status of the connection as illustrated in Table 1 below. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                 TABLE 1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 LED State 
                 Connection Status 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Power: Off 
                 No Power, USB/Wire Corruption 
               
               
                   
                 Power: Off 
                 No SSID Password 
               
               
                   
                 Router: Blinking 
                 No IP Address 
               
               
                   
                 Internet: Off 
                 No Internet Access (No Google) 
               
               
                   
                 Router: Blinking 
                 No DHCP Server Response 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Static Only) 
               
               
                   
                 Router Config: Blinking 
                 No IP Path −&gt; Remote Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Internet is OK) 
               
               
                   
                 Router Config: Blinking 
                 No UDP to Remote Server (Firewall) 
               
               
                   
                 Radio Link: Blinking 
                 High Error Rate 
               
               
                   
                 (Break Out) 
                 No Network Connection 
               
               
                   
                 Internet: Blinking 
                 Frequent Internet Response Delays 
               
               
                   
                 Slow Flicker on 
                 Past Issue Not Currently Happening 
               
               
                   
                 High Trending Issue 
               
               
                   
                 Power: Slow Flicker 
                 Firmware Needs Update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 radio, host, optional, urgent 
               
               
                   
                 Power: Slow Flicker 
                 WPS for Unknown Password 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The connection status could also be communicated through the controller user interface (e.g., a status page) to help installers/users identify communication problems with the cloud and/or application using similar multicolor status indicators as described above. For example, all faults could be provided in a list with one color (e.g., green) or another color (e.g., red) indicators to identify a connection problem area. The status page could also provide a solution to a particular connection problem associated with a color. Further, the system could prompt the user to contact the manufacturer in the event that a problem is not known or that the problem is known to not be resolvable through a troubleshooting manual. 
     The status page could be activated through a service button (e.g., provided on the control device, pool/spa equipment, or in an application) to allow a web-enabled device to obtain the status of the wireless communication interface via an application. For example, the application status page could provide all of the faults in a list with green or red indicators to easily identify problem areas, a description of the solutions to particular problems, a walk-through presentation on how to address/fix the problem, and/or a video illustrating how to address/fix the problem. The application could also provide a configuration walk-through page to instruct a user on how to configure the wireless communication interface. The configuration walk-through page could be activated through a service button. The application could also connect to a service to provide remote customer service via a web-enabled controller which could allow the service provider to remotely troubleshoot and fix the problem with minimum user interaction. 
       FIG.  41    is a flowchart illustrating installation steps, indicated generally at  6000 , for installing the pool and/or spa control system  4610 , as described above in connection with  FIGS.  34 A- 34 J  of the present disclosure. Additionally,  FIGS.  42 A- 42 I  are diagrams further illustrating the installation steps of  FIG.  41   . 
     As shown in  FIG.  41   , in step  6002 , a pool or spa installer or service professional, hereinafter “installer,” could mount the wiring hub  4646 , described hereinabove, in an existing pool or spa environment (e.g., at a pool equipment pad). For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 A , an existing pool or spa environment could include a lighting system  4614   h  having a switch  6028  (e.g., a single-gang light switch), a single-speed (e.g., booster) pump  4613 , an existing filter pump (e.g., single or variable speed)  4614   a , a heater  4615 , timers or timeclocks  4672 , and a power source  4627  (e.g., a breaker panel). Existing power conductors  6030   a - c  could provide power to existing pool or spa devices directly from the power source  4627  or via intermediary devices (e.g., switch  6028  or timeclocks  4672 ). Accordingly, the power conductors  6030   a - c  could include power cables, conduits, and the like. The existing pool or spa environment could also include any of the other pool or spa devices disclosed herein. The wiring hub  4646  could be provided with any of the mounting means described above in connection with the smart relay  4670  and shown in  FIGS.  34 G- 34 I . For example, the means for mounting the wiring hub  4646  could include, but are not limited to, hose clamps, screw holes, rebar mounts, zip-tie holes, etc. 
     Optionally, in step  6014 , the installer could also mount a control module  4661 . The control module  4661  could be mounted at a location proximate to the wiring hub  4646  (see  FIG.  42 B ), or could be removably affixed such that it can be moved according to the specific needs of a particular pool or spa environment and/or user. For example, the control module  4661  could be removably affixed such that the control module  4661  could be moved away from the pool pad to a location closer to a wireless network, a home, or to any convenient location for the user (e.g., poolside). The control module could also be provided with any of the mounting means described above in connection with the smart relay  4670  and shown in  FIGS.  34 G- 34 I . Further, while the wiring hub  4646  and control module  4661  could be provided as separate components, it is within the scope of the present disclosure that some, or all, of the functionality of the control module  4661  could be integrated into the wiring hub  4646 . Accordingly, wiring hub  4646  and control module  4661  could be provided as a single, integral component, thereby eliminating the need to separately mount control module  4661 . 
     In step  6004 , the installer could disconnect an existing power conductor from an existing pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 C , existing power conductor  6030   a  could be disconnected from existing filter pump  4614   a . In step  6006 , the existing power conductor can be connected to the wiring hub. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 D , the end of existing power conductor  6030   a  that was disconnected from variable speed pump  4614   a  could be connected to an input of wiring hub  4646 , thereby electrically coupling the power source  4627  to the wiring hub  4646  (e.g., via timeclock  4672 ) and providing power thereto. In step  6008 , a first end of a new power conductor can be connected to the wiring hub and then in step  6010 , a second end of the new power conductor can be connected to the existing pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 E , a first end of new power conductor  6032   a  is connected to wiring hub  4646  and a second end of the new power conductor  6032   a  is connected to the existing variable speed pump  4614   a , thereby electrically coupling the power source  4627  to the existing variable speed pump  4614   a  (via the wiring hub  4646 ) and providing power thereto. This installation method enables a service provider to install the wiring hub  4646  and provide power to one or more devices therefrom without having to access the line voltage compartment of an electrical panel. Importantly, as discussed above, the wiring hub  4646  can control operation of the existing variable speed pump  4614   a  by controlling the power provided thereto based on, for example, any of the control logic  70  discussed in connection with control system  10  of the present disclosure. 
     In step  6012 , communication is established between the wiring hub and the control system of the present disclosure. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 E , a communications cable  6034  could couple the wiring hub  4646  and controller  4661 , providing two-way communication therebetween. As described above, the wiring hub  4646  could communicate with the control system  4610  via the controller  4661 , or the wiring hub could communicate with the control system  4610  via an integral communications module. Optionally, in step  6026 , the controller  4661  can be connected to a homeowner&#39;s WiFi network and the controller can be configured. 
     According to further optional aspects of the present disclosure, the wiring hub can provide communication between newly installed or existing smart pool or spa devices (e.g., devices having network communication capabilities) and the control system of the present disclosure. In optional step  6016  of  FIG.  41   , an installer could replace an existing pool or spa device (having no network communications capabilities) with a smart pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 F , the existing filter pump  4614   a  shown in  FIGS.  42 A-E  has been removed and a smart variable speed pump  4614   b  has been installed in its place. 
     In step  6018 , a second end of the new power conductor can be connected to the new smart pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 G , a first end of new power conductor  6032   a  is connected to wiring hub  4646  and a second end of the new power conductor  6032   a  is connected to the smart variable speed pump  4614   b , thereby electrically coupling the power source  4627  to the smart variable speed pump  4614   b  (via the wiring hub  4646 ) and providing power thereto. 
     In step  6020 , communication is established between the wiring hub and the smart pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 I , a communications cable  6034  could couple the wiring hub  4646  and smart variable speed pump  4614   b , providing two-way communication therebetween. As described above, the wiring hub  4646  could communicate with the control system  4610  via the controller  4661 , or the wiring hub could communicate with the control system  4610  via an integral communications module. Accordingly, communication between the control system of the present disclosure and the smart variable speed pump  4614   b  is provided by way of wiring hub  4646 . Importantly, as discussed above, the wiring hub  4646  can control operation of the smart variable speed pump  4614   b  based on, for example, any of the control logic  70  discussed in connection with control system  10  of the present disclosure. 
     According to further optional aspects of the present disclosure, the wiring hub can provide communication between additional newly installed or existing smart pool or spa devices and the control system of the present disclosure. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 H , smart relays  4670   a - b  could be installed to provide control of existing pool or spa devices (e.g., lighting system  4614   h  and single speed pump  4613 ) by the control system of the present disclosure. 
     In order to install a smart relay  4670   a - b  according to the present disclosure, an installer can first disconnect an existing power conductor from an existing pool or spa device as shown in step  6004  of  FIG.  41   . For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 H , a first end of existing power conductor  6030   b  could be disconnected from the single speed pump  4613 . In step  6021 , an installer can mount a smart relay device as described above and shown in  FIGS.  34 G- 34 I . For example, the means for mounting a smart relay  4670  could include, but are not limited to, hose clamps, screw holes, rebar mounts, zip-tie holes, etc. In step  6022 , the installer then connects the existing power conductor to the smart relay. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 H , the first end of power conductor  6030   b  that was disconnected from the single speed pump  4613  is reconnected to an input of the smart relay  4670   a . In step  6024 , an installer can connect a new power conductor to the smart relay and then in step  6010 , the new power conductor is also connected to the existing pool or spa device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 H , a first end of a new power conductor  6032   a  is coupled to the smart relay  4070   a  and a second end of the new power conductor is coupled to the existing single speed pump  4613 . 
     In step  6025 , communication is established between the smart relay and the wiring hub. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 I , a communications cable  6034  could couple the wiring hub  4646  and smart relay  4670   a , providing two-way communication therebetween. As described above, the wiring hub  4646  could communicate with the control system  4610  via the controller  4661 , or the wiring hub could communicate with the control system  4610  via an integral communications module. Accordingly, communication between the control system of the present disclosure and the smart relay  4670   a  could be provided by way of wiring hub  4646 . 
     According to further aspects of the present disclosure, a smart relay could be configured to replace a light (or other) switch, thereby providing for control of a lighting system (or other system or device controlled by a switch) by the control system of the present disclosure. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 H , an installer could remove a single-gang lighting switch  6028  (see  FIG.  42 G ) and replace it with a smart relay  4670   b . As shown in  FIG.  42 I , a communications cable  6034  could couple the wiring hub  4646  and smart relay  4670   b , providing two-way communication therebetween and providing for control of the existing lighting system  4614   h  by the control system of the present disclosure. Importantly, as discussed above, the wiring hub  4646  can control operation of the smart relays  4670  based on, for example, any of the control logic  70  discussed in connection with control system  10  of the present disclosure. According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the smart relays could also communicate directly with the control module  4661  or other controller of the control system by way of any wired (e.g., RS485, ethernet, USB, serial, etc.) or wireless (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee, ZWave, cellular, thread, etc.) communication protocols discussed herein. 
       FIG.  42 I  illustrates additional aspects of control system  4610  of the present disclosure. In addition to the devices discussed above, the wiring hub  4646  could accept connections from and provide for control of additional pool or spa devices. For example, the wiring hub could provide power to and/or control a smart valve actuator  4614   e  or heater  4615  and the wiring hub  4646  could be coupled to and receive information from a plurality of sensors  4626 , for example, air and water temperature sensors. Importantly, in addition to, or in place of, the communications cables  6034  shown in  FIG.  42 I , the pool or spa devices of could be communicatively coupled by way of any wired (e.g., RS485, ethernet, USB, serial, etc.) or wireless (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, Zigbee, ZWave, cellular, thread, etc.) communication protocols discussed herein. 
       FIG.  43    is a system diagram which illustrates a recommendation system  6100  for recommending upgrades to pool/spa equipment. The system  6100  can include a pool or spa equipment pad  6102  having at least one of a pump, filter, heater, chlorinator, controller, lights, or other pool or spa device (or any combination thereof). The present disclosure is not limited to any specific device within the pool or spa equipment pad. A servicer who services a customer&#39;s pool or spa can use his or her smartphone  6104  to take a photograph of the pool or spa equipment pad  6102  using a camera  6106  on mounted and installed with the smartphone  6104 . The servicer can use the regular camera application included on the smartphone  6104 . Alternatively, the servicer can launch the camera functionality of the smartphone  6104  using an application provided by the system of the present disclosure as will be discussed in greater detail below. In either scenario, the smartphone can provide “guides” to position and orientate the product in the camera application to aid in image capture and recognition. The data captured by the smartphone (e.g., in the photograph taken by the smartphone) can be a barcode or other image code on a pool device. The smartphone can also capture data labels on a product. Once the servicer takes a photograph of the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 , the smartphone  6104  can upload at least one digital photo  6108  to a network  6110  (e.g., the Internet) for transfer to other computer systems as will be explained in greater detail below. The digital photo  6108  can be stored in a database and retrieved for future reference by a help desk or a service desk, if desired. 
     The digital photo(s)  6108  can be transmitted to and received by a computer vision computer system  6112  for processing the digital photo  6108  using suitable computer vision software to determine the make, model and manufacturer of all of the pool equipment on the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 . The computer vision system  6112  can process a digital photo  6108  having a picture of just one component of the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 , or it can process a plurality of components on the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 . The computer vision computer system  6112  could include the IBM Watson or Google Lens systems which can process the digital photos  6108 . These computer vision systems can process to the photos to determine the make, model and manufacturer of the device. The digital photo can be of the pool itself and the computer vision system can process this photo to determine the size of the pool and the amount of gallons of water in the pool by using the camera lens parameters such as a the amount of feet the camera is from the ground and the amount of feet the camera is from the pool. The system can use this information to solve for the depth of the pool and the other dimensions and thereby determine the amount of gallons and pool size. The size and capacity of water of a pool can be used to make certain recommendations as will be explained in greater detail below. 
     The data relating to the equipment on the pool or spa equipment pad  6102  can be sent to a pool analytics computer system  6114 . The pool analytics computer system  6114  can use the data generated by the computer vision computer systems  6112  to determine if there are upgrades or replacements products that may be of interest to an owner of the pool or spa. For example, if the computer vision computer system  6112  determines that a pool or spa equipment pad  6102  has a variable speed pump that is two years old and a newer model has greater energy efficiency or more pumping speeds, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can recommend to the servicer or the pool owner that it may be time to upgrade to newer model. Alternatively, with respect to chlorinators, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can determine whether the pool or spa equipment pad has an older chlorinator and whether a newer model exists to provide additional benefits such as extending the life of chlorination cells, killing more bacteria, or reducing the overall chlorine demand. If such a determination is made, then the pool analytics computer system  6114  can recommend an upgrade to the newer model and specifically identify a device which will provide the greater benefits. With respect to pool automation, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can determine the make and model of a pool controller and determine whether a newer version exists that provides greater benefits such as more control over the pool or spa environment or a faster processor or better hardware in general. If this is the case, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can make a recommendation to upgrade to a certain newer device. With respect to pool lights, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can determine the make and model of lights being used anywhere in the pool or spa environment, and can determine if a newer version of lights exists that provide enhanced benefits such as more fixed colors, more light shows, less energy usage, and more brightness. If this is the case, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can recommend an upgrade. The above examples are for illustration purposes only and can apply to any type of upgrade for any type of device in the pool or spa environment and does not necessarily have to be limited to components on a pool or spa equipment pad  6102 . It should be noted that the computer vision services provided by the computer vision computer system(s)  6112  could also be performed on a smartphone  6104 , if desired. 
     The pool analytics computer system  6114  can be programmed and updated with information relating to new devices and new features that improve upon preexisting device to offer upgrades. The pool analytics computer system  6114  can include a database with features associated with a make and model of a device. Those features can be compared with a plurality of newer models, and computer code can apply logic to determine whether the features of the new device offer improvements over the old versions. For example, if a certain variable speed drive is rated with a certain energy performance, and a newer model is rated with a better energy performance, then the system can make a positive determination that an upgrade can be recommended. Alternatively, the pool analytics computer system  6114  can make suggestions for replacement equipment that may be better suited for a certain pool or spa environment than an existing device. For example, if a pool or spa equipment pad  6102  has a variable speed drive rated for a pool having a capacity of 15,000 gallons, but the pool actually has a capacity of 20,000 gallons, then the pool analytics computer system  6114  can recommend a variable speed drive rated at 20,000 gallons and provide the reason for the recommendation. The system can determine the size of the pool by an input from the servicer, by a database search based on the home address of the owner, by automatically using a geolocation of the digital photo  6108  as will be discussed in greater detail below, or by leveraging the photo of the pool as discussed above. 
     In an alternative embodiment, the system  6100  does not need to have a separate computer vision computer system  6112 . Rather, the entire logic of the computer vision computer system  6112  can be done by the pool analytics computer system  6114 . In this case, the digital photos  6108  can be directly received by the pool analytics computer system  6114  for processing to determine the make and model of the pool devices on the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 . 
     The system can use the algorithms of the computer vision computer system  6112  and the pool analytics computer system  6114  to extract user data from the digital photos taken on the servicer&#39;s smartphone. For example, the data which can be determined includes model number and the data relating to the model number (power requirements, etc.). The data can also include serial number and date of manufacture. The data can also include the date the device was installed which can be obtained from the servicer phone. The data can also include geolocation/home address from the phone or cooperative application as will be discussed herein. The data can also include the installing company information and the installer&#39;s name which can be default parameters entered by a servicer. The data can also include a home owner&#39;s name which can be auto populated from address and geolocation information as discussed herein. This can be updated or overridden by the servicer or installer. The data can also include MSRP or price information of the devices, which the servicer can override and which the system can leverage the override information to provide better pricing information to the manufacturers of the devices. The data can also include cost of installation which can be provided by the installer and which can also be captured by the system to provide that information to the manufacturer so that the manufacturer can provide better price estimates for installation in the future. The data can also include information about one or more utility companies servicing the pool owner&#39;s home and the ability to select the one or more utility companies in the user interface as will be discussed below. The utility information can be captured by determining the geolocation information from the servicer smartphone and using a database based on the location to determine which utility or utilities service that area. Moreover, the data can include annual energy cost which can be determined by using the geolocation information to determine power costs at that location from the utility and a formula to make the calculation. 
     The system can use the algorithms of the computer vision computer system  6112  and the pool analytics computer system  6114  and the data gathered to provide auto-warranty registration and auto-rebate submissions. For example, the system can automatically register a product with the manufacturer by determining the information of the product and the pool owner information as discussed herein. Moreover the system can automatically apply for utility company rebates based on the information of the product and the pool owner information. Moreover the system can automatically apply for manufacturer rebates based on the information of the product and the pool owner information. As discussed herein, the system can automatically determine product information with computer vision systems and the pool owner information with geolocation. The system can automatically connect with a utility or merchant submit to automatically submit a rebate or the system can auto-populate a relevant form for the pool owner to allow for the owner&#39;s review and submission. These automatic procedures can be accomplished by using barcode information taken from the servicer&#39;s smartphone and geolocation information from the data capture as discussed herein. 
     Still with respect to  FIG.  43   , once the pool analytics computer system  6114  generates a recommendation for upgrading or replacing the pool devices on the pool or spa equipment pad  6102 , it can send a customized upgrade/replacement sales data  6116  over the network  6110  back to the servicer smartphone  6104 . Alternatively, this data can be also sent to a home owner smartphone  6118 . Alternatively, this data can be also sent only to the home owner smartphone  6118 . The data  6116  can be presented to the user in the form of a user interface screen as will be discussed in greater detail below. Once the servicer receives the data  6116  on his smartphone  6104 , the servicer can share these details with the homeowner or owner of the pool, and can discuss the upgrades further. Alternatively, the servicer can share the data  6116  with the homeowner by sending the data  6116  over the network  6110  to the homeowner&#39;s smartphone  6118 . Alternatively, as mentioned above, the homeowner and servicer can receive the data  6116  contemporaneously on each of their smartphones. 
       FIG.  44    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps  6120  carried out by the system of  FIG.  43   . The process can begin with step  6122 , wherein the servicer captures a photo or a plurality of photos of the pool pad or any particular pool equipment with the servicer&#39;s smartphone. The process can then proceed to step  6124  where the photos taken in step  6122  are transmitted to a computer vision computer system. The process can then proceed to step  6126  where the photo(s) can be processed by computer vision algorithm(s) to identify pool/spa equipment types and model numbers. The process can be then proceed to step  6128  where pool and spa equipment types and model numbers are transmitted to a pool analytics computer system. As discussed above, the transmission and processing of the photos in steps  6124  and  6126  can occur in the pool analytics computer system. The process can proceed to step  6130  where the equipment type and model numbers are processed by recommendation algorithm(s) at the pool analytics computer system(s) to identify suitable upgrade and/or replacement equipment. As noted above, the pool analytics computer system(s) can generate recommendations based on new equipment with enhanced features or provide recommendations to adopt certain pool equipment to replace current pool equipment not suitable for the current pool or spa. The process can then proceed to step  6132  where customized sales forms/screens can be generated with pre-populated upgrade and/or replacement equipment (generated by the recommendation algorithm(s)) and transmitted to a servicer&#39;s smart phone. The process can then proceed to step  6134  where a customized sales forms/screen can be displayed to a service provider. 
     Optionally, as shown in  FIG.  44   , after step  6122 , the process can proceed to step  6136  where geocoding information can be extracted from the photos taken by the servicer on his smartphone. Smartphone camera applications can provide geocoding/geolocation/geotag information with geocoding/geolocation/geotag information. Alternatively, this information can be extracted using the smartphone GPS data. The process can then proceed to step  6138  where the pool owner information is determined using geotag information extracted in step  6136 . This can include a pool owner&#39;s home address. Once a home address is determined, a database of records can be searched to determine the pool equipment at that home. A computer vision algorithm does not need to process the photos because the geocoding/geolocation/geotag information can provide a means for determining the pool equipment by determining the pool owner&#39;s address and the pool equipment being used at the address through database searching. A home owner&#39;s email address can be extracted using the geocoding/geolocation/geotag data by determining a home address and cross references a database relating the home address or home owner personal identifying information. This information can be automatically populated in the user interface screens as will be discussed below. 
     With reference to  FIGS.  45 - 48   , the user interface screens generated by the system  6100  of  FIG.  43    and the process  6120  of  FIG.  44    will now be discussed in greater detail.  FIG.  45    illustrates an initial user interface screen generated by the system. A user profile portion  6200  is provided which can be populated with pool owner information such as owner name, street address, email, zip code, total gallons, months operating, whether there is a pool, a pool and spa, pool control, and comments with respect to customer hassles. As noted above, the user profile portion  6200  can be automatically generated by the geocoding/geolocation/geotag information extracted from the servicer&#39;s smartphone which can use this information to retrieve an address and the address can be used with a database to populate the other fields. Alternatively, a servicer can manually enter a customer name which the system can take as an input and can automatically populate the rest of the fields based on an address book or database with fields related to a customer name. Alternatively, an incoming call from a customer can use the phone number from the caller ID to query a database having the rest of the information related to the phone number, which the application can use to auto-populate the remainder of the fields. If all of the information does not get populated, the system can alert the servicer and the servicer can request the information from the pool owner. Customer hassles can be automatically extracted by the system based on the types of pool and spa components detected in the equipment pad  6102  or can be manually entered by the servicer. The screen can also include top level menus for the pool and spa devices including, but not limited to, pumps, lights, heaters, cleaners, controllers, and chemical automation. A user of the application can choose any one of the product category buttons  6202  or can choose more than one. 
       FIG.  46    is drawing of a user interface screen illustrating recommendations relating to upgrading pumps. This screen can include a pool owner profile portion  6200  which can include the pool owner&#39;s information as discussed above with respect to  FIG.  45   . This screen can be displayed after the user selects one or more of the product category buttons  6202  as discussed above in connection to  FIG.  45   . The screen can also include a plurality of columns  6204 . Column  6204   a  can provide context to the rows. For example, column  6204   a  can include at least one pump which can have a general description such as “circular pump #1” or “pump #2 spa or water feature.” Column  6204   a  can also include a portion for specifying the upgrade number being suggested for each general pump, such as “upgrade 1,” “upgrade 2,” to “upgrade n.” The screen can also include the following columns: column  6204   b  can include an existing product; column  6204   c  can include a list of quantities to be recommended; column  6204   d  can list the make and model of the replacement models if any, which can be populated automatically by the recommendation systems and methods discussed above in connection with  FIGS.  43  and  44   ; column  6204   e  can include a cost for the replacement devices; column  6204   f  can include the estimated labor costs of the replacement models; column  6204   g  can include consumer benefits for using the recommended upgrades over current devices; column  6204   h  can include an amount of energy savings for each of the recommended products if applicable; column  6204   i  can include an amount of energy savings per year for each of the recommended products if applicable; column  6204   j  can include a list of rebates if applicable; column  6204   k  can include comments with relating to the recommended products; and  62041  can include timing information on when the recommended product should be installed. 
     As can be seen in  FIG.  46   , fields  6206   a ,  6206   b ,  6206   c , and  6206   d  can relate to the specific details about the current devices being used in the pool or spa which can be populated automatically by the computer vision and/or geo-location systems and methods discussed above in connection with  FIGS.  43  and  44   . This auto-populate feature can happen in real-time upon the servicer taking a photograph of a pool or equipment pad, or the fields can auto-populated based on a previous photo from a previous visit by the servicer. Fields  6208   a ,  6208   b , and  6208   c  can be selected by a servicer by, for example, tapping the field which causes the system to display a color or pattern over the field. By doing so, the servicer can highlight his or her recommendation of which replacement product the pool owner should purchase out of a plurality of automatically recommended replacement products with respect to the current device in column  6204   a . Columns  6204   h ,  6204   i , and  6204   j  can be auto-populated with a real-time computer communication with a utility company or a database having the information. Columns  6204   d ,  6204   e  and  6204   f  can be auto-populated as prices are known and labor costs can be estimated, and the servicer or a dealer can manually update such costs before they are presented to a pool owner or in real-time. The servicer or dealer can modify the price and estimated labor for the consumer products in a source database or such modifications can exist in a limited database on the servicer or dealer device. Column  62041  can be modified by a servicer by any means such as a drop down menu provided by the user interface. 
     Once the servicer finishes making recommendations with respect to pumps as shown in  FIG.  46   , the servicer can select another device category in same screen and the system can repeat the process as discussed above in connection with  FIG.  46   . The servicer can then select a recommended device among automatically generated recommendations within the new device category. The servicer can repeat this process for all relevant device categories that are available for a pool or spa. Alternatively, as mentioned above, the servicer can select more than one device category which can prompt the system to recommend products for all devices relating to the selected device categories. The pool owner can receive the automatically generated recommendations and the servicer&#39;s choice among them by an email, text, or link to an application on the owner&#39;s smartphone for retrieving the user interface screen of the system of the present disclosure. 
       FIG.  47    illustrates the user interface screen of  FIG.  46    after the servicer has selected a replacement product. In particular, this user interface can include the same information as the user interface of  FIG.  46    such as pool owner profile information and replacement products along with the servicer recommendation. As can be seen, a pool owner can select a replacement on his/her own smartphone or on the servicer&#39;s smartphone or through any other means. Once this selection is made, the system can cause the replacement product details to be highlighted in a different color or pattern as shown in  6210   a - 6210   b . As can be seen, the servicer recommended a replacement product in field  6208   a  and the pool owner followed the recommendation by selecting the product as shown in  6210   a . Moreover, with respect to another device in the pool or spa environment, the servicer recommended a product among a plurality of automatically recommended products in field  6208   b  but the pool owner selected another product recommended automatically by the system of the present disclosure as shown in field  6210   b . Still further, with respect to yet another device in the pool or spa environment, the system recommended a plurality of devices and the servicer chose one of them in field  6208   c , but the pool owner decided not to upgrade as no device was selected. By selecting and authorizing work to be done and a replacement product to be installed, the system can generate a work order and can generate a servicer or dealer invoice for the pool owner. The invoice can provide a summary sheet for future upgrade recommendations for remaining upgrade opportunities. 
       FIG.  48    is a drawing illustrating another embodiment of the user interface screen of the present disclosure. The user interface screens can be modular and flexible and can be easily modified by a servicer or programmer to remove, swap, move, or modify the various columns. For example, additional columns can be included such as replacement part number 6212a, VPL (ea)  6212   b , VPL (ext′d)  6212   c , est′d labor (ext′d)  6212   d , and utility rebate  6212   e . It should be noted that other types of equipment including, but not limited to, filters and cleaners can be included in the user interface screen. 
       FIGS.  45 - 48    are merely example embodiments of a user interface screen generated by the system of the present disclosure. As noted above, the screens can be customizable to include any types of inputs or fields to display information helpful to a user. The system can also be programmed to generate a screen that can be customized by the servicer or the pool owner. The system can include a memory to store user screen preferences of the pool owner and servicer and can automatically display the preferred user interface layout for each user. The user interface screens can include recommendations for a plurality of devices or a single device as described above. The user interface screens can include any combination of devices in a pool or spa environment. For example, with respect to  FIGS.  46 - 47   , only pumps are shown, but this can include all the other types of devices in a pool or any combination of those devices. 
     It should be noted that the disclosure with respect to recommending upgrades or replacement pool device with respect to  FIGS.  43 - 47    can be used in conjunction with the disclosure with respect to  FIGS.  33 AD and  33 AE . 
     It should be noted that the databases that can be relied upon by the system of the present disclosure include a servicer database, a utilities database, a manufacturer database (having dealer, consumer, equipment pad, and product information), and an equipment pad profile database. These databases can be combined or separate. 
       FIG.  49    is a system diagram which illustrates a monitoring and control system  7100  for monitoring and/or controlling pool/spa equipment  7102 , according to the present disclosure. The system  7100  is able to aggregate information from a variety of sources (e.g., operational data from connected devices, sensor data, web data, historical trends, etc.), process that information (e.g., via machine learning algorithms), and using the processed information, control the pool/spa equipment, preemptively address problems before they occur, and/or provide alerts if a problem does occur. The system  7100  can further provide documentation of problems, provide suggested solutions to problems, identification of problems prior to a pool/spa service technician (“servicer”) arriving on-site, and identification of problem causation. The system  7100  is able to provide the aforementioned benefits utilizing combinations of one or more of hardware (system controllers, smart/connected pool/spa equipment, sensors, etc.), applications (e.g., smartphone applications, servicer systems, etc.), and cloud integration (e.g., central management/control, data storage, machine learning/analytics, etc.). According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the system  7100  can identify an alert condition (e.g., decibel level from pump microphone/sensor is exceeding historical levels), determine if a problem exists (e.g., decibel levels from pump indicative of shaft bearing failure within 30 days), provide a solution to the problem (e.g., replace shaft bearing within 30 days), and generate a list of materials needed to implement to solution (e.g., one new shaft bearing, one new shaft seal, two O-rings, shaft grease, etc.). The system  7100  can also determine where the materials can be located (e.g., in a servicer&#39;s monitored inventory, at a local distributor, online distributor, etc.), determine lead-times for the materials (e.g., in inventory, available to ship in 2 days, available for pickup at distributor, etc.), and order the materials if requested. 
     As shown if  FIG.  49   , the monitoring and control system  7100  can include a pool/spa control system  7120  for controlling and communicating with the pool/spa equipment  7102 , a sensor hub  7122  in communication with a plurality of sensors  7140 , an analytics system  7114 , and a pool/spa servicer system  7124 . The pool/spa equipment  7102  can include but is not limited to a heating/cooling system  7132 , a pump  7134 , a filter  7136 , and a pool/spa chemistry system  7138 . The plurality of sensors can be configured to gather operational data related to the equipment  7102  as will be discussed in greater detail hereinbelow. 
     The system  7100  is able to monitor and control smart and/or connected devices (e.g., devices which are capable of direct communication with the system  7100  via a data connection) as well as legacy devices (e.g., devices which not are capable of direct communication with the system  7100  via a data connection). For example, as shown in  FIG.  49   , a connected device such as pump  7134  can provide operational data (e.g., pump speed, water pressure, etc.) directly to the system  7100 , and can be controlled by the system  7100 , by way of a data connection (e.g., RS485, WiFi, Bluetooth, ZWave, Zigbee, etc.). However, a legacy device such as heater  7132  may not include a communication bus, or may not otherwise be capable of communication with the system  7100  (e.g., incompatible communication protocols between the heater  7132  and system  7100 ). In this case, sensors  7140  are provided to monitor the operation of the heater  7132  and provide this information (e.g., water outlet temperature) to the system  7100  by way of sensor hub  7122 , discussed herein. The system  7100  is able to control the heater  7132  via a smart relay  7148 , discussed herein, which communicates with the system  7100  and regulates power provided to the heater  7132 . Of course, the system  7100  can monitor and control additional legacy devices in a similar fashion. 
       FIG.  50    is another diagram which illustrates additional aspects of the sensor hub  7122  and sensors  7140  of the monitoring and control system  7100  of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  50   , and described below, data gathered by sensors  7140  and sensor hub  7122  is used by the system  7100  to monitor various characteristics of the equipment  7102  and/or the pool/spa environment. 
     For example, the heating/cooling system  7132  could be provided with a flood sensor  7140   a  to determine if the heat exchanger is leaking so that it can be replaced before heater is damaged. The heating/cooling system  7132  could also be provided with a heater pod  7140   b  that can include multiple sensors (e.g., current clamping, vibration, flooding, thermostat voltage, etc.), as well as a thermostat relay, for determining if heat was called for but is not heating, heater power loss, igniter current cycling with re-tries, low gas pressure, ignition failure, blower fan failure, heat run time and energy cost calculation, acting as a remote thermostat and heat shutoff, and providing alerts (e.g., head usage rules are violated). The heating/cooling system  7132  could also be provided with an outlet temperature sensor  7140   c , of an insulated wrap-on variety or similar, that can be used to determine heater efficiency loss due to moisture or a burner issue, that the heater is not firing, or an excessive output temperature caused by low flowrate, shortening the lifespan of the heater. 
     The pump  7134  could be provided with a vacuum sensor  7140   d  in its drain plug, the operational data from the vacuum sensor  7140   d , being used by the system  7100  to determine whether a pump skimmer needs to be cleared and to detect low water below the skimmer. The vacuum sensor  7140   d  could also be used by the system  7100  to clear a loaded pool skimmer or main drain. A flood sensor  7140   e  can be provided, the operational data from the flood sensor  7140   e , being used by the system  7100  to determine shaft seal leakage, so that the seal can be replaced before the bearings are damaged, or to determine that there is a flooded pool pad, so that the pump can be shut off, thereby avoiding emptying of the pool (and potential displacement relative to the water table). Motor temperature sensor  7140   f  and vibration sensor  7141   f  can also be provided, the operational data from the motor temperature sensor  7140   f  and vibration sensor  7141   f , being used by the system  7100  to determine if there is a blocked fan inlet (e.g., by leaves or improper installation), or a broken or fouled fan blade (e.g., via bearing noise). 
     A combination sensor  7140   h  including salinity, water temperature, and flow sensing can also be provided, the operational data from the combination sensor  7140   h  being used by the system  7100  to determine the inlet water temperature for remote heat control, low salinity for salt chlorination control, insufficient flow for heating control, whether backwashing is necessary, whether the pump is running dry, the pool turnover rate or filter schedule assessment, and whether there is an energy savings opportunity by converting a single-speed pump to a variable-speed pump (“VSP”). PH and oxidation reduction potential (“ORP”) sensors  7140   i  can also be provided, the operational data from the PH and ORP sensors  7140   i , being used by the system  7100  to manage pH and chlorine dose by the pool/spa chemistry system  7138 . In addition to, or in place of, the pH and ORP sensors  7140   i , the system  7100  can include water sample mailers  7146 . The water sample mailers  7146  contain sample vials of pool water which can be tested by a service provider. For example, the water samples can be provided with prepaid postage, can be pre-addressed, and can be bar-coded so that a pool owner can easily send a sample of pool water to a servicer if one is requested by the servicer, or if the pool owner required that the water be tested for another reason. The system  7100  could further include smart test strips and the system  7100  could process the data from the smart test strips and suggest an appropriate water treatment. 
     Still with respect to  FIG.  50   , according to some aspects of the present disclosure, the sensor hub  7122  could be provided with integral rain, ambient light, humidity, and air temperature sensors  7140   j . According to further aspects of the present disclosure, the sensor hub  7122  could also be provided with an integrated jug feeder system  7142 , including a peristaltic pump that draws from a container (e.g., jug) of acid, the integrated jug feeder system  7142  being used by the system  7100  to control the pH of the pool or spa water. As an alternative to, or in combination with, the integrated jug feeder system  7142 , the system  7100  can include acid and/or chlorine feed tanks  7144  that include level sensing capabilities that provide additional operational data to the monitoring and control system  7100 , thereby further enhancing automation capabilities. According to still further aspects of the present disclosure, the sensor hub  7122  can include a memory, the memory being used for local storage of acid feeding, chemical dosing, and filtering schedules. The schedules can be manually updated locally, or automatically updated based on algorithms processed by the analytics system  7114 . 
     As discussed above, the system  7100  is able to aggregate information from a variety of sources, process that information, and using the processed information, control the pool/spa equipment, preemptively address problems before they occur, and/or provide alerts if a problem does occur. For example, as shown in  FIG.  51   , the analytics system  7114  of the system  7100  can be in communication with and/or receive information from a historical database  7150 , connected data sources  7152 , and sensor hub data  7154 . The historical database includes a comprehensive data set of historical information (e.g., power, noise, environmental data, water levels, size of plumbing, jets, measured head, failures, normal power draw for a pump, power consumption changes in the months preceding a failure, normal power draw for a chlorination cell, chlorination cell power draw preceding a failure, chlorination cell power draw preceding a cleaning, normal gas consumption of a heater, gas consumption of a heater preceding a failure, gas consumption of a heater preceding a service, etc.), including failures and the conditions preceding failures, which is analyzed (e.g., using machine learning) by the system  7100  to predict failures before they occur and suggest solutions. As the information contained historical database grows, the predictions become increasingly accurate. The historical database  7150  can include historical data gathered from connected pool/spa devices  7102 , data recorded by sensors  7140 , as well as additional historical information gathered and recorded by the system  7100 . In addition to the information collected from a single pool/spa environment (e.g., a pool/spa located at single residence), the historical database  7150  can also contain information related to a plurality of pool/spa environments (e.g., pool/spas located at a plurality of residences or commercial locations distributed across a wide geographic area). 
     The connected data sources  7152  can include up-to-date information retrieved from the Internet, current operational data from one or more connected pool/spa devices  7102 , as well as any other currently available information. For example, the connected data sources  7152  can include, but are not limited to, information related to the time and date, pool mode, pool/spa/spill, weather, air temperature, pool temperature, ORP level, pH level, salt level, water level, sunlight/UV index, approaching storms, wind direction, rainfall, utility costs, utility rebates, utility time of use rates, gas costs, and the like. In addition to being provided to the analytics system  7114 , information from the connected data sources  7152  can also be saved to the historical database  7150  for later retrieval and use by the system  7100 . 
     The sensor hub data  7154  can include current information that is received from the sensors  7140  in communication with the sensor hub  7122 . For example, the sensor hub data  7154  can include, but is not limited to, information related to wind speed, wind direction, ambient light, water turbidity, chlorine level, liquid feed tank level, water hardness, water mix ratio, phosphate level, stray current, pool cover position (e.g., open or closed), candela and/or lumen levels (e.g., for lighting), pool chemistry (e.g., pH, TA, TH, CyA, CL2), and the like, as well as other information received from storm sensors, water sensors, water leak sensors, water fills sensing (e.g., leaks), evaporation sensing and algorithm, vibration sensors, heat sensors, power line sensors (e.g., power digital imprint), noise sensors, music sensors, rain sensors, humidity sensors, and motion sensors (both in and out of water). In addition to being provided to the analytics system  7114 , the sensor hub data  7154  can also be saved to the historical database  7150  for later retrieval and use by the system  7100 . 
     The analytics system  7114  processes the information from the historical database  7150 , connected data sources  7152 , and sensor hub data  7154  to determine information related to the system  7100  that may not be detectable, may be inconvenient, or may be cost-prohibitive utilizing traditional sensing means. For example, a sensor may not be commercially available to determine a shaft seal failure. Further, it could be beneficial to a pool owner or servicer to predict a shaft seal failure before it occurs. 
     Accordingly, the system  7100  of the present disclosure can generate determined information for the pool/spa equipment  7102 . For example, the system  7100  can determine information related to the pump  7134  such as, but not limited to, shaft seals, drive failures, communication failures, seal failures, motor failures, bearing failure/noise, basket level (e.g., low, med, high, etc.), skimmer level (e.g., low, med, high, etc.), filter status (e.g., pressure increasing, time to backwash, etc.), blocked air inlet, fan blade broken, impeller broken or damaged, pump running dry, pool turnover rate, pump run time and energy calculations, pump run time and turnover calculations and energy suggestions, inefficiencies in energy usage because of a problem, and the like. 
     The system  7100  can determine information related to the heater  7132  such as, but not limited to, a board failure, communication failure, ignition failure, igniter cycling, heater power loss, whether the heater is calling for heat but not heating, blower fan failed, a gas leak, kinked line, combustion failure, low gas pressure, no gas available, a water leak, heater run time and energy calculation, heating expense that exceed the pool owner&#39;s historical heating trends, and the like. One example of the above is that a flood sensor can be used to identify that a heat exchanger is leaking. 
     The system  7100  can determine information related to a lighting system (discussed herein) such as, but not limited to, a bulb that is about to burn out, a bulb that is burnt out, LEDs that have failed, that the LED lights are leaking, a low voltage (voltage drop) condition, that the LEDs are dimming from hours of operation, that the lights have been on too long, or the like. 
     The system  7100  can determine information related to a filter system  7136  such as, but not limited to, that it is time to backwash or clean elements, the DE or sand is low, there is leak in the filter, a plug is not plugged in, a gasket seal is not correct, a belly band is not tight enough, there is a leak in an air valve, there is a crack in shell, and the like. 
     The system  7100  can determine information related to the chemistry system  7136  such as, but not limited to, the salt level (e.g., salt needed or excess), board damage, the chlorinator cell is dirty, the chlorinator cell has calcification, the probe is dirty or broken, the probe is out of calibration, that it is time to replace the chlorinator cell, it is time to replace flow switch, the pool needs chlorine, the pool needs acid, the UV lamp brightness has decreased from its initial level, the UV lamp is damaged, the UV lamp needs to be replaced, the feed tank levels for acid or liquid chlorine, that too much acid or chlorine is being used based on historical trends; identification of phosphates, that the pool water is out of chemical balance, what chemicals are needed and how much of them is needed to restore balance, and the like. 
     The system  7100  can determine information related to a pool/spa cleaner system such as, but not limited to, that it is time to empty debris, identification of debris (in or around) the pool/spa, that a drive is failing, that bearings need to be repaired, or the like. 
       FIG.  52    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  of the present disclosure to preemptively address an equipment failure before it occurs. As discussed above the system  7100  could monitor a plurality of pumps  7134  (e.g.,  100  pumps at various sites dispersed in a geographical region). The system can  7100  detect a deviation or change in bearing sound (e.g., increased decibels or altered sound profile) and/or a change in resistance of the pump motor (e.g., increased power draw) from historical trends. The altered sound and resistance data can be compared with information contained in the historical database  7150  to determine the cause of the deviation (e.g., a failing bearing) and a predicted timeline (e.g., the bearing will fail in 30 days). For example, in step  7300  the system  7100  receives operational data from the sensor hub controller (e.g., bearing sound data, motor resistance data, power draw data, etc.) and then proceeds to step  7302 , where the system  7100  processes the operational data to determine the presence of an alert condition (e.g., the pump bearings will fail in 30 days). The system  7100  then proceeds to step  7304 , where a determination is made as to the presence of an alert condition. If a negative determination is made in step  7304 , the system  7100  returns to step  7300 . If the system  7100  determines that there is an alert condition, the owner/customer can be alerted (e.g., via email, SMS/text/iMessage, pop-up notification, etc.) to the condition (e.g., pump failure), a servicer can be alerted that his or her customer&#39;s pump is going to fail, and replacement parts can be automatically ordered and delivered to the servicer or directly to the customer location, all before any adverse condition occurs (e.g., pump failure). The system  7100  could further include an application installed on a home owner&#39;s smart device (e.g., smartphone)  7118  and on a servicer&#39;s smart device  7104  (see  FIG.  49   ) and notifications/alerts can be transmitted via the application, discussed in greater detail below. For example, if a positive determination is made in step  7304 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7306  where a alert condition is transmitted to a servicer (e.g., Customer #1234 pump bearings will fail in 30 days). In step  7308  the servicer addresses the alert condition (e.g., the bearings are replaced prior to failure/predicted failure) and the system  7100  returns to step  7300 . Optionally, in step  7310 , the system  7100  could transmit an alert condition to the homeowner (e.g., pump bearings will fail in 30 days) before proceeding to step  7308 . In further optional step  7312 , the system  7100  could automatically order replacement parts (e.g., new bearings for pump arrive at customer&#39;s location prior to servicer arrival) before proceeding to step  7308 . 
       FIG.  53    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  of the present disclosure to alert a homeowner when current energy usage exceeds historical trends (e.g., the variable speed pump “VSP” has been running on high for 24 hours, the heater has been running for three days at 104 degrees Fahrenheit, etc.). The system  7100  can transmit an alert to a homeowner (or servicer) when a parameter is not running within specification or a parameter is not consistent with historical trends (e.g., too much heating turnover, power consumption, chemical dispensing, water refilling, dropped packets, etc.). For example, in step  7314 , the system  7100  receives operational data from the sensor hub (e.g., energy usage data, pump speed data, heater temperature and runtime data, etc.) and then proceeds to step  7316 , where the system  7100  retrieves historical operational data from the memory (e.g., historical database  7150 ). In step  7318 , the system  7100  determines trends for the historical data and then in step  73120 , the system  7100  compares the current operational data with the historical data trends. In step  7322 , the system  7100  determined whether the current operational data is consistent with the historical trends. If a positive determination is made in step  7322 , the system returns to step  7314 . If a negative determination is made in step  7322 , the system proceeds to step  7324  where an alert condition (e.g., pump has been running at high speed for 24 hours) is transmitted to the homeowner (e.g., via an application running on smart device  7118 ). The system  7100  then returns to step  7314 . 
       FIG.  54 A  is a graphical representation of a historical trend for a normal heat cycle for heater  7132 ,  FIG.  54 B  is a graphical representation of a heat cycle that deviates for the historical trend shown in  FIG.  54 A , and  FIG.  55    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  to restore the heat cycle to normal operation. As shown in  FIG.  54 A , when the heater initially fires, the output water temperature of the heater quickly rises while the input water temperature only gradually increases (e.g., lags behind) due to the large volume of the pool/spa. Both the output and input water temperatures of the heater continue to increase until the output temperature reaches a predetermined setpoint. At this point, the heater stops firing and the output temperature eventually reaches equilibrium with the input temperature. 
     As shown in  FIG.  54 B . if the heater fails to fire, or the heater is continuously cycling (resulting in a reduced output), the system  7100  is able to determine that the heater is failing to fire or that it is cycling by comparing the current output water temperature to the historical trend discussed in connection with  FIG.  54 A  and determining that the output water temperature is below the historical trend. Similarly, the system  7100  can determine if the heater has erroneously continued to fire by comparing the current output water temperature to the historical trend discussed in connection with  FIG.  54 A  and determining that the output water temperature is above the historical trend. 
       FIG.  55    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  in connection with  FIGS.  55 A and  55 B . In step  7326  the system  7100  is initialized, in step  7328  the system  7100  determines whether heating is desired, in step  7330  the system  7100  determines whether the thermostat voltage is acceptable, and in step  7332  the system determines if the water is cold. If a positive determination is made in step  7332 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7334  where the system  7100  determines if the water has been flowing for over a minute. If a positive determination is made in step  7334 , the system proceeds to step  7336 , where the system  7100  determines whether the water is flowing fast enough (e.g., operational data from a flow sensor is above a predetermined setpoint). If a positive determination is made in step  7336 , the system  7100  transmits an instruction to start the heater in step  7338 . In step  7340 , the system  7100  determines whether the heater is operating like it should (e.g., by comparing the current output water temperature to the historical trend discussed in connection with  FIG.  55 A ). If a positive determination is made in step  7340 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7342  where the a determination is made as to whether the water has reached a predetermined setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  7342 , the system  7100  returns to step  7332 . If a negative determination is made in step  7342 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7344 , where a determination is made as to whether the heater daily run time house rules have been exceeded. If a positive determination is made in step  7344 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7346 , where the heater is disabled until the next day and a flag is saved to memory (e.g., historical database  7150 ). Once the next day begins (e.g., after midnight) the system  7100  proceeds to step  7348  where an instruction is transmitted to the heater to restore the heater setpoint to a minimum heater setpoint value and then the system  7100  returns to step  7332 . If the system  7100  determines in step  7340  that the heater is cycling, the system  7100  proceeds to step  7350  where a heater limping cycling alarm is transmitted (e.g., to the homeowner or servicer). If the system  7100  determines in step  7340  that the heater is not running, the system  7100  proceeds to step  7352 , where the system  7100  determines whether four attempts have occurred during an excessive restart alarm. If a positive determination is made in step  7352 , the system proceeds to step  7354  where an alarm lockout is put in place (e.g., heater service required). If a negative determination is made in step  7352 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7356  where a heater excessive restart alarm is transmitted (e.g., no lockout is put in place, but the alarm must be cleared). The system  7100  then proceeds to step  7358 , where the system  7100  determines if the heater has restarted after five minutes of restarting. If a positive determination is made in step  7358 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7360 , where the system initiates a timer (e.g., one hour) and after expiration of the timer, attempts to restart the heater. The system  7100  then returns to step  7332 . It is contemplated by the present disclosure that the system  7100  can be configured to only transmit an alert condition when a significant change from historical trends is detected. This can be accomplished using alert thresholds that are established using hysteresis modeling, thereby preventing erroneous alerts due to signal jitter or the like. 
       FIG.  56    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  to automatically grant a servicer access to the system to perform authorized work. The system  7100  can determine that a servicer is authorized to service a particular account. The system  7100  could identify the servicer by way of the servicer&#39;s smart device  7104  that is registered to the account, by an individually coded key fob, a location pod, or other identification/authorization systems. In one example, the servicer can enter a pool/spa environment, the system  7100  can identify the servicer and that he or she is authorized to perform work and then the system  7100  initiates a servicer mode and alerts the homeowner that the servicer has arrived at the site. Once the servicer has completed the work, the servicer leaves the site and the system  7100  resumes normal operation. For example, as shown in  FIG.  56   , in step  7362  the servicer arrives at the pool/spa location and in step  7364 , the system  7100  identifies the servicer (e.g., by access code, RFID device, geolocation, etc.). In step  7366 , the system  7100  enters a service mode (e.g., transmits an instruction to the pool/spa devices to cease operation). In steep  7368 , the system  7100  transmits an alert to the customer (e.g., “the servicer has arrived”). In step  7370 , the servicer performs authorized work (e.g., cleans the filter baskets) and leaves the pool/spa location. In step  7372 , the system  7100  recognizes that the servicer has left the pool/spa location (e.g., by access code, RFID device, geolocation, etc.). Finally, in step  7374 , the system  7100  returns to normal operation mode (e.g., transmits an instruction to the pool/spa devices to resume normal operation). Optionally, in step  7386 , the system  7100  can save the details of the service call (e.g., date and time of service, work performed, fees, etc.) to memory (e.g., servicer database  7128  or servicer system  7124 ). 
     As discussed herein, geolocation services running on the servicer&#39;s smart device  7104  can be utilized by the system  7100  to determine if the servicer is at the site and register his or her presence in an account history. The location services can also be utilized by the system  7100  to automatically update the application on the homeowner&#39;s smart device  7118  and notify the homeowner that the servicer is present, has left, performed the expected work, etc. Additionally, as discussed in greater detail below, the application can also display information such as water readings (if they were taken by the servicer) and those readings can also be stored to memory (e.g., servicer database  7128 , historical database  7150 , or servicer system  7124 ). Further, the application can also provide real-time updates as the work is performed by the servicer, the reason for the work, and the costs. All of this information can be stored by the system  7100  as data points for future reference and analysis (e.g., machine learning) by the system  7100 . 
     According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the system  7100  can alert the servicer to alert conditions (that the servicer may not have been aware of before arrival) so that he or she can address the alert conditions while on-site. If there is a predicted failure with a piece of pool/spa equipment, the servicer can receive an alert via an application on the servicer&#39;s smart device  7104 . The servicer can then choose to transmit that alert to the homeowner via a similar application on the homeowner&#39;s smart device  7118 . The servicer can also request approval (e.g. with a countdown timer for the current service call or the next) to address the alert within the same application. The system  7100  can also document that the servicer was on site, that an alert was present, that the homeowner was notified of the alert, and the homeowner&#39;s response to the request to address the alert (if one was given). For example, as shown in  FIG.  56   , in optional step  7376 , the system  7100  determines if a new alert condition is present. If a negative determination is made in step  7376 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7366 . If a positive determination is made in step  7376 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7378 , where an alert condition is transmitted to the servicer (e.g., Customer #1234 pump bearings will fail in 30 days). In step  7380 , the servicer can choose to request authorization to address the alert condition. If the servicer chooses to request authorization to address the alert condition, in step  7382 , the system  7100  transmits a work authorization request to the homeowner (e.g., via smartphone application, email, etc.) and in step  7384 , the system  7100  saves the homeowner&#39;s response (or lack thereof) to memory (e.g., servicer database  7128  or servicer system  7124 ). The system  7100  then proceeds to step  7370 . According to some embodiments, the system  7100  can also automatically generate a returned material authorization (“RMA”) and warranty claim submission based on the work performed by the servicer (e.g., pump replacement), information recorded by the servicer via application  7160  (e.g., detailed explanation of reason for RMA or failure mode of part) discussed herein, and/or information saved to servicer database  7128  or servicer system  7124  (e.g., customer information, time and date, etc.). 
       FIG.  57    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  to automatically grant a servicer WiFi access to the system to perform authorized work. When a servicer arrives on-site, the system  7100  can enable a WiFi access point that grants the servicer direct access to the system  7100  without having to log in to the account, homeowner&#39;s WiFi, or the cloud. For example, in step  7386 , the servicer arrives at the pool/spa location. In step  7388 , the system  7100  identifies the servicer (e.g., by access code, RFID device, geolocation, etc.). In step  7390  the system  7100  activates a WiFi access point and in step  7392 , the system  7100  establishes a WiFi connection with the servicer&#39;s smart device. in step  7394  the servicer performs the authorized work (e.g., modifying the controller) and then leaves the pool/spa location. Finally, in step  7396 , the system  7100  deactivates the WiFi access point. 
       FIGS.  58 - 67    illustrate user interface screens of application  7160  that are generated by the system  7100 . The application can be run on the homeowner&#39;s smart device  7118 , the servicer&#39;s smart device  7104 , the servicer system  7124 , or any other device capable of displaying the application and accepting user input.  FIG.  58    illustrates an initial user interface screen generated by the system  7100 . As shown, the initial user interface screen can include a portion  7162  for displaying current weather conditions. Additionally, a user can click on portion  7162  to display an extended weather forecast. A portion  7164  of the user interface can also be used to display current promotional offers to a user. Additional portions of the user interface can also be provided for information related to, and interaction with, one or more of the pool/spa devices discussed herein. For example, portion  7166  can display current heating settings. If portion  7166  is clicked, the user can modify the heater settings (e.g., on/off or variably via a GUI slider or wheel to increase or decrease the temperature). If maximum and minimum temperature setpoint values have been established by an administrator of the system  7100 , a particular user can be prevented from exceeding these values via the application  7160 . According to some aspects of the present disclosure, portion  7166  can also provide additional functionality passed on the number of times it is clicked. For example, a first click could provide access to heater on/off control and manual heat settings, a second click could access heating rules and alarm setup, a third click could access basic heat settings, smart heat settings (e.g., least costly heating option for a desired goal) and heating history, a fourth click could provide access to the head schedule settings, and a fifth click could cause the system  7100  to display a diagnostic screen. 
     Portion  7168  can be used to display information related to a filtration schedule (e.g., showing a countdown to a next filtration event). According to some aspects of the present disclosure, as discussed herein, the system  7100  could store setpoints for a water turnover target, and periods when filtration is not desired (e.g., do not filter start and end times). Portion  7168  could display the status of the pump (e.g., on/off), the measured water turnovers from the previous 24-hour period, the next filter start or stop time, and provide a boost button. 
     The application  7160  can also be used by the system  7100  to display alerts to a user. For example portion  7170  can display the health status of a pool filter (e.g., that a filter is clean or that a backwash is necessary). If an alert is present, service is needed, a response is required, or the like, the application  7160  can display any of the portions in a color which will draw the user&#39;s attention. For example, if the filter is clean and no action is necessary, portion  7170  can be displayed in a blue, or another color, whereas if the filter needs to be cleaned, portion  7170  can be displayed in yellow or another color that will draw the user&#39;s attention. 
     Similarly, portion  7172  can be used to display information related to water quality and can be displayed in a first color (e.g., blue) if the water quality is good and displayed in a second color (e.g., yellow) if the water is unsafe, needs testing, or otherwise requires attention. If water quality is not being directly monitored by the system  7100  (e.g., via pH and ORP sensors) the system  7100  can determine when the water needs to be tested and can alert the user to provide photographs of smart test strips which can then be analyzed by a vision system (discussed herein) in communication with the system  7100  to determine the water quality and display the results. Alternatively, portion  7172  can provide access to a manual test entry screen. 
     According to some aspects of the present disclosure, certain user interface screens of the application  7160  are only displayed based on who is using the application (e.g., homeowner versus servicer). For example, if a user is logged into the application  7160  as a servicer, clicking on portion  7172 , will display a service call log user interface screen, shown in  FIG.  59   . As shown, the service call log user interface screen can display scheduled maintenance intervals and fields for the servicer to record information such as water testing results and general notes related to the customer account. According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the application  7160  can respond to voice commands via voice assistance products (e.g., Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, Microsoft Cortana, Apple&#39;s Ski, etc.), allowing servicers to access and perform work at customer sites without needing to physically manipulate a graphical user interface. 
     Returning to  FIG.  58   , portion  7174  can display available upgrades and energy saving advice, discussed hereinabove with respect to  FIGS.  43 - 48   . If a user clicks on portion  7174  the system  7100  generates a user interface screen displaying further information on the upgrades and/or energy savings advice, as shown in  FIG.  60   . The user interface screen shown in  FIG.  60    can include a first portion  7186  that contains available upgrades and a second portion  7188  that displays upgrades that the user has declined or is not interested in. Clicking on an item or upgrade displayed on the user interface screen of  FIG.  60    will cause the system  7100  to generates another user interface screen, shown in  FIG.  61   , displaying additional information and resources related to the upgrade. For example, through the user interface screen of  FIG.  61   , a user can purchase the upgrade from a distributor or servicer (see  FIG.  62   ), move the upgrade to the user&#39;s shopping list (see  FIG.  64   ), request a quotation, request an in-person sales call, click on a link to visit a manufacturer&#39;s website (see  FIG.  63   ), set a reminder related to the upgrade, or indicate that he or she is not interested in the offer. 
     Alternatively, as shown in  FIG.  71   , if a user clicks on portion  7174  of  FIG.  58   , the system  7100  can generate another user interface screen displaying visual representations of pool/spa equipment that have already been upgraded as well as pool/spa equipment upgrades that are available for installation (e.g., as determined by the system  7100 , discussed above). For example, the user interface screen shown in  FIG.  71    can include portions  7236  that include visual representations (e.g., an image or rendering of a variable speed pump, filter, smart valve, lighting system, etc.) of pool/spa equipment that have already been upgraded and portions  7238  that include visual representations (e.g., image or rendering of a control system, chlorination system, etc.) of available pool/spa equipment upgrades. Clicking on one of the portions  7236  or  7238  can cause the application  7160  to display additional information related to the piece of pool/spa equipment associated with the visual representation. For example, clicking on a portion  7236  showing an image of an installed variable speed pump can cause the application  7160  to display the status of the variable speed pump or provide the option to alter parameters, whereas clicking on a portion  7238  can cause the application  7160  to display information such as component availability, component cost, and installation options (e.g., request a quotation from an installer). According to further aspects of the present disclosure, the portions  7236  and  7238  of the user interface screen shown in  FIG.  71    can be displayed in the form of a puzzle. Further, the portions  7236  and  7238  of the user interface screen shown in  FIG.  71    can together form a complete puzzle based on the number of available upgrades determined by the system  7100 . For example, if the system  7100  determines that two upgrades are available and two upgrades were already installed, the application  7160  will display the puzzle as having four pieces. Similarly, if the system  7100  determines that two upgrades are available and three upgrades were already installed, the application  7160  will display the puzzle as having five pieces. Further still, the application  7160  can display portions  7238  as faded images, visually signaling to the user that additional equipment upgrades are necessary to “complete” the puzzle. 
     Returning to  FIG.  58   , portion  7176  can display a link to a user&#39;s shopping list. Clicking on portion  7176  causes the system  7100  to generate a user interface screen, as shown in  FIG.  64   . The user interface screen shown in  FIG.  64    can include a first portion  7190  that contains a list of items already selected by the user for purchase, and a second portion  7192  that includes a list of recently viewed or recommended items that the user may want to add to the list of items selected for purchase, displayed in the first portion  7190 . According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the list of items in the first portion  7190  could include checkboxes that are filled and the list in the second portion  7192  could include check boxes that are not filled. Unchecking a checkbox in the first portion  7190  can move an item to the second portion  7192 . Similarly, checking a checkbox of an item in the second portion  7192  can move the item to the first portion  7190 . 
     Returning to  FIG.  58   , portion  7178  can display a link to a learning and troubleshooting area, such as for example, a manufacturer&#39;s web-based support center (see  FIG.  66   ). Similarly, portion  7180  can display a link to a service and support area, such as for example, a designated pool servicer&#39;s portal (see  FIG.  65 A ) where the user can schedule an appointment for service (see  FIG.  65 B ) or initiate direct communication (e.g., instant messaging, email, voice, etc.) with the servicer. Portion  7182  of the application  7160  can display a link to a user interface screen that provides information related to a user&#39;s pool or spa installation, shown in  FIG.  67   . For example, the user interface screen of  FIG.  67    can include photographs of the homeowner&#39;s pool/spa equipment (e.g., picture of a pump, heater nameplate, filter, booster pump, blower, lights, GVA, etc.). These photographs could be stored by the system  7100  or could be stored at another location (e.g., a photograph storage website such as Google Drive, iCloud, etc.) in communication with the system  7100 . The photographs could be uploaded by the homeowner or the servicer and according to some aspects of the present disclosure, the servicer can be required to populate photographs to the system  7100  when performing maintenance or the like. According to some aspects of the present disclosure, a servicer can access the photos remotely, enabling the servicer to confirm that he or she has all required tools and equipment for a particular job prior to arrival on-site. A portion  7184  could display a feedback link to a survey (e.g., survey monkey) where the user can review the servicer and the work performed. 
     The application  7160  can provide linking and/or communication between homeowners and servicers. For example, the application  7160  can link a servicer to a particular homeowner as a servicer of record and rules of engagement and support (e.g., automatic approval up to a certain monetary value, or automatic approval for preventative maintenance) can be established and saved to a homeowner profile. The system  7100  can generate a user interface screen including a list of available servicers (e.g., servicer systems  7124 ) from which the homeowner can select a servicer of record. The servicer of record could have access to all of the information from a particular site that is collected by system  7100 , whereas a servicer that is not of record could only have access to a subset of that information. 
     The homeowner can schedule a service call through the application  7160  or request a service call the next time a servicer is in the neighborhood (e.g., using geofencing surrounding the homeowner&#39;s location and geolocation services on the a servicer smart device or vehicle). For example, when a homeowner needs to refill pool/spa chemicals, the homeowner can request a refill the next time that the servicer of record is in the neighborhood, or the homeowner can request an immediate refill to all servicers in the area. The homeowner request can be transmitted to broadcast system  7126  in communication with the system  7100  (see  FIG.  49   ). The broadcast system  7126  can further be in communication with one or more servicer smart devices  7104  or servicer systems  7124 . Servicer can monitor the broadcast system  7126  and can accept a service request using the application  7160 . Once a servicer has accepted the homeowner&#39;s request, the request can be cleared from the broadcast system  7126 . 
     Alternatively, the system  7100  can automatically request refills for the homeowner based on the current level of the chemicals (e.g., if sensors in communication with the system  7100  are utilized to monitor the levels) and/or based on historical trends (e.g., on average the homeowner requests a refill every X days, or X % of the chemicals are consumed per day). The application  7160  can also generate a user interface screen that provides the homeowner with a map of a geographical area that includes the homeowner&#39;s position, one or more servicers&#39; positions relative to the homeowner, and estimated time of arrival and route tracking if a service appointment has been requested by the homeowner and accepted by a servicer. 
     The application  7160  can also provide a servicer with the ability to provide a quotation to a homeowner, request approval to complete the quoted work, view and record the response, and provide an invoice without leaving the confines of the application  7160 . Further, the system  7100  can generate quotations for the servicer (that he or she can then directly submit to the homeowner for approval) for predicted or preventative maintenance of equipment (based on the installed pool/spa equipment and historical maintenance data) or for service in the event of a problem with a piece of equipment. For example, the application  7160  can include a user interface screen that presents a quotation or contract for the homeowner&#39;s approval, such as a contract to do simple or specific work without requiring a quote or prior approval. 
     The application  7160  can also include dashboard, or summary screen. The summary screen can be manually generated by the servicer, automatically generated by the system  7100  on a periodic bases (e.g., monthly), or continuously updated by the system  7100  in real-time. For example, the summary screen can include energy usage, energy savings, energy savings suggestions, services to be reviewed or provided, periodic service summaries (e.g., weekly, monthly, seasonal, yearly, etc.), periodic alert summaries (e.g., weekly, monthly, seasonal, yearly, etc.), and services or energy costs. 
     As shown in  FIG.  72   , the application  7160  can also generate a series of user interface screens for providing customized alerts to a user based on activities specified by the user, current weather data, and forecasted weather data. For example, a first user interface screen  7240  can include a portion  7246  for displaying current weather conditions (e.g., temperature, cloud cover, wind speed, humidity, etc.), a portion  7248  for displaying a list of specified preferred activities (e.g., swimming, entertaining, sunbathing, gardening, walking, etc.), and a portion  7250  for displaying customized recommendations (e.g., “High winds tomorrow, take furniture in after dinner”). The list of specified preferred activities can include indicia for indicating whether the current weather conditions are appropriate for a specific activity. For example, if a the user specifies that swimming is appropriate between temperatures of 75 and 95 degrees and the current temperature is 86 degrees, the application  7160  will indicate that swimming is appropriate at present. 
     The application  7160  can also display additional user interface screens based on forecasted weather conditions. For example, if a user swipes left on user interface screen  7240 , the application will advance to user interface screen  7242 , which displays the forecasted weather conditions for the next day. It is contemplated by the present disclosure that the application  7160  can display any number of user interface screens for future dates, the only limiting factor being the availability of forecasted weather conditions (e.g., weather forecasts, almanacs, etc.). For example, if the current date is Friday, March 4, swiping left on user interface screen  7240 , will cause the application  7160  to display user interface screen  7242  including information for Saturday, March 5. Similar to user interface screen  7240 , user interface screen  7242  can include a portion  7252  for displaying the date and forecasted weather conditions (e.g., temperature, cloud cover, wind speed, humidity, etc.), a portion  7254  for displaying a list of specified preferred activities (e.g., swimming, entertaining, sunbathing, gardening, walking, etc.), and a portion  7256  for displaying customized recommendations (e.g., “High winds tomorrow, take furniture in after dinner”). The list of specified preferred activities can include indicia for indicating whether the forecasted weather conditions will be appropriate for a specific activity. For example, if a the user specifies that swimming is appropriate between temperatures of 75 and 95 degrees and the forecasted temperature is 72 degrees, the application  7160  will indicate that swimming is not appropriate at present. 
     The user interface screens  7240  and  7242  shown in  FIG.  72    can also include a portion  7258  for providing the user access to a user interface configuration screen  7244 , for example by clicking thereon. As shown, the configuration screen  7244  can include a portion  7260  for displaying a list of common activities (e.g., swimming, entertaining, sunbathing, gardening, walking, sailing, geocaching, bungee jumping, clam digging, mushroom hunting, etc.) from which the user can select his or her preferred activities (e.g., swimming, entertaining, sunbathing, gardening, walking, etc.). Selecting a preferred activity can cause the application  7160  to display a portion  7262  for specifying appropriate conditions for the preferred activity. For example, if the user selects sunbathing as a preferred activity, portion  7262  can be used by the user to specify the air temperature (e.g., 70-95 degrees), water temperature (e.g., any/all), sun (e.g., full/no cloud cover), wind speed (e.g., moderate), and humidity (e.g., any/all) for which sunbathing is appropriate. The system  7100  can compare the user specified conditions for each activity against the current or forecasted weather conditions to determine whether the preferred activities displayed in portions  7248  and  7254  suitable. The user interface configuration screen  7244  can also include a portion  7264  for allowing the user to add an activity to the list of common activities displayed in portion  7260 . For example, by clicking on portion  7264 , the user could add “running” to the list of common activities and then access portion  7264  to specify the desired conditions therefor. 
     As shown in  FIG.  68   , the system  7100  can also include a servicer dashboard  7200 . The servicer dashboard  7200  is an application including a graphical user interface generated by the system  7100  and can be installed on, for example, the servicer system  7124  or the servicer&#39;s smart device  7104 . As shown in  FIG.  68   , the dashboard  7200  can identify the servicer&#39;s accounts (e.g., where the servicer has previously performed work or is the servicer of record)  7208  within a specified geographical area, prospective accounts 7210, and locations  7212  where homeowners have expressed no interest in pool/spa services. The dashboard  7200  can include a graphical user interface portion  7202  for providing an overview of the status of each of the servicer&#39;s accounts (e.g., healthy pools, impaired pools (low chemicals, system check needed, replace component, etc.), pools that are down, pools experiencing problems with communications, past due invoices, etc.). For example, the dashboard  7200  can show that a particular system at a customer site is communicating with the dashboard  7200 , that the system is up to date (firmware), the last time a servicer visited a site, and the health of a system by category (e.g., controls, chemistry, pump, heater, filter, lights, cleaner, etc.). 
     User interface  7202  can also show requests from customers, messages from customers, forum posts made by customers, as well as additional information related to the servicer&#39;s accounts. The dashboard  7200  can also include a graphical user interface portion  7204  showing prospective opportunities for a servicer. For example, portion  7204  can identify equipment needs at the servicer&#39;s accounts, or identify locations where the system  7100  has not been installed. The dashboard  7200 , as well as the application  7160 , can also receive notifications (e.g., push, pop-up, etc.) when the system  7100  determines that a servicer is in close proximity to a prospective opportunity (e.g., a location where the system  7100  has not been installed, a location where equipment needs to be replaced, etc.) or a location where the system  7100  has determined that the homeowner can benefit from replacement of aging or inefficient equipment (e.g., as described herein in connection with  FIGS.  43 - 48   ). 
     Additionally, the dashboard  7200  can also include a graphical user interface portion  7206  including tools for the servicer, such as a route planner (e.g., service or sales) or a means for reordering supplies. For example, the dashboard  7200  can generate a daily route based on a determination of which particular sites require service on a given day and then direct the servicer to his or her appointments in the most efficient manner (e.g., shortest distance), based on the level of complexity (e.g., estimated time for completion), and/or based on revenue/profit maximization (e.g., estimated time for completion versus net profit margin). The daily route generated by the dashboard  7200  can include directions, route overview, materials needed for the service appointments, an estimated time for each service, and the like. For example, the dashboard can generate a list of all the materials (e.g., chemicals, motors, cables, logic boards, sensors, etc.) that a servicer needs for a particular day (or week), so that the servicer can verify that he or she has all of the materials needed to complete the service calls before beginning the daily route, thereby increasing efficiency by minimizing the number of trips a servicer must make to procure materials. 
     The system  7100  can also include a secure service technician portal (“SSTP”). The SSTP can be displayed as a graphical user interface screen on the servicer system  7124  and can provide a servicer access to site parameters, name, address, turnovers, etc., the ability to specify recipients for alerts, etc. The system  7100  can also include a secure administrative portal (“SAP”) that can be displayed as a graphical user interface screen on a manufacturer&#39;s system and can provide the ability to set global parameters, PID coefficients, enter promotional offers, etc. Both the SSTP and the SAP can communicate with and access a configuration database. The configuration database can store configuration parameters and the current status of various pieces of equipment, an alarm dispatch history, a dashboard browsing history, etc. 
       FIG.  69    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the system  7100  to determine that a servicer&#39;s vehicle is stocked with all the materials, discussed above, that a servicer needs for a particular day (or week). In step  7398 , the system  7100  determines the ideal inventory for a servicer&#39;s vehicle. In step  7400 , the system  7100  determines the current inventory of the servicer&#39;s vehicle. In step  7402 , the system  7100  compares the ideal inventory with the current inventory of the servicer&#39;s vehicle. In step  7404  the system determines whether the inventory of the servicer&#39;s vehicle needs to be replenished. If a negative determination is made in step  7404 , the system  7100  returns to step  7398 . If a positive determination is made in step  7404 , the system  7100  proceeds to step  7406  where a list of the required inventory items are transmitted to a distributor (for pick-up or delivery to the servicer). The system  7100  then returns to step  7398 . For example, a servicer&#39;s vehicle can be outfitted with a barcode system, RFID system, or vision system (such as that described above) in communication with the system  7100  for determining the exact inventory of the servicer&#39;s vehicle in real-time. As inventory items are removed from the vehicle, the system  7100  can add those items to a list to be transmitted to a distributor so that they can be restocked. The inventory of the vehicle can then be compared with the list of materials needed for the day (or week). According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the system  7100  can utilize machine learning to analyze data received by the system  7100  (e.g., number of pool/spa locations, age of equipment, historical service requests, etc.) and determine the required inventory list for the servicer&#39;s vehicle. For example, the system  7100  could determine that three sensors, two power cables, two seals, one logic board, twenty bags of salt, and twenty gallons of liquid chlorine should be on the servicer&#39;s vehicle at the beginning of the week. 
       FIG.  70    is a block diagram of the sensor hub  7122 . As described above, the system  7100  can include sensor hub  7122  in for monitoring operational parameters of legacy pool/spa devices (e.g., devices which are not are capable of direct communication with the system  7100  via a data connection). The sensor hub monitors the operational parameters of the legacy devices by way of a plurality of sensors  7140  that are disposed on, or around, the pool/spa devices and that are in communication with the sensor hub  7122 . Each sensor  7140  can monitor one or more operational parameters of a legacy pool/spa device or provide the system  7100  with additional monitoring capabilities for connected pool/spa devices. For example, as shown in  FIG.  70   , the sensor hub  7122  can include a printed circuit board (“PCB”)  7214  having sensor inputs  7216  for a receiving operational data from one or more sensors, such as a line current sensor  7140   k , a water temperature sensor  71401 , a combination water flow and temperature sensor  7140   m , an ambient temperature sensor  7140   n , and a pH and ORP sensing kit 7140p. As shown, the PCB  7214  can include both digital and analog inputs. As described above, the sensor hub  7122  monitors the operational parameters of the legacy pool/spa devices and transmits operational data from the sensors  7140  to the system  7100  via a network  7110 . The sensor hub  7122  can communicate with the system  7100  via any wired or wireless communications protocol (e.g., RS485, WiFi, Bluetooth, ZWave, Zigbee, cellular, etc.). Accordingly, sensor hub  7122  can include an LTE module  7218 , a WiFi transceiver  7220 , or any other network communication bus suitable for providing communication with the system  7100 . 
     The sensor hub  7122  can also include a line power input  7222  for receiving power from a power source. According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the sensor hub  7122  can also include relays  7224  (both high-voltage and low-voltage) for controlling one or more pool/spa devices. For example, the sensor hub could include relays  7224  for controlling an acid feeder  7226 , a chlorine feeder or salt chlorinator  7228 , a variable-speed pump  7230 , and a single-speed pump  7232 . The sensor hub  7122  can also include a housing  7234  enclosing the PCB  7214 , LTE module  7218 , and WiFi module  7220 , and providing access to sensor inputs  7216 , line power input  7222 , and relays  7224 . According to some aspects of the present disclosure, the sensor hub  7122  can be modular, allowing for expansion to monitor additional pool/spa devices or to provide additional diagnostic capabilities. For example, an expansion module could be added to the sensor hub  7122  to provide more advanced machine learning. Expansion modules can also be added to provide enhanced monitoring and control capabilities for acid feeders, chlorine feeders, salt chlorinators, variable speed pumps, single speed pumps, and the like. The expansion module can be provided in the form of an input card on the PCB  7214  or as a separate unit that communicates with the sensor hub  7122  through a communication bus such as RS485 or WiFi. 
     The pool “hub” disclosed herein, as well as the various embodiments disclosed herein, allows for wired and wireless communication (e.g., wireless methods 802.11 protocols, Zigbee, ZWave), with pool pad components. Communication could include product status, product health, energy use (e.g., individual and/or system), errors, preventative maintenance, etc. The hub could incorporate all of the types of communication to the hub and from the hub to the home router. The pool hub could be upgraded through the web, push updates to connected equipment at the pad, etc. The hub could be fully configured (e.g., through an app), which includes schedules, names, temperatures, possible chemical dosage, percentage output, etc. The hub could have web based cloud connectivity to other cloud based devices or systems to allow for enhanced communication and/or enhanced external inputs. The hub could have a communication antenna for RF mesh (e.g., ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave), BlueTooth, etc to connect to pool and non-pool equipment. The connectivity could be done at the pool pad, the processing could be done on the cloud (e.g., with one app built based on activated features). The hub could connect thermal imaging to relay pool, pad, spa, and/or weather information to the hub. The hub could enable virtual interlocks between devices based on predetermined rules and relationships. 
     The system of the present disclosure is modular and can grow with the addition and/or replacement of equipment. More specifically, the system consolidates all products as they are added (e.g., pump, heater, chemistry automation systems), and could only show the ones currently installed. App updates (e.g., for accessing the system from a local device) could come from new compiled code and/or a profile held in the device and transferred to the app. The system could store the operating profile and/or environment of the devices captured by the hub or in the devices and relayed to the hub (which could support the predictive failure ability as well as supports warranty analysis claims). The system could store standard profiles for heater/pump (e.g., Northeast region by zipcode) and/or heater/pump/lights (e.g., Southwest region by zipcode) for easy configuration (e.g., start with standard configurations based on the geography). 
     The system could monitor a variety of types of plug in and/or wireless sensors (e.g., air, pool, spa, solar, temperature, etc.) for a variety of types of measurements (e.g., presence of flow, measurement of flow, line pressure, water levels, UV levels, wind speeds, light presence, etc.). Other types of sensors that could be used include turbidity sensors, bacteria sensors, alkalinity sensors, hardness sensors, RF sensors, sound wave sensors, different light spectrum sensors, reflectors, magnetic sensors, radar, infrared, humidity, evaporation, moisture, motion, galvanic corrosion, chemical corrosion, electrolysis, electrical storm sensors, etc. The sensors could analyze and/or process raw data (e.g., locally sensed parameters, from a third party source, etc.) with an integrated processor or communicate the raw data (e.g., locally sensed parameters, from a third party source, etc.) for processing in a co-located or remote processor. The sensor analysis could incorporate trigger points, trend monitoring, manual correlation analysis, automatic correlation analysis, etc. The sensors could be individual or grouped (e.g., for more efficient connection and/or pairing). 
     The hub could function as a router for data, relay for data, or analyze the data. The hub could have one or many different electrical and protocol data communication interfaces to support connection to legacy and future protocols and devices. The hub could have built in Ethernet (e.g., wired, WiFi, cellular, and/or other), as well as communication with home router and/or direct to cloud (e.g., cellular). The hub could connect through wired (e.g., RS485) and/or wireless communication (e.g., WiFi, Bluetooth, ZWave, Zigbee, etc.) with a pump (e.g., for full variable speed pump (“VSP”) capabilities), heater or heat pump (e.g., for heat control), etc. (i.e., low voltage and/or high voltage applications). The hub could have one or more modular relays or relay banks (e.g., four relays or relay banks). The hub could connect to the relay bank for relay control through wired (e.g., RS485) and/or wireless communication. The relays could be used to control any electrical devices (e.g., high or low voltage), such as pumps, lights, etc. The hub could control wired or wireless valves with transformation at plug or 120V (e.g., to provide power to valve based on hub architecture). The hub could connect to a light controller through wired and/or wireless (e.g., Bluetooth and/or RF mesh such as ZWave, Zigbee, Thread, Weave, etc.) communication, such as to give relay control to a pool, spa, backyard lighting, etc. 
     The system can perform a variety of types of analytics. For example, the system could analyze electrical, gas, and/or propane usage for one or more pool devices, sites, and/or geographies (e.g., based on data from the hub or device). The system could analyze consolidated site information to facilitate creation of algorithms (e.g., to increase efficiency for all users). The system could use historical data trends to predict future trends, future costs, utility budgets, warnings, efficiency change, as well as to offer preventative maintenance, predictive failure, and/or potential downtime risks. The system could communicate with utilities via a web-based API or some other suitable mechanism. The system could use data trends and/or external data to minimize energy usage and/or facilitate energy consumption decisions. The system could analyze data to predict a budget for requested outcomes to give consumers better visibility in their choices. The system could use external web based data to automate decisions based on learned or imputed data or trends. The system could use historical and/or external data to predict outcomes heating or filtering events to increase autonomy and reduce energy usage for these outcomes. The system could use failures, predictive failures or preventative maintenance alerts to automatically assign or request service from a customer or partner. The system could use external data from partners to increase the efficiency, potential decisions, functionality of the hub in the IoT world. The system could use data to adjust automated decisions based on sensors, decision information, inputs from other devices, etc. The system could use flow, pool temperature, air temperature, wind data, etc. to automatically adjust the pool turnover and optimize (e.g., fastest, most efficient) the pool pump for amount of turnover, speed, etc., and/or to automatically adjust the chemical dispensing and/or production to maximize life of cells. The system could use data communicated to the hub from a water leveling sensor to predict leaks and/or water bills, and/or to automatically alert leak repair company that customer has an issue with his or her pool. The system could use web based data (e.g., time of year, sunrise and sunset, time, etc.) to predict light availability and automate changes in device schedules. The system could use consolidated site information to help notify the user of a devices operation through the actions of an alternate device. The system could provide an installer with a step by step interface for product installation when a product is selected. 
     While various forms of web data have been described above in connection with  FIGS.  1 - 33 AH , web data can also include, but is not limited to: environmental conditions such as ambient temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, rain, lightning, snow, cloud coverage, forecasts (e.g., 5 day, 10 day, etc.), pollen, visibility, fog, pollution, smog, road conditions, travel delays, UV index, location, zip code, GPS coordinates, IP address, sunrise, sunset, sun location, wind chill, public water costs, public water availability, public water quality, drought or flood alerts, average chemical costs (e.g., internet costs of chlorine, etc.), tornado/hurricane alerts, etc.; local energy data such as electricity costs, fuel costs, peak hours and cost fluctuation, sun location, available energy rebates, etc.; personal data produced in conjunction with web or web enabled device (e.g., nest, phone, hub, etc.) such as location (e.g., home, away, on the way home, etc.), data usage, amount of web enabled devices used or connected (e.g., five downloaded apps could represent a family of five), energy used (e.g., fuel, electricity, etc.), data speed (e.g., upload/download rate (mbps), ping), etc.; and product data (e.g., in conjunction with registration) such as warranty, age, recalls, tech bulletins, replacement parts, specs, tech support, tutorials (e.g., instructional videos), specials (e.g., coupons, promotions, etc.), local support (e.g., authorized service center), firmware updates, new product releases, pool industry news, safety alerts, safety suggestions, etc. 
     It is contemplated that all of the systems disclosed herein could interface with one or more dedicated/proprietary or 3rd party voice interaction devices (e.g., Apple&#39;s Siri, Amazon Echo, etc.). Pool control logic  70  could interface with the voice interaction devices directly (e.g., Bluetooth), locally (e.g., through network router or mesh network), or via the cloud. The user commands, inputs, actions, etc., described herein, could be provided to pool control logic  70  via the voice interaction device and notifications, messages, alerts, etc., described herein, could be transmitted to the user via the voice interaction device (e.g., verbal notification, messages, alerts, etc.). For example, to activate the lighting system  14   h , a user could simply say, “Alexa, turn on the pool lights.” 
     It is contemplated that that the various devices in the embodiments described herein could also communicate by way of power line carrier (e.g., power-line digital subscriber line (PDSL), mains communication, power-line telecommunications, or power-line networking (PLN)) to allow the various interconnected components to communicate with one another via electrical wiring. 
     It is also contemplated that site data could be replaced with cloud data, or data at the site could be combined with data in the cloud, and the system could intelligently combine disparate data from different cloud servers. 
     Also contemplated is capturing specific equipment data (e.g., bar codes) by a smartphone camera at the site at the time of installation and connecting to an application. This can, at the same time, capture GPS coordinates for the address and date of installation for warranty registration, and automatically load the location of the pool into the pool control logic with cloud support for sunrise/sunset, real time and forecasted weather data. Similarly, by standing by the pool and taking photo of the pool, one can record North-South-East-West (e.g., phone compass) and load similar data into the pool control logic with cloud support for using wind direction as well. If photos are taken multiple times in the day, compass and date information could be used to extrapolate the pool&#39;s sun exposure for pool heating and other calculations. 
     In addition to receiving operational data from locally installed pool/spa equipment, remote data (e.g., an off-site or cloud server) and web data, described hereinabove, it is also contemplated that pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from one or more pieces of pool equipment having enhanced sensing capabilities. For example, the system  10  could include lighting system  14   h  (see, e.g.,  FIG.  1   ) having a smart light  5014   h . More specifically, as shown in  FIG.  36   , smart light  5014   h  could include temperature sensor  5000  (e.g., for temperature sensing of air, water, etc.), microphone  5001 , chemistry sensor  5002  (e.g., for sensing salinity, pH, ORP, TDS, chlorine, etc.), light output sensor  5004  (e.g. for sensing lumen, lux, CCT, CIE, etc.), occupancy sensor  5006  (e.g., IR, sound/audio detection, radar, etc.), water clarity sensor  5008 , water level sensor,  5010 , water pressure sensor  5012 , flow sensor  5014 , turbidity sensor  5016 , user input module  5018  (e.g., touch panel, physical buttons, etc.) and network communication and local control subsystem  12   h  (see, e.g.,  FIGS.  1 - 2   ). The smart light  5014   h  could further include the ability to measure for stray current. The user input module could include touch-based inputs (e.g., capacitive, inductive, fear field RF, etc.). The smart light  5014   h  could further include a display  5019  provided as a separate component or integrally provided with user input module  5018 . The smart light  5014   h  could accordingly be used to display an error message for a fault condition or warning message regarding pool chemistry, or could be used to display any other kind of visual media. Although previously discussed, it is noted that the network communication and local control subsystem  12   h  could communicate with pool control logic  70 , located in one or more of the pool/spa components discussed herein, using any of the communication protocols discussed herein, including but not limited to, power line carrier, ethernet, RF, Bluetooth, WiFi, and Zigbee. Smart light  5014   h  could also record hours of operation, light output, voltage, and current as well as corresponding operating and environmental conditions during use. It is further noted that temperature sensor  5000 , microphone  5001 , chemistry sensor  5002 , light output sensor  5004 , occupancy sensor  5006 , water clarity sensor  5008 , water level sensor,  5010 , water pressure sensor  5012 , flow sensor  5014 , turbidity sensor  5016 , user input module  5018 , and network communication and local control subsystem  12   h  could be incorporated into the a lighting device, or could be provided as an additional attachment to the lighting device body. Further, as discussed above, pool control logic  70  could reside or be run within the smart light  5014   h , in another piece of pool/spa equipment, remotely, or distributed amongst one or more of these locations. 
       FIG.  37    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic  70  for controlling a heater based on operational data received from the smart lights  5014   h  described above. More specifically, multiple smart lights provided in and around the pool/spa could act as a mesh array of temperature sensor inputs for determining the average temperature of the pool/spa and controlling the heater accordingly. In step  5020 , the pool control logic  70  receives operational data, e.g., temperature, from a first smart light. In step  5022 , the pool control logic  70  receives operational data, e.g., temperature, from a second smart light. In step  5024 , the pool control logic  70  receives operational data, e.g., temperature, from the nth smart light. That is, the pool control logic  70  receives operational data for all smart lights in addition to the first and second smart lights discussed in connection with steps  5022  and  5024 . In step  5026 , the pool control logic  70  determines the average temperature off the pool/spa based on the operational data received from the smart lights. In step  5028 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves temperature setpoint data from memory. In step  5030 , the pool control logic  70  determines if the average temperature (determined in step  5026 ) is below the temperature setpoint. If a positive determination is made, e.g., the average temperature is below the temperature setpoint, then the process proceeds to step  5032 , where the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to activate a heater and the process reverts to step  5020 . If a negative determination is made, e.g., the average temperature is greater than the temperature setpoint, then the process proceeds to step  5034 , where the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to deactivate a heater and the process reverts to step  5020 . It is also contemplated that instead of determining the average temperature of the pool/spa, pool control logic  70  could determine the warmest or coolest area of the pool/spa and control the heater accordingly (e.g., warming the coolest area of the pool to a temperature setpoint, or cease warming of the pool when the warmest area of the pool reaches a temperature setpoint). 
       FIG.  38    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic  70  for controlling a heater by determining a predicted temperature setpoint based on previous user specified temperature setpoints. In step  5036 , the pool control logic  70  receives an instruction to activate a heater. In step  5038 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves a first previous user temperature setpoint from memory. In step  5040 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves a second previous user temperature setpoint from memory. In step  5042 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves the nth previous user temperature setpoint from memory. That is, in step  5042  the pool control logic  70  retrieves all other previous user temperature setpoints from memory that are desired. For example, the system can be set-up so that the three (3), four (4), five (5), ten (10), or twenty (20), etc., most recent previous user temperature setpoints are utilized in this process. In step  5044 , the pool control logic  70  determines a predicted user temperature setpoint based on the previous user temperature setpoints retrieved from memory in steps  5038 ,  5040 , and  5042 . This determination can be based on, for example, the mean, median, mode, etc., of the previous user temperature setpoints retrieved from memory. In step  5046 , the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a heater to operate, e.g., until the predicted setpoint determined in step  5044  is reached. 
       FIG.  39    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic  70  for controlling the pool/spa water chemistry by operating sanitization equipment based on operational data received from water chemistry sensors in one or more smart lights  5014   h . In step  5048 , the pool control logic  70  receives water chemistry setpoints, e.g., relating to salinity, pH, ORP, TDS, chlorine levels, etc., from memory. In step  5050 , the pool control logic  70  receives water chemistry operational data, e.g., salinity, pH, ORP, TDS, chlorine levels, etc., from smart light sensors. In step  5052 , the pool control logic  70  determines if the water chemistry operational data (determined in step  5050 ) is within specific levels, e.g., which are based on the setpoints retrieved in step  5048 . If a positive determination is made, then the process returns to step  5050 , where the pool control logic  70  continues to receive water chemistry operational data from the smart light sensors. If a negative determination is made, then the process proceeds to step  5054 , where the pool control logic  70  determines an action to correct the water chemistry, e.g., increase chlorination rate by X %. In step  5056 , the pool control logic transmits an instruction to the chemistry automation system to take corrective action in accordance with the action determined in step  5054 , e.g., increase the chlorination rate by X %, and the process reverts to step  5050 . 
     In accordance with additional embodiments of the present disclosure, using similar processing steps as described in connection with  FIG.  39   , pool control logic  70  could also use operational data received from the smart light  5014   h  sensors to control a robotic cleaner based on operational data received from water clarity sensor  5008  or occupancy sensor  5006 , activate the pump and/or filter based on operational data received from water clarity sensor  5009 , activate water features, actuate valves, or activate the pump based on operational data received from flow sensor  5014 , trigger a house alarm (if armed) based on operational data received from occupancy sensor  5006 , activate the lighting system based on operational data received from occupancy sensor  5006  (e.g., turn on the lights, increase the intensity of the lights, switch light color based on an unplanned occupancy or turn lights on based on time of day, automatically turn off after a period of time if no occupant detected, “follow the swimmer” by only activating the light when an occupant is detected proximate thereto), adjust the water temperature based on operational data received from occupancy sensor  5006 , adjust light output based on operational data received from ambient light sensor  5004 , and adjust CCT based on operational data received from ambient air temperature sensor  5000 . 
       FIG.  40    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the pool control logic  70  for predictively displaying the most popular light show based on previously selected light shows. In step  5058 , the pool control logic  70  receives an instruction to activate a light show. In step  5060 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves a first previously selected light show from memory. In step  5062 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves a second previously selected light show from memory. In step  5064 , the pool control logic  70  retrieves the nth previously selected light show from memory. That is, in step  5064  the pool control logic  70  retrieves all other previously selected light shows from memory. For example, the system can be set-up so that the three (3), four (4), five (5), ten (10), or twenty (20), etc., most recent previously selected light shows are utilized in this process. In step  5066 , the pool control logic  70  determines the most common light show based on the previously selected light shows retrieved from memory in steps  5060 ,  5062 , and  5064 . In step  5068 , the pool control logic  70  transmits an instruction to a lighting system to display the most common light show as determined in step  5066 . It is further contemplated that rather than receiving all of the previously selected light shows from the memory, pool control logic  70  could instead retrieve a set number of most recent light shows (e.g., most recent 10 light shows), or pool control logic  70  could retrieve light shows that were selected within a specified period of time (e.g., light shows selected within the last year). In addition to displaying light shows, it is also contemplated that the smart light  5014   h  could communicate with music and speaker systems to provide a coordinated music and lighting show (e.g., lights change color and intensity, pulse, move, etc. based on a particular musical selection). 
     It is further contemplated smart light  5014   h  could provide for user interaction with the pool/spa control system  10  and pool control logic  70 . As discussed above, the smart light could include a user input module  5018  having touch-based inputs and a display  5019 . For example, the user could use the touch-based controls to adjust the water temperature at the smart light  5014   h , or to modify or change a light show or light color. Similarly, the touch-based controls and display  5019  could be used to virtually configure custom light shows. Additionally, the user could interact with the pool/spa control system  10  using the microphone  5001  (e.g., using voice commands either above or below water). 
     In accordance with embodiments of the disclosure, the pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from a plurality of smart lights  5014   h  disposed about a pool/spa. More specifically, pool control logic  70  could receive operational data from occupancy sensors  5006  in the plurality of smart lights  5014   h . Using the plurality of lights  5014   h  and sensors  5006  as nodes in a mesh array, pool control logic  70  could determine the location of the occupant in the pool/spa. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, the smart light  5014   h  could further perform an optical comparison with a camera to identify when the pool is dirty or contains debris or other particulate. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a plurality of smart lights  5014   h  could be used as an array to provide directional input for a robotic cleaner. For example, as discussed above, pool control logic  70  could determine areas of the pool having high concentrations of dirt or debris. Further, a plurality of smart lights  5014   h  could be disposed about a pool/spa. Pool control logic  70  could then determine the smart light  5014   h  in closest proximity to the debris and send an instruction to activate the smart light  5014   h . The pool cleaner would then detect the light from the smart light  5014 , proceed towards the same, and accordingly proceed towards the area having a high concentration of debris. Alternatively, smart lights  5014   h  could independently illuminate if they determine they are proximate to an area of high debris. The pool cleaner could then proceed to each area of high debris, in turn. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, smart lights  5014   h  could be used to provide light catalyzed chemistry for sanitization by adjusting their light output wavelength. For example, pool control logic  70  could receive an instruction to sanitize the pool/spa. Pool control logic  70  could then retrieve light wavelength sanitization setpoint data from the memory (e.g., sanitization wavelength is 254 nm). Pool control logic  70  could then transmit an instruction to the lighting system  14   h  and/or smart light  5014   h  to operate at the sanitization setpoint (e.g., 254 nm). 
       FIGS.  73 - 85    illustrate components of embodiments of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    and processing steps carried out by the embodiments of the heating/cooling system  14   b .  FIG.  73    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for measuring venting system exhaust pressure, venting system temperature, and detecting changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     A pool heater of a heating/cooling system that is installed in a building or indoor space utilizes a venting system comprising a vent and vent pipes to safely exhaust the products of combustion outdoors. A blockage in the vent and/or vent pipes can result in poisonous exhaust gases (e.g., carbon monoxide) being released into the building or indoor space. Further, a blockage in the vent and/or vent pipes can reduce air flow and increase exhaust gas recirculation, both of which can cause carbon monoxide production to increase. As discussed above in relation to  FIGS.  23 C and  23 J , design safety standards for pool heaters (e.g., ANSI Z21.56), require tests that demonstrate that a heater of the heating/cooling system will detect a vent and/or vent pipe blockage and deactivate before the carbon monoxide concentration in the exhaust gas reaches a predetermined level. 
     Pool heater manufacturers can detect a vent and/or vent pipe blockage via at least one pressure switch that detects the venting system exhaust pressure generated by the blockage. However, a pressure switch is susceptible to failure. For example, the tubing between the pressure switch and the vent and/or vent pipes can be disconnected or broken or the pressure switch can be improperly wired (i.e., “jumpered”) thereby rendering the pressure switch ineffective. 
     As shown in  FIG.  73   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , a vent  7406 , vent pipes  7408 , a fan  7410  having a fan motor  7412 , a differential pressure sensor  7414  and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23  and the differential pressure sensor  7414 . According to some embodiments of the present disclosure, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can include one or more temperature sensors  7415  that can monitor the temperature of one or more of the vent pipes  7408 , water inlet  7404   a , and water outlet  7404   b , which can be monitored by the processor  22  and used to generate a temperature profile for the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The differential pressure sensor  7414  measures the exhaust pressure in the vent  7406  and/or vent pipes  7408  and cannot be “jumpered” like a pressure switch which makes it more effective. As shown, the differential pressure sensor  7414  can measure the pressure differential between the vent  7406  and one or more of the vent pipes  7408  in order to determine the presence of a blockage therein. The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for detecting changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b  by defining a plurality of predetermined venting system exhaust pressure thresholds as described in further detail below. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the differential pressure sensor  7414  of the heater  7400 . It is noted that a pressure sensor may also be referred to as a pressure transducer, a pressure transmitter, a pressure indicator, a piezometer and a manometer and could be one of an absolute pressure sensor, a gauge pressure sensor, a vacuum pressure sensor, a differential pressure sensor, a sealed pressure sensor or any other type of pressure sensing device. The differential pressure sensor  7414  can be connected to and in communication with the heating/cooling system  14   b  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. 
     The processor  22  may detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b  and control the operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on (1) a measurement of the venting system exhaust pressure relative to a plurality of predetermined pressure thresholds and (2) a calculated difference between the measurement of the venting system exhaust pressure and a last recorded measurement of the venting system exhaust pressure relative to a plurality of predetermined pressure thresholds. It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
       FIGS.  74 A-B  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  73    for detecting changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b , indicated generally at method  7450 . 
     In step  7452 , the system  14   b  receives a command to heat the water in the pool or spa and ignites and fires the heater  7400 . A user may transmit the command via a remote device or terminal (e.g., smart phone/computer system  20  of  FIG.  1   ) or via a display of the heating/cooling system  14   b  to instruct the heating system  14   b  to heat the water in the pool or spa. Alternatively, the system  14   b  may transmit the command due to a predetermined condition. For example, a user can set a condition for commanding the heating/cooling system  14   b  to activate the heater  7400  (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time and/or at a predetermined temperature. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the activation command can also be a command to cool the water in a pool or spa. 
     In step  7454 , the system  14   b  receives a command to activate the fan  7410 . Then, in step  7456 , the system  14   b  determines whether the fan is operational. If the fan  7410  is not operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is inoperative), then in step  7458 , the system  14   b  determines whether any retries remain for transmitting an activation command to the fan  7410 . If no retries remain, then in step  7462 , the system  14   b  transmits an error message and the process ends. If at least one retry remains, then the system  14   b  transmits a command to activate the fan  7410  in step  7460 . If the fan  7410  is operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is operative), then the system  14   b  measures the venting system exhaust pressure via the differential pressure sensor  7414  in step  7464 . 
     In step  7466 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is greater than a predetermined minimum pressure threshold. A minimum venting system differential exhaust pressure should be present when the fan  7410  is operational. For example, if the fan  7410  is operational but the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is less than a predetermined minimum pressure threshold, then the vent  7406  or the vent pipes  7408  may be damaged and/or disconnected. 
     In step  7468 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the venting of the system  14   b  when the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is not greater than the predetermined minimum pressure threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., vent  7406  and/or vent pipes  7408  disconnected), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7470 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of exhaust gas within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is greater than the predetermined minimum pressure threshold, the process proceeds to step  7472 . 
     In step  7472 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is less than a predetermined maximum pressure threshold. A venting system differential exhaust pressure maximum threshold can be used to detect a blockage of the vent  7406  and/or the vent pipes  7408 . 
     In step  7474 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the venting of the system  14   b  when the system  14   b  determines that the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is not less than the predetermined maximum pressure threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., vent  7406  and/or vent pipes  7408  blocked), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7476 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of exhaust gas within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is less than the predetermined minimum pressure threshold, the process proceeds to step  7478 . 
     In step  7478 , the system  14   b  retrieves the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and in step  7480 , the system  14   b  calculates a difference between the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure. The last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure can be stored in the memory  23  or the cloud. An increase in the venting system differential exhaust pressure over time can be indicative of a blockage forming (e.g., an animal nest) within the vent  7406  and/or the vent pipes  7408 . 
     Therefore, in step  7482 , the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference between the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is less than the last recorded calculated difference. If the calculated difference between the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is less than the last recorded calculated difference, then in step  7484 , the system  14   b  records the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure as the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure. Additionally, in step  7486 , the system  14   b  records the calculated difference as the last recorded calculated difference. Then, in step  7488 , the system  14   b  continues the operation of the heater  7400 . 
     Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the calculated difference between the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure is not less than the last recorded calculated difference, then the process proceeds to step  7490 . In step  7490 , the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by a predetermined threshold. In particular, the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference between the measured venting system differential exhaust pressure and the last recorded measured venting system differential exhaust pressure exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by a predetermined “high” pressure threshold. 
     In step  7492 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the venting of the system  14   b  when the calculated difference exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by the predetermined “high” pressure threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., unsafe pressure level), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7496 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of exhaust gas within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, the system  14   b  continues the operation of the heater  7400  in step  7496  when the calculated difference does not exceed the last recorded calculated difference by the predetermined “high” pressure threshold. 
       FIGS.  74 C- 74 D  are flowcharts illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  73    for detecting changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b , indicated generally at method  7451 . More specifically, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b  by using the one or more temperature sensors  7415  shown in  FIG.  73    to monitor the temperature profile of the water inlet  7404   a , water outlet  7404   b , and vent pipe  7408 . The system can detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the venting of the heating/cooling system  14   b  using steps similar to those discussed in connection with method  7450 , except for the distinctions noted herein. According to some embodiments of the present disclosure, the foregoing processing steps can also be executed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  in connection with the “economy” and/or “adaptive” modes of the system described herein. 
     In step  7453 , the system  14   b  receives a command to heat the water in the pool or spa and ignites and fires the heater  7400 . A user may transmit the command via a remote device or terminal (e.g., smart phone/computer system  20  of  FIG.  1   ) or via a display of the heating/cooling system  14   b  to instruct the heating system  14   b  to heat the water in the pool or spa. Alternatively, the system  14   b  may transmit the command due to a predetermined condition. For example, a user can set a condition for commanding the heating/cooling system  14   b  to activate the heater  7400  (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time and/or at a predetermined temperature. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the activation command can also be a command to cool the water in a pool or spa. 
     In step  7455 , the system  14   b  receives a command to activate the fan  7410 . Then, in step  7457 , the system  14   b  determines whether the fan is operational. If the fan  7410  is not operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is inoperative), then in step  7459 , the system  14   b  determines whether any retries remain for transmitting an activation command to the fan  7410 . If no retries remain, then in step  7463 , the system  14   b  transmits an error message and the process ends. If at least one retry remains, then the system  14   b  transmits a command to activate the fan  7410  in step  7461 . If the fan  7410  is operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is operative), then the system  14   b  measures the temperature profile of the heating/cooling system  14   b  via the one or more temperature sensors  7415  in step  7465 . 
     In step  7467 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured temperature profile is greater than a predetermined minimum temperature profile threshold. A minimum temperature profile should be present when the fan  7410  is operational. For example, if the fan  7410  is operational but the measured temperature profile is less than a predetermined minimum temperature profile, then the vent  7406  or the vent pipes  7408  may be damaged and/or disconnected. 
     In step  7469 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the system  14   b  when the measured temperature profile is not greater than the predetermined minimum temperature profile threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., vent  7406  and/or vent pipes  7408  disconnected), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7471 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of temperature within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured temperature profile is greater than the predetermined minimum temperature profile threshold, the process proceeds to step  7473 . 
     In step  7473 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured temperature profile is less than a predetermined maximum temperature profile threshold. A temperature profile maximum threshold can be used to detect a blockage of the vent  7406  and/or the vent pipes  7408 . 
     In step  7475 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the venting of the system  14   b  when the system  14   b  determines that the measured temperature profile is not less than the predetermined maximum temperature profile threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., vent  7406  and/or vent pipes  7408  blocked), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7477 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of temperature within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured temperature profile is less than the predetermined minimum temperature profile threshold, the process proceeds to step  7479 . 
     In step  7479 , the system  14   b  retrieves the last recorded measured temperature profile and in step  7481 , the system  14   b  calculates a difference between the measured temperature profile and the last recorded measured temperature profile. The last recorded measured temperature profile can be stored in the memory  23  or the cloud. An increase in the temperature profile over time can be indicative of a blockage forming (e.g., an animal nest) within the vent  7406  and/or the vent pipes  7408 . 
     Therefore, in step  7483 , the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference between the measured temperature profile and the last recorded measured temperature profile is less than the last recorded calculated difference. If the calculated difference between the measured temperature profile and the last recorded measured temperature profile is less than the last recorded calculated difference, then in step  7485 , the system  14   b  records the measured temperature profile as the last recorded measured temperature profile. Additionally, in step  7487 , the system  14   b  records the calculated difference as the last recorded calculated difference. Then, in step  7489 , the system  14   b  continues the operation of the heater  7400 . 
     Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the calculated difference between the measured temperature profile and the last recorded measured temperature profile is not less than the last recorded calculated difference, then the process proceeds to step  7491 . In step  7491 , the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by a predetermined threshold. In particular, the system  14   b  determines whether the calculated difference between the measured temperature profile and the last recorded measured temperature profile exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by a predetermined “high” temperature profile threshold. 
     In step  7493 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the venting of the system  14   b  when the calculated difference exceeds the last recorded calculated difference by the predetermined “high” temperature profile threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., unsafe temperature level), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7495 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or the increase of temperature within the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, the system  14   b  continues the operation of the heater  7400  in step  7497  when the calculated difference does not exceed the last recorded calculated difference by the predetermined “high” temperature profile threshold. 
       FIG.  75    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for detecting the proper function of a fan motor of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measurement of the electric current of the fan motor. 
     A pool heater of a heating/cooling system comprises a fan driven by an electric motor to move air through the heating/cooling system. For example, in a gas-fired pool heater, air is moved through the burner and combustion system by a centrifugal fan (i.e., a blower) whereas in a heat pump pool heater, air is moved through the heat exchanger by an axial fan. The electric current flowing to the motors of these fans can be used to detect and diagnose a problem with the pool heater. Typically, in a gas-fired pool heater, a pressure switch can confirm whether the blower is functioning before the gas valve is opened and ignition is started by measuring the small vacuum generated by the blower. 
     The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for detecting the proper function of a fan motor of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measurement of the electric current of the fan motor at a given speed (e.g., RPM) via a current sensor and thereby obviating a need for a pressure switch. As shown in  FIG.  75   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , a vent  7406 , vent pipes  7408 , a fan  7410  having a fan motor  7412 , a current sensor  7416  and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23  and the current sensor  7416 . 
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The current sensor  7416  measures the electric current of the fan motor  7412 . The speed (e.g., RPM) of the fan motor can be provided to the processor  22 , either directly (e.g., by way of a communication channel, or the like, therebetween), or via an intermediate rotational speed sensor (not shown), for example, coupled to the output shaft of the motor  7412 . The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for detecting the proper function of the fan motor  7412  of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measurement of the electric current of the fan motor  7412  at a given speed (e.g., RPM), via the current sensor  7416 , and by defining a plurality of predetermined current thresholds. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the current sensor  7416  of the heater  7400 . It is noted that the current sensor  7416  could sense an alternating current input or a direct current input. The current sensor  7416  can be connected to and in communication with the heating/cooling system  14   b  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. 
     The processor  22  may detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the fan motor  7412  and control the operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measurement of the current of the motor  7412  relative to a plurality of predetermined current thresholds. It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
       FIG.  76    is a flowchart illustrating processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  75    for detecting the proper function of the fan motor  7412  of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on the measurement of the electric current of the fan motor  7412  via the current sensor  7416 , indicated generally at method  7500 . 
     In step  7502 , the system  14   b  receives a command to heat the water in the pool or spa and ignites and fires the heater  7400 . A user may transmit the command via a remote device or terminal (e.g., smart phone/computer system  20  of  FIG.  1   ) or via a display of the heating/cooling system  14   b  to instruct the heating system  14   b  to heat the water in the pool or spa. Alternatively, the system  14   b  may transmit the command due to a predetermined condition. For example, a user can set a condition for commanding the heating/cooling system  14   b  to activate the heater  7400  (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time and/or at a predetermined temperature. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the activation command can also be a command to cool the water in a pool or spa. 
     In step  7504 , the system  14   b  receives a command to activate the fan  7410 . Then, in step  7506 , the system  14   b  determines whether the fan is operational. If the fan  7410  is not operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is inoperative), then in step  7508 , the system  14   b  determines whether any retries remain for transmitting an activation command to the fan  7410 . If no retries remain, then in step  7510 , the system  14   b  transmits an error message and the process ends. If at least one retry remains, then the system  14   b  transmits a command to activate the fan  7410  in step  7510 . If the fan  7410  is operational (i.e., the fan motor  7412  is operative), then in step  7514 , the system  14   b  measures the current of the fan motor  7412  via the current sensor  7416 . Optionally, in step  7515 , the system  14   b  can measure the speed (e.g., RPM) of the fan motor  7412 . In step  7516 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured fan motor current is greater than a predetermined minimum current threshold. According to some embodiments of the present disclosure, the system  14   b  can determine whether the measured fan motor current is greater than a predetermined minimum current threshold at a given speed of the fan motor. For example, the current of the fan motor can vary, depending on the speed at which the fan motor is operating. As such, the system  14   b  can account for variations in operating speed when determining if the fan motor current is operating within current thresholds. A minimum fan motor current should be present when the fan  7410  and fan motor  7412  are operative. For example, if the system  14   b  receives a command to activate the fan  7410  but the measured fan motor current is not greater than the predetermined minimum current threshold, then the fan motor  7412  may be improperly wired. In step  7518 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the fan motor  7412  when the measured fan motor current is not greater than the predetermined minimum current threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., fan motor open circuit), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7520 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured fan motor current is greater than the predetermined minimum current threshold, the process proceeds to step  7522 . 
     In step  7522 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured fan motor current is less than a predetermined maximum current threshold. A fan motor maximum current threshold can detect whether the fan motor  7412  is damaged. 
     In step  7526 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicative of a problem with the fan motor  7412  of the system  14   b  when the system  14   b  determines that the measured fan motor current is not less than the predetermined maximum current threshold. The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., fan motor  7412  damaged), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7528 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and/or further damage to the fan motor  7412  and the process ends. Alternatively, if the system  14   b  determines that the measured fan motor current is less than the predetermined maximum current threshold, the system  14   b  continues the operation of the heater  7400  in step  7524 . 
       FIG.  77    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for ensuring sufficient water flow for proper function of a pool heater by measuring water flow rate via a flow sensor embedded within the pool heater. 
     A pool heater of a heating/cooling system commonly utilizes a pressure switch to measure the water flow rate and detect if a filter pump is operative. As such, the pool heater can be protected from damage incurred by heating water when the water flow rate is too low. However, pressure switches do not measure water flow rate directly and as such, can incorrectly indicate the water flow rate resulting in damage to the pool heater. The ability to accurately measure the water flow rate via a flow sensor allows for the advanced functionality of and enhanced diagnostics regarding the operation of pool heater and/or a heating/cooling system. As such, the heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for ensuring sufficient water flow for proper function of a pool heater by measuring water flow rate via a flow sensor embedded within the pool heater. Specifically, the heating/cooling system  14  can define at least one predetermined water flow rate threshold which allows for protecting a pool heater from the damage incurred by heating water when the water flow rate is too low. Additionally, the heating/cooling system  14   b  provides a user with enhanced diagnostics regarding the operation of a pool heater and/or a heating/cooling system. 
     As shown in  FIG.  77   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , a flow sensor  7418 , a pressure sensor  7419 , and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23 , the flow sensor  7418 , and/or the pressure sensor  7419 . 
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The flow sensor  7418  measures the water flow rate of the water within the inlet pipe  7404   a . Alternatively, or in addition to the flow sensor  7418 , a pressure sensor  7419  can measure a pressure differential between the water inlet pipe  7404   a  and the water outlet pipe  7404   b . The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for defining at least one predetermined minimum water flow rate, or pressure differential, threshold which allows for protecting the heater  7400  from the damage incurred by heating water when the water flow rate, or pressure, is too low. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the flow sensor  7418  and/or pressure sensor  7419  of the heater  7400 . It is noted that the flow sensor  7418  can be a paddle-wheel flow sensor wherein water flow causes the rotation of a paddle wheel which generates an electrical pulse signal whose frequency is proportional to the water flow rate. The flow sensor  7418  can also be of a type other than a paddle-wheel and can be a combination device comprising a flow sensor and a water temperature sensor. The flow sensor  7418  can be connected to and in communication with the heating/cooling system  14   b  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. 
     The processor  22  may detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the heater  7400  and control the operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measured water flow rate via the flow sensor  7418  relative to at least one predetermined minimum flow rate threshold. The processor  22  can also detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the heater  7400  and control the operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measured pressure differential between the water inlet  7404   a  and the water outlet  7404   b  via the pressure sensor  7419  relative to at least one predetermined maximum pressure differential threshold. It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
       FIG.  78    is a flowchart illustrating the processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  77    for ensuring sufficient water flow for proper function of the heater  7400  by measuring the water flow rate via the flow sensor  7418  embedded within the heater  7400 , indicated generally at method  7550 . In step  7552 , the system  14   b  receives a command to heat the water in the pool or spa and ignites and fires the heater  7400 . A user may transmit the command via a remote device or terminal (e.g., smart phone/computer system  20  of  FIG.  1   ) or via a display of the heating/cooling system  14   b  to instruct the heating system  14   b  to heat the water in the pool or spa. Alternatively, the system  14   b  may transmit the command due to a predetermined condition. For example, a user can set a condition for commanding the heating/cooling system  14   b  to activate the heater  7400  (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time and/or at a predetermined temperature. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the activation command can also be a command to cool the water in a pool or spa. 
     In step  7554 , the system  14   b  retrieves the minimum flow rate setpoint data for operation of the heater  7400 . The setpoint data can be stored in the memory  23  of the heating/cooling system  14   b  or in the cloud. In step  7556 , the system  14   b  measures the flow rate of the water within the water inlet pipe  7404   a  via the flow sensor  7418 . Then, in step  7558 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured flow rate is greater than the minimum flow rate setpoint data threshold. If the system determines that the measured flow rate is greater than the minimum flow rate setpoint data threshold, then the system  14   b  continues operation of the heater  7400  in step  7560 . This allows smaller BTU heaters to function at lower water flow rates while still requiring larger BTU heaters to have higher water flow rates. 
     Alternatively, if the system determines that the measured flow rate is not greater than the minimum flow rate setpoint data threshold, the process proceeds to step  7562 . In step  7562 , the system  14   b  determines whether any retries remain for transmitting a command to measure the flow rate via the flow sensor  7418 . If at least one retry remains, the system  14   b  transmits a command to measure the flow rate of the water within the water inlet pipe  7404   a  via the flow sensor  7418 . However, if no retries remain, then in step  7564 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicating insufficient water flow for proper function of the heater  7400 . 
     The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides a user with enhanced diagnostic messages regarding the operation of the heater  7400  and/or the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on the measured flow rate via the flow sensor  7418 . For example, the flow sensor  7418  provides the ability to distinguish the difference between a water flow rate that is zero (e.g., a water flow rate indicating that the filter pump is OFF) and a water flow rate that is low (e.g., a water flow rate indicating that the filter pump in ON but that the water flow is too low). As such, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can transmit messages to other network connected pool or spa equipment such as “more flow needed” or “turn pump on so water temperature can be checked” to ensure sufficient water flow for proper function the heater  7400 . Additionally, the system  14   b  can transmit the measured water flow rate to other network connected equipment such as a pool or spa automation system. 
     The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., insufficient water flow rate), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7566 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and the process ends. 
     According to some embodiments of the present disclosure, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can ensure sufficient water flow for proper function of the heater  7400  by measuring the water flow rate via the differential pressure sensor  7419  embedded within the heater  7400 . For example, in step  7555 , the system can retrieve a maximum differential pressure setpoint for heater operation. In step  7557 , the system measures the differential pressure between the water inlet and outlet pipes. In step  7559 , the system determines if the measured differential pressure is greater than the maximum differential pressure setpoint. If a positive determination is made in step  7559 , the system proceeds to step  7562 , as described herein. If a negative determination is made in step  7559 , the system proceeds to step  7560  and continues operation of the heater. 
       FIG.  79    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for ensuring sufficient gas pressure for proper function of a heater by measuring gas pressure via a pressure sensor embedded within the heater. 
     A gas-fired pool heater requires a minimum gas pressure supplied by a gas utility to function properly. If the pool heater has insufficient gas pressure, then the pool heater can fail to ignite, ignite harshly or exhibit a buildup of soot in the pool heater due to improper fuel/air mixture. Therefore, a pool heater of a heating/cooling system is commonly equipped with a test port that a technician can use to connect a pressure gauge and test for gas pressure. However, gas pressure can vary over time and as such, a point measurement made by a technician may not be representative of the gas pressure at the time of an ignition failure. Therefore, diagnosing a problem with the pool heater pertaining to insufficient gas pressure can be difficult. 
     The ability to accurately measure gas pressure via a pressure sensor allows for advanced functionality of and enhanced diagnostics regarding the operation of a pool heater and/or a heating/cooling system. For example, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can accurately diagnose a failed ignition due to low gas pressure and can also prevent harsh ignitions and the buildup of soot by monitoring gas pressure. In addition, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can provide a user with enhanced diagnostic messages regarding the operation of a pool heater and/or the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     As shown in  FIG.  79   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , an orifice  7420 , a valve  7422 , a gas line  7424 , a pressure sensor  7426  and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23  and the pressure sensor  7426 . 
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The pressure sensor  7426  measures the gas pressure within the gas line  7424 . Gas enters the heater  7400  via the gas line  7424  and valve  7422 . The gas is ignited and provides heat through the orifice  7420 . The heating/cooling system  14   b  provides for ensuring sufficient gas pressure for proper function of the heater  7400  by measuring gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7424 . Additionally, the heating cooling system  14   b  provides a user with enhanced diagnostic messages regarding the operation of the heater  7400  and/or the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the pressure sensor  7426  of the heater  7400 . It is noted that the pressure sensor  7426  may also be referred to as a pressure transducer, a pressure transmitter, a pressure indicator, a piezometer and a manometer and could be one of an absolute pressure sensor, a gauge pressure sensor, a vacuum pressure sensor, a differential pressure sensor, a sealed pressure sensor or any other type of pressure sensing device. The pressure sensor  7426  can be connected to and in communication with the heating/cooling system  14   b  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. 
     The processor  22  may detect changes and/or problems in the performance of the heater  7400  and control the operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on a measured gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7426  relative to at least one predetermined minimum gas pressure threshold. It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
       FIG.  80    is a flowchart illustrating the processing steps carried out by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  79    for ensuring sufficient gas pressure for proper function of the heater  7400  by measuring gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7424  embedded within the heater  7400 , indicated generally at method  7570 . 
     In step  7572 , the system  14   b  receives a command to heat the water in the pool or spa and ignites and fires the heater  7400 . A user may transmit the command via a remote device or terminal (e.g., smart phone/computer system  20  of  FIG.  1   ) or via a display of the heating/cooling system  14   b  to instruct the heating system  14   b  to heat the water in the pool or spa. Alternatively, the system  14   b  may transmit the command due to a predetermined condition. For example, a user can set a condition for commanding the heating/cooling system  14   b  to activate the heater  7400  (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time and/or at a predetermined temperature. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the activation command can also be a command to cool the water in a pool or spa. 
     In step  7574 , the system  14   b  retrieves the minimum gas pressure setpoint data for the operation of the heater  7400 . The data can be stored in the memory  23  of the heating/cooling system  14   b  or in the cloud. In step  7576 , the system  14   b  measures the gas pressure of the gas within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7426 . Then, in step  7578 , the system  14   b  determines whether the measured gas pressure is greater than the minimum gas pressure setpoint data threshold. If the system determines that the measured gas pressure is greater than the minimum gas pressure setpoint data threshold, then the system  14   b  continues operation of the heater  7400  in step  7580 . 
     Alternatively, if the system determines that the measured gas pressure is not greater than the minimum gas pressure setpoint data threshold, then the process proceeds to step  7582 . 
     In step  7582 , the system  14   b  determines whether any retries remain for transmitting a command to measure the gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the presurre sensor  7426 . If at least one retry remains, then the system  14   b  transmits a command to measure the gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7426 . However, if no retries remain, then in step  7584 , the system  14   b  transmits a diagnostic message indicating insufficient gas pressure for the proper function of the heater  7400 . 
     Additionally, the heating/cooling system  14   b  provides a user with enhanced diagnostic messages regarding the operation of the heater  7400  and/or the heating/cooling system  14   b  based on the measured gas pressure within the gas line  7424  via the pressure sensor  7426 . For example, the pressure sensor  7426  provides the ability to distinguish the difference between a gas pressure that is zero (e.g., a gas pressure indicating that the gas line is CLOSED) and a gas pressure that is low (e.g., a gas pressure indicating that the gas line is OPEN but that the gas pressure is too low). 
     The diagnostic message can be a report, an alert, etc. The diagnostic message can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The diagnostic message can include, but is not limited to, a summary of the problem (e.g., insufficient gas pressure), instructions detailing how to troubleshoot the problem, an option to schedule a repair specialist to fix the problem and an override command. Then in step  7586 , the system  14   b  stops the operation of the heater  7400  to prevent potential damage to the heater  7400  and the process ends. 
       FIG.  81    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for setting various threshold limits with respect to energy consumption via a graphic user interface of the heating/cooling system  14   b  and receiving alerts when energy consumption exceeds the set various threshold limits. 
     A heater generally consumes a large amount of energy to heat a pool and/or spa. Therefore, a user of a pool and/or spa may only heat the pool and/or spa when necessary. However, a user may inadvertently forget to turn the heater off after using the pool and/or spa or a third party (e.g., a house guest) may heat the pool and/or spa when the user is away from the pool and/or spa resulting in unexpectedly high energy consumption and utility bills. The ability to configure a heater of a heating/cooling system to set various threshold limits with respect to energy consumption via a graphic user interface and to receive alerts when energy consumption exceeds the set various threshold limits allows for responsible use of the heater and minimizing the operation costs thereof. 
     As shown in  FIG.  81   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , a graphic user interface  7428 , a timing circuit  7430  and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23 , the graphic user interface  7428  and the timing circuit  7430 . 
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The graphic user interface  7428  allows a user to configure the heater  7400  of the heating/cooling system  14   b  by setting various threshold limits with respect to energy consumption. The heating/cooling system  14   b  controls an operation of the heater  7400  based on the inputs to the graphic user interface  7428  and the timing circuit  7430  logic. Additionally, the heating/cooling system  14   b  provides the user with alerts when energy consumption exceeds the set various threshold limits. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the graphic user interface  7428  and the timing circuit  7430  of the heater  7400 . It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
       FIGS.  82 - 83    are user interface screens  7600  and  7630  generated by the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  81   . Referring to  FIG.  82   , the interface screen  7600  allows a user to configure the settings of the heater  7400 . For example, input fields  7602 ,  7606 ,  7610  and  7614  allow the user to set a temperature of the pool or spa for either a gas heater or a heat pump. In addition, input fields  7604 ,  7608 ,  7612  and  7616  allow the user to set a total run time of the gas heater or the heat pump. The heating/cooling system  14   b  can also allow the user to restrict the function of the heater  7400  under certain conditions. According to some embodiments of the present disclosure, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can include one or more “adaptive” or “economy” modes, which the user can select, configure, and/or enable using one or more interface screens (not shown) generated by the heating/cooling system  14   b  and displayed on the graphical user interface  7428 . For example, the “adaptive” or “economy” modes can minimize energy consumption while maintaining user comfort by automatically lowering the temperature setpoint of the pool or spa (thereby reducing energy demand on the heater  14   b ) when the ambient outdoor temperature is warmer and by automatically raising the temperature setpoint of the pool or spa when the ambient outdoor temperature is colder. The temperature setpoint can be modified continuously based on a current temperature differential (e.g., the difference between the current ambient temperature and a user specified water temperature) or the temperature setpoint can be modified once the current ambient temperature crosses one or more predetermined thresholds. When enabled by the user, the “adaptive” or “economy” modes can increase the efficiency of the heater  14   b  by 2% or more. Referring to  FIG.  83   , the interface screen  7630  allows a user to configure the heater  7400  to receive an alert when energy consumption exceeds set threshold limits under certain conditions. For example, input field  7632  allows the user to receive an alert when a gas heater runs for more than a set number of total hours in a day. Additionally, input fields  7634 ,  7636  and  7638 ,  7640  respectively allow the user to receive an alert when the pool temperature is set higher than a temperature threshold for more than a particular number of days in a row for the gas heater and when the spa temperature is set higher than a temperature threshold for more than a particular number of hours in a day for the gas heater. 
     Similarly, input fields  7642 ,  7644 ,  7646 ,  7648  and  7650  allow the user to receive alerts when energy consumption exceeds set threshold limits under certain conditions for the heat pump. For example, input field  7642  allows the user to receive an alert when the heat pump runs for more than a set number of total hours in a day. Additionally, input fields  7644 ,  7646  and  7648 ,  7650  respectively allow the user to receive an alert when the pool temperature is set higher than a temperature threshold for more than a particular number of days in a row for the heat pump and when the spa temperature is set higher than a temperature threshold for more than a particular number of hours in a day for the heat pump. 
     The alert can be a notification and can be transmitted to and displayed by the heating/cooling system  14   b  display or a remote device such as the smart phone/computer system  20 . The alert can include, but is not limited to, an energy consumption report, an estimated utility bill and/or an override command. 
       FIG.  84    is a block diagram  7770  illustrating a component schematic capable of being implemented in an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for detecting electrical short circuits and resetting circuit protection. 
     Generally, a pool heater utilizes various switching devices to detect the proper function thereof. For example, a pool heater can use a bimetal switch to protect against over-temperature conditions, an air pressure switch to ensure a fan is functioning properly, a water pressure switch to ensure a water pump is functioning properly, etc. Typically, a control system of the pool heater passes an amount of current through these switches to check their operational state (i.e., the control system polls a status of the switches). However, polling the status of these switches in this manner is problematic because a ground short on the wires thereof can damage the control system, a transformer and/or a fuse of the pool heater. 
     Therefore, an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  implements a method of polling the status of switching and/or sensing devices to detect electrical shorts and reset circuit protection by using at least one polymeric positive temperature coefficient (PPTC) embedding within a heater. A PPTC device is a resettable fuse and is positioned between a control module (e.g., a processor) and a switching or sensing device. For example, as shown in  FIG.  84   , the PPTC  7434   a  is positioned between the processor  22  and an air pressure switch  7436  and the PPTC device  7434   b  is positioned between the processor  22  and a water pressure switch  7438 . The PPTC devices  7434   a  and  7434   b  may be directly coupled to the processor  22  or indirectly coupled to the processor  22  via a Vbus  7432 . As such, the heating/cooling system  14   b  can accurately detect a problem causing high current while simultaneously protecting itself from damage. Once the detected electrical short is removed or the defective switching or sensing device is removed, normal operation of the heating/cooling system  14   b  can resume. 
       FIG.  85    is a block diagram illustrating components of an embodiment of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    for enabling the simplified setup of replacement components via a removable memory module storing configuration data of a heater of the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     Pool heater control systems have advanced such that it is necessary to incorporate more setting and configuration data and values into the control system to ensure the proper function of the pool heater. Settings such as the pool heater model number, the serial number, the BTU output, the minimum ambient temperature, the minimum water flow rate, etc. are set by the manufacturer when the pool heater is manufactured. In contrast, other settings such as a user&#39;s favorite temperature settings, preset run durations, temperature unit, maximum allowed temperature settings, pool size, etc. are set in the field when the pool heater is installed. All of these settings must be manually re-entered if it becomes necessary to replace a faulty circuit board of the pool heater. For example, a memory module in a service replacement circuit board is specially coded to indicate that it has never been configured for a specific pool heater. Therefore, after being powered ON for the first time, a user is prompted to enter the setting and configuration data and values for the pool heater to ensure that the pool heater functions properly. 
     As such, the heating/cooling system  14   b  enables the simplified setup of a replacement circuit board via a removable memory module storing configuration data of a heater of the heating/cooling system  14   b . As shown in  FIG.  85   , the heating/cooling system  14   b  could include a heater  7400  having a water inlet pipe  7404   a , a water outlet pipe  7404   b , a heat exchanger  7402 , a portable memory module  7440  and a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”) including, but not limited to, a processor  22  and a memory  23 . Alternatively, the control subsystem  12   b  could be a hardware processor including a controller in communication with the memory  23  and the portable memory module  7440 . 
     The water inlet pipe  7404   a  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating/cooling system  14   b  via, for example, a pump or via other means. The water passes through the heater  7400  and into the heat exchanger  7402 . The water outlet pipe  7404   b  transports water out from the heating/cooling system  14   b  to, for example, the pool or spa. The portable memory module  7440  plugs into a circuit board of the heating/cooling system  14   b  (not shown) and stores the configuration data of the heater  7400  of the heating/cooling system  14   b.    
     Referring to  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor  22  in communication with a memory  23  including at least one of a random-access memory  24  and a non-volatile memory  30 . The processor  22  provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory  30  can store one or more local control programs  30  for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor  22  is in communication with the portable memory module  7440  of the heater  7400 . The portable memory module  7440  can be connected to and in communication with the heating/cooling system  14   b  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. When a replacement circuit board is installed, the portable memory module  7440  can instantly configure the replacement circuit board by being removed from the circuit board and plugged into the replacement circuit board. Additionally, the portable memory module  7740  can be used to store diagnostic event history, enabling the history to stay with the heater  7400  when the replacement circuit board is installed. 
     It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  may be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heating/cooling system  14   b . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
     As discussed above,  FIGS.  73 - 85    illustrate components of embodiments of the heating/cooling system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    and processing steps carried out by the embodiments of the heating/cooling system  14   b .  FIG.  1    illustrates the overall system of the present disclosure, indicated generally at  10 . The system  10  includes, but is not limited to, a plurality of network communication and local control subsystems  12   a - h  which could be installed in or connected to a plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - h , so as to provide network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - h . The pool and spa equipment could include, but is not limited to, a pump  14   a , the heating/cooling system  14   b , a sanitization system  14   c , a water feature/miscellaneous subsystem  14   d , a valve actuator/valve position  14   e , a pool/spa control system  14   f , a cleaner  14   g  and a lighting system  14   h.    
     The control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could communicate with each other over a network  16 , which could include, but is not limited to, the Internet. The control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  provide “Internet-of-Things” functionality for the plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . It is noted that control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could further include a “big data” subsystem, subsystems for receiving input from manufacturers/factories, subsystems for receiving external data/input (e.g., data from the Internet), and subsystems for receiving input from customers. Additionally and as discussed above, the control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could include control logic for allowing each of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h  to interact with each other (e.g., to exchange data and commands for controlling each other), as well as to be remotely controlled by another system such as a remote server, a “cloud” based control system, a remote computer system, a smart device (e.g., smart phone, smart speaker, smart chip embedded in the body), etc., and combinations thereof. It is noted that, as described herein, the heating/cooling system  14   b  may also describe, or be described as, a heater, a cooling system, cooler, or any combination thereof. Each of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h  can further include a display, such as a touchscreen, a screen with a touchpad, etc. 
     Additionally, as can be seen in  FIG.  1   , the control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could also communicate with one or more servers  18 , and/or with one or more smart devices  20  (e.g., a phone, a tablet, a computer system, etc.), via the network  16 . Still further, an on-site control processor  19  could be in communication with the various systems shown in  FIG.  1   . The on-site control processor  19  could be a pool/spa control system installed at the location of a pool or spa, a reduced-functionality pool/spa control system, or another type of control system. 
     As discussed below in connection with  FIGS.  86 - 91   , the systems and methods are discussed with reference to a swimming pool and/or a spa. However, it should be understood that systems and methods of the present disclosure can be used with any body of liquid, including but not limited to, bathtubs, water tanks, etc. It should further be noted that the system and methods will be discussed below with reference to a heating system. However, it should be understood that the systems and methods of the present disclosure can also be used with a cooling system or a heating/cooling system. As such, examples and embodiments for cooling systems will also be described below. 
       FIG.  86    is a diagram illustrating components of the heating system  14   b  of  FIG.  1    of the present disclosure. The heating system  14   b  includes an inlet pipe  7812 , an outlet pipe  7814 , an inlet temperature sensor  7816 , an outlet temperature sensor  7818 , a network communication and local control subsystem  12   b  (“control subsystem  12   b ”), described in connection with  FIGS.  1  and  2   , and a heater  7822 . The inlet pipe  7812  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating system  14   b  via, for example, a water pump or other means. The inlet temperature sensor  7816  measures the temperature of the water before the water enters the heater  7822 . The outlet pipe  7814  transports water out from the heater  7822  to, for example, the pool or spa. The outlet temperature sensor  7818  measures the temperature of the water after the water leaves the heater  7822 . The inlet temperature sensor  7816  and the outlet temperature sensor  7818  can be one or more of a negative temperature coefficient thermistor, a resistance temperature detector, a thermocouple, a semiconductor-based sensor, a thermometer, or any other type of temperature sensing device. The inlet temperature sensor  7816  and the outlet temperature sensor  7818  can be connected to and in communication with the heater  7822  and the control subsystem  12   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. It should be understood that the inlet temperature sensor  7816  can be positioned anywhere along the inlet pipe  7812 , the heater  7822 , a pump, or along other inlet components. Further, it should be understood that the outlet temperature sensor  7818  can be positioned anywhere along the outlet pipe  7814 , the heater  7822  or along other outlet components. 
     As described in connection with  FIGS.  1  and  2   , the control subsystem  12   b  could include a processor in communication with a memory including at least one of a random-access memory and a non-volatile memory. The processor provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  12   b . The non-volatile memory can store one or more local control programs for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  12   b  is installed. The processor is in communication with the inlet temperature sensor  7816 , outlet temperature sensor  7818 , and the heater  7822 . 
     The processor can detect changes in the performance of the heating system  14   b  and control the operation of the heating system  14   b  based on a calculated difference between temperature measurements taken by the inlet temperature sensor  7816  and the outlet temperature sensor  7818 . It is noted that the control subsystem  12   b  can be affixed to, installed within, or located remotely from the heater  7822 . The components of the control subsystem  12   b  are discussed in more detail in regards to  FIGS.  1  and  2   . 
     The heating system  14   b  can further include a display, such as a touchscreen, a screen with a touchpad, etc. The display can be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heater  7822 . The display can receive user input via, for example, the touch screen, a keyboard, a remote or wireless signal, etc. The display can further show diagnostic issues, messages, instructions, etc. 
       FIG.  87    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by an embodiment of the system of the present disclosure for detecting an improperly installed heating system, indicated generally at method  7830 . In step  7832 , the system receives a temperature command. The temperature command can be an instruction to heat the water in the pool or spa. In a first example, a user sends the temperature command by using a smart device (e.g., smart phone), or using a display and/or control buttons on the heating system  14   b  to instruct the heater  7822  to heat the pool. In a second example, the system transmits the temperature command due to a predetermined condition. For example, the user can set a condition instructing the heater  7822  to activate (e.g., engage heating functions) at a predetermined time, at a predetermined temperature, etc. Those skilled in the art would understand that, in a heating/cooling system or a cooling system, the temperature command can also be an instruction to cool the water in the pool or spa. 
     In step  7834 , the system measures the inlet water temperature and the outlet water temperature via the inlet temperature sensor  7816  and the outlet temperature sensor  7818 , respectively. In a first example, the system measures the inlet water temperature and the outlet water temperature upon receiving the temperature command. In a second example, the system measures the inlet water temperature and the outlet water temperature upon a predetermined amount of time after receiving the temperature command. The predetermined amount of time can allow for the heating system  14   b  to enter a proper operational state, such as a heat exchanger of the heater  7822  heating to an optimal level. 
     In step  7836 , the system determines whether the inlet water temperature is greater than the outlet water temperature. When the inlet temperature is greater than the outlet temperature, the system proceeds to step  7838  and generates and transmits a diagnostic report. The diagnostic report can be a report, a message, an alert, etc. In an example, the diagnostic report is transmitted to and displayed by the display of the heating system  14   b  or the smart device. The diagnostic report can include a report of the issue (e.g., incorrect piping installation), instructions detailing how to fix the issue, an option to schedule a repair specialist, an override command, etc. When the inlet temperature is not greater than the outlet temperature, the system proceeds to step  7840  and executes the temperature command (e.g., activates the heating system  14   b ). 
     Those skilled in the art would understand that in a heating/cooling system or a cooling-only system, when the temperature command is an instruction to cool the water, step  7836  can include the system determining whether the inlet water temperature is less than the outlet water temperature. When the inlet temperature is less than the outlet temperature in view of an instruction to cool the system, in step  7838 , transmits a diagnostic report. Otherwise, when the inlet temperature is not less than the outlet temperature in view of an instruction to cool, the system executes the temperature command (e.g., activates the cooling system) in step  7840 . 
       FIG.  88    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by an embodiment of the system of the present disclosure for detecting a low water flow rate through the heating system  14   b  based on measurements of inlet and outlet water temperatures, indicated generally at method  7850 . In step  7852 , the system determines that the heater  7822  is activated. In step  7854 , the system waits a predetermined amount of time. For example, the system can wait 15 seconds. This waiting period allows the heater  7822  to achieve a suitable flow stabilization. Those skilled in the art would understand that other time periods can also be used and that different heating systems can require different durations to achieve the suitable flow stabilization. In step  7856 , the system calculates a temperature rise. For example, the control system  12   b  performs a first temperature measurement at the inlet pipe  7812 , a second temperature measurement at the outlet pipe  7814 , and subtracts the inlet temperature from the outlet temperature to determine the temperature rise. 
     In step  7858 , the system determines a maximum allowed temperature value for the heating system  14   b . In an example, the system can use a lookup table. The lookup table can include heating system types, BTU/joule size, piping sizes, capacity, a maximum allowed temperature rise value for each type/size, etc. The lookup table can be stored in the system, on the Internet (in the cloud), on a remote server, etc. In step  7860 , the system determines whether the value of the measured temperature rise is greater than the value of the maximum allowed temperature rise. When the value of the measured temperature rise is greater than the value of the maximum allowed temperature rise, the system proceeds to step  7862 , and generates and transmits a diagnostic report, and shuts down the heater. Again, the diagnostic report can include a report of the issue (e.g., low flow rate), instructions detailing how to fix the issue, an option to schedule a repair specialist, an override command, etc. Those skilled in the art would understand that method  7860  can be similarly applied to a cooling system, where a temperature drop value is calculated and compared to a lookup table including a maximum allowed temperature drop. 
     Importantly, the processing steps discussed above in connection with  FIGS.  87 - 88    could be carried out remote from the heater, e.g., in one or more of the devices shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  1   , the system  10  includes, but is not limited to, a plurality of network communication and local control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  (including the control subsystem  12   b ) which could be installed in or connected to a plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h  (including the heating system  14   b ), so as to provide network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . The subsystems  12   a - 12   h  (including the control subsystem  12   b ) are described in greater detail in connection with  FIG.  2   . The subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could communicate with each other over the network  16 , which could include, but is not limited to, the Internet. The subsystems  12   a - 12   h  provide “Internet-of-Things” functionality for the plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . It is noted that subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could further include a “big data” subsystem, subsystems for receiving input from manufacturers/factories, subsystems for receiving external data/input (e.g., data from the Internet), and subsystems for receiving input from customers. As discussed above, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could include control logic for allowing each of the devices  14   a - 14   h  to interact with each other (e.g., to exchange data and commands for controlling each other), as well as to be remotely controlled by another system such as a remote server, a “cloud” based control system, a remote computer system, a smart device (e.g., smart phone, smart speaker, smart chip embedded in the body), etc., and combinations thereof as will be discussed in greater detail below. For example, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could be programmed to carry out the processes discussed above in connection with  FIGS.  87  and  88   . 
     Also referring back to  FIG.  3   , which is a diagram illustrating various types of control logic in accordance with the present disclosure, for controlling various types of pool and spa equipment, it is noted that the control logic, indicated generally as pool control logic  70 , could include the process steps discussed herein in connection with  FIGS.  87  and  88   . The control logic  70  could be embodied as programmed instructions (software code) stored on a non-transitory computer-readable medium, and could include pump control logic  84  and heater control logic  80 , which could also include the process steps discussed herein in connection with  FIGS.  87  and  88   . Such logic could be installed locally (e.g., in one or more of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h ), on a remote server or computer system (e.g., in the server  18  or the smart phone/computer system  20 ), in the “cloud,” or in any combination of such systems shown in  FIG.  1   . 
       FIG.  89    is a diagram illustrating components of another heater system  7914   b  of the present disclosure. The system  7914   b  includes an inlet pipe  8012 , an outlet pipe  8014 , an inlet temperature sensor  8016 , an outlet temperature sensor  8018 , a network communication and local control subsystem  7912   b  (“control subsystem  7912   b ”), a heater  8022 , an ambient air temperature sensor  8024 , and a refrigerant temperature sensor  8026 . The inlet pipe  8012  transports water from the pool/spa into the heating system  7914   b  via, for example, a water pump or other means. The inlet temperature sensor  8016  measures the temperature of the water before the water enters the heater  8022 . The outlet pipe  8014  transports water out from the heater  8022  to, for example, the pool or spa. The outlet temperature sensor  8018  measures the temperature of the water after the water leaves the heater  8022 . The inlet temperature sensor  8016 , the outlet temperature sensor  8018 , the ambient air temperature sensor  8024 , and the refrigerant temperature sensor  8026  can be one of a negative temperature coefficient thermistor, a resistance temperature detector, a thermocouple, a semiconductor-based sensor, a thermometer, or any other type of temperature sensing device. The temperature sensors  8016 ,  8018 ,  8024 , and  8026  can be connected to and in communication with the heater  8022  and the control subsystem  7912   b  via a wired or a wireless connection. It should be understood that the temperature sensors  8016 ,  8018 ,  8024 , and  8026  can be positioned anywhere along the inlet pipe  8012 , the outlet pipe  8014 , the heater  8022 , a pump, or along other components. 
     The control subsystem  7912   b  can be similar to control subsystem  12   b  described herein and could include a processor in communication with a memory including at least one of a random-access memory and a non-volatile memory. The processor provides local processing capability for the control subsystem  7912   b . The non-volatile memory can store one or more local control programs for providing local control of the pool and spa equipment in which the control subsystem  7912   b  is installed. The processor is in communication with the temperature sensors  8016 ,  8018 ,  8024 , and  8026 , and the heater  8022 . 
     The processor can detect changes in the performance of the heating system  7914   b  and control the operation of the heating system  7914   b  based on a calculated difference between a temperature measurement of the inlet temperature sensor  8016  and the outlet temperature sensor  8018 , a comparison of a temperature measurement of the ambient air temperature sensor  8024  and a threshold value, and a comparison of a temperature measurement of the refrigerant temperature sensor  8026  and a threshold value. It is noted that the control subsystem  7912   b  can be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heater  8022 . The components of the control subsystem  7912   b , as part of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h , are discussed in more detail above in regards to  FIG.  2   . 
     The heating system  7914   b  can further include a display, such as a touchscreen, a screen with a touchpad, etc. The display can be affixed to, installed within or installed remotely from the heater  8022 . The display can receive user input via, for example, the touch screen, a keyboard, a remote or wireless signal, etc. The display can further show diagnostic issues, messages, instructions, etc. 
       FIG.  90    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by an embodiment of the system of the present disclosure for detecting frosting conditions in the heater  8022 , indicated generally at method  8030 . In step  8032 , the system determines an ambient air temperature. For example, the system uses the ambient air temperature sensor  224  to measure the ambient air temperature. In step  8034 , the system  7914   b  determines a refrigerant temperature. For example, the system uses the refrigerant temperature sensor  8026  to measure the refrigerant temperature. 
     In step  8036 , the system determines whether the refrigerant temperature is less than a refrigerant temperature threshold. The refrigerant temperature threshold can be preset by a manufacture, a supplier, a user, or any other party. The refrigerant temperature threshold can be modified, either remotely or locally. For example, the refrigerant temperature threshold can be modified via wireless software update (e.g., remotely) or the user can modify the refrigerant temperature threshold using the display of the heating system  7914   b  (e.g., locally). Those skilled in the art would understand that the refrigerant temperature threshold can be modified in response to, refrigerant pressure, refrigerant type, or any other factors affecting the refrigerant. When the refrigerant temperature is not less than the refrigerant temperature threshold, the method  8030  ends. 
     When the refrigerant temperature is less than the refrigerant temperature threshold, the system proceeds to step  8038  and determines whether the ambient temperature is less than an ambient temperature threshold. The ambient temperature threshold can also be preset by the manufacture, the supplier, the user, or any other party, and can also be modified, either remotely or locally. Those skilled in the art would understand that the ambient temperature threshold can be modified in response to, atmospheric pressure, sea level, humidity, or any other factors. 
     When the ambient temperature is less than the refrigerant temperature threshold, in step  8040 , the system executes a defrost cycle. In an example, the defrost cycle can include either deactivating the heating system  200  and allowing a heat exchanger of the heater  8022  to thaw out due to ambient air temperatures, secondary heaters, etc., or engaging a refrigerant reversing valve to heat a heat exchanger surface to thaw out the heat exchanger. The system can further send an alert or notification indicating that the heating system  7914   b  has been deactivated and the defrost cycle has been activated. The alert or notification can be set to a user&#39;s smart device, to the display of the heating system  7914   b , etc. 
     When the ambient temperature is not less than the refrigerant temperature threshold, the system proceeds to step  8042 , deactivates the heating system, and transmits a diagnostic report. The diagnostic report can be a report, a message, an alert, etc. The diagnostic report can include a report of the issue, instructions detailing how to fix the issue, an option to schedule a repair specialist, an override command, etc. 
       FIG.  91    is a flowchart illustrating process steps carried out by an embodiment of the system of the present disclosure for detecting and correcting a stuck reversing valve in a refrigeration system of the heating system  7914   b , indicated generally at method  8050 . In step  8052 , the system determines whether the heating system  7914   b  is in a heating mode or in a cooling mode. In step  8054 , the system measures the inlet water temperature and the outlet water temperature via the inlet temperature sensor  8016  and the outlet temperature sensor  8018 , respectively. In step  8056 , the system determines whether the reversing valve is stuck. In a first embodiment, where the heating system  7914   b  is in the heating mode, the system determines whether the reversing valve is stuck when the outlet water temperature is lower than the inlet water temperature. In a second embodiment, where the heating system  7914   b  is in the cooling mode, the system determines whether the reversing valve is stuck when the outlet water temperature is greater than the inlet water temperature. If the system determines that the reversing valve is not stuck, the method  8050  ends. 
     When the system determines that the reversing valve is stuck, the system proceeds to step  8058  and cycles the reversing valve for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period of time can be set by a manufacture, a supplier, the user, or any other party, and can also be modified, either remotely or locally. In an embodiment, the system can disable the heating system  7914   b  prior to cycling the reversing valve for the predetermined amount of time. This is because, as understood by those skilled in the art, cycling the reversing valve can be more effective when the compressor of the heating system  7914   b  is not running. In another embodiment, the system can cycle the reversing valve for a first predetermined amount of time, determine whether the reversing valve is still stuck (using, for example, the method described in step  8056 ), and when it is determined that the reversing value is still stuck, deactivate the heating system  7914   b  and cycle the reversing valve for a second predetermined period of time. The first predetermined period of time and the second predetermined period of time can be the same or different values. 
     In step  8060 , the system again determines whether the reversing valve is stuck, using, for example, the method described in step  8056 . It should be understood that, if the heating system  7914   b  was deactivated to cycle the reversing valve, as described in step  8058 , the heating system  7914   b  can have to be reactivated to determine whether the reversing valve is stuck. If the system determines that the reversing valve is unstuck, the method  8050  ends. If the system determines that the reversing valve is still stuck, the system proceeds to step  8062 , transmits a diagnostic report, and deactivates the heating system  7914   b . Again, the diagnostic report can include a report of the issue (e.g., stuck reversing valve), instructions detailing how to fix the issue, an option to schedule a repair specialist, an override command, etc. 
     It is noted that the system  7914   b  could be implemented in the networked pool/spa system, indicated generally at  10 , of  FIG.  1   . Importantly, the processing steps discussed above in connection with  FIGS.  90  and  91    could be carried out remote from the heater, e.g., in one or more of the devices shown in  FIG.  1   . The system  10  could include the plurality of network communication and local control subsystems  12   a - 12   h  (including the control subsystem  7912   b ) which could be installed in or connected to a plurality of pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h  (including the heating system  7914   b ), so as to provide network connectivity and remote monitoring and control of the pool and spa equipment  14   a - 14   h . Additionally, the subsystems  12   a - 12   h  could communicate with each other over a network  16 , which could include, but is not limited to, the Internet. 
     It is also noted that the control logic, indicated generally as pool control logic  70  of  FIG.  3    could include the process steps discussed herein in connection with  FIGS.  90  and  91   , and could be embodied as programmed instructions (software code) stored on a non-transitory computer-readable medium, and could include pump control logic  84  and heater control logic  80 . Such logic could be installed locally (e.g., in one or more of the subsystems  12   a - 12   h ), on a remote server or computer system (e.g., in the server  18  or the smart phone/computer system  20 ), in the “cloud,” or in any combination of such systems. 
     Having thus described the disclosure in detail, it is to be understood that the foregoing description is not intended to limit the spirit or scope thereof. What is desired to be protected by Letters Patent is set forth in the appended claims.